An Outline of Occult Science
Author: Rudolf Steiner
Date: 2018-05-24T04:39:04.170167+00:00

The Project Gutenberg EBook of An Outline of Occult Science by Rudolf Steiner

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost
and with almost no restrictions whatsoever.

You may copy
it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project

Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
http://www.gutenberg.org/license

Title: An Outline of Occult Science

Author: Rudolf Steiner

Release Date: December 20, 2009 [Ebook 30718]

Language: English

***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK

AN OUTLINE OF OCCULT SCIENCE***

An Outline of Occult Science

By

Rudolf Steiner, Ph.D.

Authorized Translation from the Fourth Edition

(Newly Revised)

AnthropoSophic Press

New York

1922

Contents

Preface to the Fourth Edition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Author's Remarks To First Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

. . . . . . . .

16

Chapter II. The Nature of Man . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Chapter III. Sleep and Death . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man . . . . .

92

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

. . . . . . . 217

Chapter VI. The Present and Future Evolution of the World
and of Humanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Chapter VII. Details from the Domain of Occult Science

Man's Etheric Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

[xi]

Preface to the Fourth Edition.

One who undertakes to represent certain results of scientific
spiritual research of the kind recorded in this book, must above
all things be prepared to find that this kind of investigation is at
the present time almost universally regarded as impossible. For
things are related in the following pages about which those who
are today esteemed exact thinkers, assert that they will probably
remain altogether indeterminable by human intelligence. One
who knows and can respect the reasons which prompt many a
serious person to assert this impossibility, would fain make the
attempt again and again to show what misunderstandings are
really at the bottom of the belief that it is not given to human
knowledge to penetrate into the superphysical worlds.

For two things present themselves for consideration. First, no
human being will, on deeper reflection, be able in the long run
to shut his eyes to the fact that his most important questions as
to the meaning and significance of life must remain unanswered,
if there be no access to higher worlds. Theoretically we may
delude ourselves concerning this fact and so get away from
it; the depths of our soul-life, however, will not tolerate such
self-delusion. The person who will not listen to what comes

[xii]

from these depths of the soul will naturally reject any account
of supersensible worlds. There are however people—and their
number is not small—who find it impossible to remain deaf to
the demands coming from the depths of the soul. They must
always be knocking at the gates which, in the opinion of others,
bar the way to what is “incomprehensible.”

Secondly, the statements of “exact thinkers” are on no account
to be despised. Where they have to be taken seriously, one who
occupies himself with them will thoroughly feel and appreciate

Preface to the Fourth Edition.

3
this seriousness.

The writer of this book would not like to
be taken for one who lightly disregards the enormous thought-
labour which has been expended in determining the limits of
the human intellect. This thought-labour cannot be put aside
with a few phrases about “academic wisdom” and the like. In
many cases it has its source in true striving after knowledge
and in genuine discernment. Indeed, even more than this must
be admitted; reasons have been brought forward to show that
that knowledge which is to-day regarded as scientific cannot
penetrate into supersensible worlds, and these reasons are in a
certain sense irrefutable.

Now it may appear strange to many people that the writer
of this book admits this freely, and yet undertakes to make
statements about supersensible worlds. It seems indeed almost
impossible that a person should admit in a certain sense the
reasons why knowledge of superphysical worlds is unattainable,

[xiii]

and should yet speak about those worlds.

Yet it is possible to take this attitude, and at the same time
to understand that it impresses others as being inconsistent. It
is not given to every one to enter into the experiences we pass
through when we approach supersensible realms with the human
intellect. Then it turns out that intellectual proofs may certainly
be irrefutable, and that notwithstanding this, they need not be decisive with regard to reality. Instead of all sorts of theoretical
explanations, let us now try to make this comprehensible by a
comparison. That comparisons are not in themselves proofs is
readily admitted, but this does not prevent their often making
intelligible what has to be expressed.

Human understanding, as it works in everyday life and in
ordinary science, is actually so constituted that it cannot penetrate
into superphysical worlds.

This may be proven beyond the
possibility of denial. But this proof can have no more value for a
certain kind of soul-life than the proof one would use in showing
that man's natural eye cannot, with its visual faculty, penetrate

4

An Outline of Occult Science
to the smallest cells of a living being, or to the constitution of
far-off celestial bodies.

Just as the assertion is true and demonstrable that the ordinary
power of seeing does not penetrate as far as the cells, so also
is the other assertion which maintains that ordinary knowledge

[xiv]

cannot penetrate into supersensible worlds. And yet the proof
that the ordinary power of vision has to stop short of the cells
in no way excludes the investigation of cells. Why should the
proof that the ordinary power of cognition has to stop short of
supersensible worlds, decide anything against the possibility of
investigating those worlds?

One can well sense the feeling which this comparison may
evoke in many people. One can even understand that he who
doubts and holds the above comparison against this labor of
thought, does not even faintly sense the whole seriousness of
that mental effort. And yet the present writer is not only fully
convinced of that seriousness, but is of opinion that that work
of thought may be numbered among the noblest achievements
of humanity. To show that the human power of vision cannot
perceive the cellular structure without the help of instruments,
would surely be a useless undertaking; but in exact thinking, to
become conscious of the nature of that thought is a necessary
work of the mind.

It is only natural that one who devotes
himself to such work, should not notice that reality may refute
him. The preface to this book can be no place for entering into
many “refutations” of former editions, put forth by those who
are entirely devoid of appreciation of that for which it strives, or
who direct their unfounded attacks against the personality of the
author; but it must, none the less, be emphasized that belittling
of serious scientific thought in this book can only be imputed to

[xv]

the author by one who wishes to shut himself off from the spirit
of what is expressed in it.

Man's power of cognition may be augmented and made more
powerful, just as the eye's power of vision may be augmented.

Preface to the Fourth Edition.

5

Only the means for strengthening the capacity of cognition are
entirely of a spiritual nature; they are inner processes, belonging
purely to the soul. They consist of what is described in this
book as meditation and concentration (contemplation). Ordinary
soul-life is bound up with the bodily instrument; the strengthened
soul-life liberates itself from it. There are schools of thought
at the present time to which this assertion must appear quite
senseless, to which it must seem based only upon self-delusion.

Those who think in this way will find it easy, from their point of
view, to prove that “all soul-life” is bound up with the nervous
system. One who holds the standpoint from which this book
has been written, can thoroughly understand such proofs. He
understands people who say that only superficiality can assert
that there may be some kind of soul-life independent of the body,
and who are quite convinced that in such experiences of the soul
there exists a connection with the life of the nervous system,
which the “dilettantism of occult science” merely fails to detect.

Here certain quite comprehensible habits of thought are in
such sharp contradiction to what has been described in this book,
that there is as yet no prospect of coming to an understanding
with many people. It is here that we come to the point where the

[xvi]

desire must arise that it should no longer be a characteristic of
our present day culture to at once decry as fanciful or visionary
a method of research which differs from its own. But on the
other hand it is also a fact at the present time that a number
of people can appreciate the supersensible method of research,
as it is presented in this book, people who understand that the
meaning of life is not revealed in general phrases about the soul,
self, and so on, but can only result from really entering into the
facts of superphysical research.

Not from lack of modesty, but with a sense of joyful
satisfaction, does the author of this book feel profoundly the
necessity for this fourth edition after a comparatively short time.

The author is not prompted to this statement by lack of modesty,

6

An Outline of Occult Science
for he is entirely too conscious of how little even this new edition
approaches that “outline of a supersensuous world concept”

which it is meant to be. The whole book has once more been
revised for the new edition, much supplementary matter has
been inserted at important points, and elucidations have been
attempted. But in numerous passages the author has realized how
poor the means of presentation accessible to him prove to be in
comparison with what superphysical research discovers. Thus
it was scarcely possible to do more than point out the way in
which to reach conceptions of the events described in this book
as the Saturn, Sun, and Moon evolutions. An important aspect

[xvii]

of this subject has been briefly remodelled in this edition. But
experiences in relation to such things diverge so widely from
all experiences in the realm of the senses, that their presentation
necessitates a continual striving after expressions which may be,
at least in some measure, adequate. One who is willing to enter
into the attempted presentation which has here been made, will
perhaps notice that in the case of many things which cannot
possibly be expressed by mere words, the endeavour has been
made to convey them by the manner of the description. This
manner is, for instance, different in the account of the Saturn
evolution from that used for the Sun evolution, and so on.

Much complementary and additional matter has been inserted
in this edition in the part dealing with “Perception of the Higher

Worlds.” The endeavour has been made to represent in a graphic
way the kind of inner soul-processes by which the power of
cognition liberates itself from the limits which confine it in the
world of sense and thereby becomes qualified for experiencing
the supersensible world. The attempt has been made to show that
these experiences, even though gained by entirely inner ways
and methods, still do not have a merely subjective significance
for the particular individual who gains them. The description
attempts to show that within the soul stripped of its individuality and personal peculiarities, an experience takes place which every

Preface to the Fourth Edition.

7
human being may have in the same way, if he will only work
at his development from out his subjective experiences. It is
only when “knowledge of supersensible worlds” is thought of

[xviii]

as bearing this character that it may be differentiated from old
experiences of merely subjective mysticism. Of this mysticism it
may be said that it is after all more or less a subjective concern of
the mystic. The scientific spiritual training of the soul, however,
as it is described here, strives for objective experiences, the truth
of which, although recognized in an entirely inner way, may yet,
for that very reason, be found to be universally valid. This again
is a point on which it is very difficult to come to an understanding
concerning many of the habits of thought of our time.

In conclusion, the author would like to observe that it would
be well if even the sympathetic reader of the book would take its
statements exactly as they stand. At the present time there is a
very prevalent tendency to give this or that spiritual movement
an historical name, and to many it is only such a name that
seems to make it valuable. But, it may be asked, what would the
statements in this book gain by being designated “Rosicrucian,”

or anything else of the kind? What is of importance is that in this
book a glimpse into supersensible worlds is attempted with the
means which in our present period of evolution are possible and
suitable for the human soul; and that from this point of view the
problems of human destiny and human existence are considered
beyond the limits of birth and death. It is not a question of an
endeavor which shall bear this or that old name, but of a striving
after truth.

On the other hand, expressions have also been used, with

[xix]

hostile intention, for the conception of the universe presented
in this book. Leaving out of account that those which were
intended to strike and discredit the author most heavily are
absurd and objectively untrue, these expressions are stamped as
unworthy by the fact that they disparage a fully independent
search for truth; because the aggressors do not judge it on its

8

An Outline of Occult Science
own merits, but try to impose on others, as a judgment of these
investigations, erroneous ideas about their dependence upon this
or that tradition,—ideas which they have invented, or adopted
from others without reason. However necessary these words are
in face of the many attacks on the author, it is yet repugnant to
him in this place to enter further into the matter.

RUDOLF STEINER

June, 1913.

[xx]

Author's Remarks To First Edition

In placing a book such as this in the hands of the public, the
writer must calmly anticipate every kind of criticism regarding
his work which is likely to arise in the present day. A reader, for
instance, whose opinions are based upon the results of scientific
research, after noting certain statements made here touching
these things, may pronounce the following judgment: “It is
astounding that such statements should be possible in our time.

The most elementary conceptions of natural science are distorted
in such a manner as to denote positively inconceivable ignorance
of even the rudiments of science. The author uses such terms,
for instance, as ‘heat’ in a way that would lead one to infer that
he had let the entire wave of modern thought on the subject of
physics sweep past him unperceived. Any one familiar with the
mere elements of this science would show him that not even the
merest dilettante could have made these statements, and they can
only be dismissed as the outcome of rank ignorance.”

This and many a similar verdict might be pronounced, and
we can picture our reader, after the perusal of a page or two,
laying the book aside,—smiling or indignant, according to his
temperament,—and reflecting on the singular growths which

[xxi]

a perverse tendency of thought may put forth in our time. So
thinking, he will lay this volume aside, with his collection of
similar freaks of the brain. What, however, would the author say
should such opinions come to his knowledge? Would he not,
from his point of view, also set the critic down as incapable of
judgment or, at least, as one who has not chosen to bring his
good will to bear in forming an intelligent opinion? To this the
answer is most emphatically—No! In no sense whatever does the
author feel this, for he can easily conceive of his critic as being

10

An Outline of Occult Science
not only a highly intelligent man, but also a trained scientist, and
one whose opinions are the result of conscientious thought. The
author of this book is able to enter into the feelings of such a
person and to understand the reasons which have led him to form
these conclusions.

Now, in order to comprehend what the author really means,
it is necessary to do here what generally seems to him to be
out of place, but for which there is urgent cause in the case of
this book, namely, to introduce certain personal data. Of course,
nothing will be said in this connection but what bears upon the
author's decision to write this book. What is said in it could not
be justified if it bore merely a personal character. A book of this
kind is bound to proffer views to which any person may attain,

[xxii]

and these views must be presented in such a way as to suggest
no shade of the personal element, that is, as far as such a thing is
possible.

It is therefore not in this sense that the personal note is sounded.

It is only intended to explain how it was possible for the author
to understand the above characterized opinions concerning his
presentations, and yet was able to write this book.

It is true there is one method which would have made the
introduction of the personal element unnecessary—this would
have been to specify in detail all those particulars which would
show that the statements here made are in agreement with the
progress of modern science. This course would, however, have
necessitated the writing of many volumes, and as such a task
is at present out of the question, the writer feels it necessary
to state the personal reasons which he believes justify him in
thinking such an agreement thoroughly possible and satisfactory.

Were he not in a position to make the following explanations, he
would most certainly never have gone so far as to publish such
statements as those referring to heat processes.

Some thirty years ago the author had the opportunity of
studying physics in its various branches.

At that time the

Author's Remarks To First Edition

11
central point of interest in the sphere of heat phenomena was the
promulgation of the so-called “Mechanical Theory of Heat,” and
it happened that this theory so particularly engrossed his attention
that the historical development of the various interpretations
associated with the names of Julius Robert Mayer, Helmholtz,

Joule, Clausius, and others, formed the subject of his continuous

[xxiii]

study. During that period of concentrated work he laid those
foundations which have enabled him to follow all the actual
advances since made with regard to the theory of physical heat,
without experiencing any difficulty in penetrating into what
science is achieving in this department. Had he been obliged
to confess himself unable to do this, the writer would have had
good reason for leaving unsaid and unwritten much that has been
brought forward in this book.

He has made it a matter of conscience, when writing or
speaking on occult science, to deal only with matters on which
he could also report, in what seemed an adequate manner, the
views held by modern science. With this, however, he does not
wish in the least to give the impression that this is always a
necessary prerequisite. Any one may feel a call to communicate
or to publish whatever his judgment, his sense of truth, and his
feelings may prompt him to, even if he is ignorant of the attitude
taken by contemporary science in the matter. The writer wishes
to indicate merely that he holds to the pronouncements he has
made. For instance, he would never have written those few
sentences on the human glandular system, nor those regarding
man's nervous system, contained in this volume, were he not in a
position to discuss both subjects in the terms used by the modern
scientist, when speaking of the glandular and nervous systems
from the standpoint of science.

[xxiv]

In spite of the fact that it may be said that he who speaks
concerning “heat,” as is done here, knows nothing of the elements
of modern physics, yet the author feels himself quite justified,
because he believes that he knows present day research along

12

An Outline of Occult Science
those lines, and because if it were unknown to him, he would
have left the subject alone. He knows that such utterances may
be ascribed to lack of modesty, but it is necessary to declare his
true motives, lest they should be confounded with others of a
very different nature, a result infinitely worse than a verdict of
mere vanity.

He who reads this book as a philosopher, may well ask himself,

“Has this author been asleep to present day research in the field
of the theory of cognition? Had he never heard of the existence of
a man called Kant?” this philosopher might ask, “and did he not
know that according to this man it was simply inadmissible, from
a philosophic point of view, to put forward such statements?”

and so on, while in conclusion he might remark that stuff of so
uncritical, childish, and unprofessional a nature should not be
tolerated among philosophers, and that any further investigation
would be waste of time. However, here again, for reasons already
advanced and at the risk of being again misinterpreted, the writer
would fain introduce certain personal experiences.

His studies of Kant date from his sixteenth year, and he really
believes he is now capable of criticizing quite objectively, from
the Kantian point of view, everything that has been put forward

[xxv]

in this book. On this account, too, he might have left this book
unwritten were he not fully aware of what moves a philosopher to
pass the verdict of “childishness” whenever the critical standard
of the day is applied. Yet one may actually know that in the

Kantian sense the limits of possible knowledge are here exceeded:

one may know in what way Herbart (who never arrived at an

“arrangement of ideas”) would discover his “naive realism.” One
may even know the degree to which the modern pragmatism of

James and Schiller and others would find the bounds of “true
presentments” transgressed—those presentments which we are
able to make our own, to vindicate, enforce, and to verify.

We may know all these things and yet, for this very reason, feel
justified in holding the views here presented. The writer has dealt

Author's Remarks To First Edition

13
with the tendencies of philosophic thought in his works: “The

Theory of Cognition of Goethe's World-Concept”; “Truth and

Science”; “Philosophy of Freedom”; “Goethe's World Concept”

and “Views of the World and Life in the Nineteenth Century.”

Many other criticisms might be suggested. Any one who
had read some of the writer's earlier works: “Views of the

World and Life in the Nineteenth Century,” for instance, or
a smaller work on Haeckel and his Opponents, might think it
incredible that one and the same man could have written those
books as well as the present work and also his already published

“Theosophy.” “How,” he might ask, “can a man throw himself
into the breach for Haeckel, and then, turn around and discredit

[xxvi]

every sound theory concerning monism that is the outcome of

Haeckel's researches?” He might understand the author of this
book attacking Haeckel “with fire and sword”; but it passes the
limits of comprehension that, besides defending him, he should
actually have dedicated “Views of the World and Life in the

Nineteenth Century” to him. Haeckel, it might be thought, would
have emphatically declined the dedication had he known that the
author was shortly to produce such stuff as An Outline of Occult

Science, with all its unwieldy dualism.

The writer of this book is of the opinion that one may very well
understand Haeckel without being bound to consider everything
else as nonsense which does not flow directly from Haeckel's
own presentments and premises. The author is further of the
opinion that Haeckel cannot be understood by attacking him with

“fire and sword,” but by trying to grasp what he has done for
science. Least of all does he hold those opponents of Haeckel
to be in the right, against whom he has in his book, Haeckel
and his Opponents, sought to defend the great naturalist; for
surely, the fact of his having gone beyond Haeckel's premises by
placing the spiritual conception of the world side by side with
the merely natural one conceived by Haeckel, need be no reason
for assuming that he was of one mind with the latter's opponents.

14

An Outline of Occult Science

Any one taking the trouble to look at the matter in the right light

[xxvii]

must see that the writer's recent books are in perfect accord with
those of an earlier date.

But the author can also conceive of a critic who in general
and offhand looks upon the presentations of this book as the
out-pourings of a fantasy run wild or as dreamy thought-pictures.

Yet all that can be said in this respect is contained in the book
itself, and it is explicitly shown that sane and earnest thought not
only can but must be the touch-stone of all the facts presented.

Only one who submits what is here advanced to logical and
adequate examination, such as is applied to the facts of natural
science, will be in a position to decide for himself how much
reason has to say in the matter.

After saying this much about those who may at first be inclined
to take exception to this work, we may perhaps be permitted to
address a few words to those on whose sympathetic attention we
can rely. These will find all broad essentials contained in the first
chapter, “Concerning the Nature of Occult Science.” A word,
however, must here be added. Although this book deals with
investigations carried beyond the confines of intellect limited to
the world of the senses, yet nothing has been asserted except
what can be grasped by any person possessed of unprejudiced
reasoning powers backed by a healthy sense of truth, and who is
at the same time willing to turn these gifts to the best account;
and the writer emphatically wishes it to be understood that
he hopes to appeal to readers who will not be content with

[xxviii]

merely accepting on “blind faith” the matters presented, but
who will take the trouble to test them by the light of their own
understanding and by the experiences of their own lives. Above
all, he desires cautious readers, who will allow themselves to be convinced only by what can be logically justified. The writer
is well aware that his work would be worth nothing were its
value to rest on blind belief; it is valuable only in the degree
to which it can be justified by unbiased reason. It is an easy

Author's Remarks To First Edition

15
thing for “blind faith” to confound folly and superstition with
truth, and doubtless many, who have been content to accept the
supersensible on mere faith, will be inclined to think that this book
makes too great demands upon their powers of thought. It is not
a question of merely making certain communications, but rather
of presenting them in a manner consistent with a conscientious
view of the corresponding plane of life; for this is the plane upon
which the loftiest matters are often handled with unscrupulous
charlatanism, and where knowledge and superstition come into
such close contact as to be liable to be confused one with the
other.

Any one acquainted with supersensual research will, on
reading this book, be able to see that the author has sought
to define the boundary line sharply between what can be
communicated now from the sphere of supersensible cognition,
and that which will be given out, at a later time, or at least, in a
different form.

RUDOLF STEINER

December, 1909.

[001]

Chapter I. The Character of Occult

Science

At the present time the words “occult science” are apt to arouse
the most varied feelings. Upon some people they work like a
magic charm, like the announcement of something to which they
feel attracted by the innermost powers of their soul; to others
there is in the words something repellent, calling forth contempt,
derision, or a compassionate smile. By many, occult science
is looked upon as a lofty goal of human effort, the crown of
all other knowledge and cognition; others, who are devoting
themselves with the greatest earnestness and noble love of truth
to that which appears to them true science, deem occult science
mere idle dreaming and fantasy, in the same category with what
is called superstition. To some, occult science is like a light
without which life would be valueless; to others, it represents a
spiritual danger, calculated to lead astray immature minds and
weak souls, while between these two extremes is to be found
every possible intermediate shade of opinion.

Strange feelings are awakened in one who has attained a

[002]

certain impartiality of judgment in regard to occult science,
its adherents and its opponents, when one sees how people,
undoubtedly possessed of a genuine feeling for freedom in many
matters, become intolerant when they meet with this particular
line of thought. And an unprejudiced observer will scarcely
fail in this case to admit that what attracts many adherents of
occult science—or occultism—is nothing but the fatal craving
for what is unknown and mysterious, or even vague. And he
will also be ready to own that there is much cogency in the
reasons put forward against what is fantastic and visionary by

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

17
serious opponents of the cause in question. In fact, one who
studies occult science will do well not to lose sight of the fact
that the impulse toward the mysterious leads many people on a
vain chase after worthless and dangerous will-o'-the-wisps.

Even though the occult scientist keeps a watchful eye on all
errors and vagaries on the part of adherents of his views, and on all
justifiable antagonism, yet there are reasons which hold him back
from the immediate defence of his own efforts and aspirations.

These reasons will become apparent to any one entering more
deeply into occult science. It would therefore be superfluous to
discuss them here. If they were cited before the threshold of this
science had been crossed, they would not suffice to convince one
who, held back by irresistible repugnance, refuses to cross that
threshold. But to one who effects an entry, the reasons will soon
manifest themselves, with unmistakable clearness from within.

[003]

This much, however, implies that the reasons in question
point to a certain attitude as the only right one for an occult
scientist. He avoids, as much as he possibly can, any kind of
outer defence or conflict, and lets the cause speak for itself. He
simply puts forward occult science; and in what it has to say
about various matters, he shows how his knowledge is related
to other departments of life and science, what antagonism it
may encounter, and in what way reality stands witness to the
truth of his cognitions. He knows that an attempted vindication
would,—not merely on account of current defective thinking but
by virtue of a certain inner necessity,—lead into the domain of
artful persuasion; and he desires nothing else than to let occult
science work its own way quite independently.

The first point in occult science is by no means the advancing
of assertions or opinions which are to be proven, but the
communication, in a purely narrative form, of experiences which
are to be met with in a world other than the one that is to be
seen with physical eyes and touched with physical hands. And
further, it is an important point that through this science the

18

An Outline of Occult Science
methods are described by which man may verify for himself the
truth of such communications. For one who makes a serious
study of genuine occult science will soon find that thereby
much becomes changed in the conceptions and ideas which are
formed—and rightly formed—in other spheres of life. A wholly
new conception necessarily arises also about what has hitherto

[004]

been called a “proof.” We come to see that in certain domains
such a word loses its usual meaning, and that there are other
grounds for insight and understanding than “proofs” of this kind.

All occult science is born from two thoughts, which may take
root in any human being. To the occult scientist these thoughts
express facts which may be experienced if the right methods for
the purpose are used. But to many people these same thoughts
represent highly disputable assertions, which may arouse fierce
contention, even if they are not regarded as something which
may be “proven” impossible.

These two thoughts are, first, that behind the visible world
there is another, the world invisible, which is hidden from the
senses and also from thought that is fettered by these senses; and
secondly, that it is possible for man to penetrate into that unseen
world by developing certain faculties dormant within him.

Some will say that there is no such hidden world. The world
perceived by man through his senses is the only one. Its enigmas
can be solved out of itself. Even if man is still very far from
being able to answer all the questions of existence, the time
will certainly come when sense-experience and the science based
upon it will be able to give the answers to all such questions.

Others say that it cannot be asserted that there is no unseen
world behind the visible one, but that human powers of perception
are not able to penetrate into that world. Those powers have

[005]

bounds which they cannot pass. Faith, with its urgent cravings,
may take refuge in such a world; but true science, based on
ascertained facts, can have nothing to do with it.

A third class looks upon it as a kind of presumption for man

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

19
to attempt to penetrate, by his own efforts of cognition, into
a domain with regard to which he should give up all claim to
knowledge and be content with faith. The adherents of this view
feel it to be wrong for weak human beings to wish to force their
way into a world which should belong to religious life.

It is also alleged that a common knowledge of the facts of
the sense-world is possible for mankind, but that in regard to
supersensible things it can be merely a question of the individual's
personal opinion, and that in these matters there can be no
possibility of a certainty universally recognized. And many other
assertions are made on the subject.

The occult scientist has convinced himself that a consideration
of the visible world propounds enigmas to man which can never
be solved out of the facts of that world itself. Their solution in this way will never be possible, however far advanced a knowledge
of those facts may be. For visible facts plainly point, through
their own inner nature, to the existence of a hidden world. One
who does not see this closes his eyes to the problems which
obviously spring up everywhere out of the facts of the sense-
world. He refuses to recognize certain questions and problems,
and therefore thinks that all questions can be answered through

[006]

facts within reach of sense perception. The questions which he
is willing to ask are all capable of being answered by the facts
which he is convinced will be discovered in the course of time.

Every genuine occultist admits this. But why should one, when
he asks no questions, expect answers on certain subjects? The
occult scientist says that to him such questioning is natural, and
must be regarded as a wholly justifiable expression of the human
soul. Science is surely not to be confined within limits which
prohibit impartial inquiry.

The opinion that there are bounds to human knowledge which
it is impossible to pass, compelling man to stop short of the
invisible world, is thus met by the occult scientist: he says
that there can exist no doubt concerning the impossibility of

20

An Outline of Occult Science
penetrating into the unseen world by means of the kind of
cognition here meant. One who considers it the only kind can
come to no other opinion than that man is not permitted to
penetrate into a possibly existing higher world. But the occult
scientist goes on to say that it is possible to develop a different
sort of cognition, and that this leads into the unseen world. If this
kind of cognition is held to be impossible, we arrive at a point
of view from which any mention of an invisible world appears
as sheer nonsense. But to an unbiased judgment there can be no
basis for such an opinion as this, except that its adherent is a
stranger to that other kind of cognition. But how can a person
form an opinion about a subject of which he declares himself

[007]

ignorant? Occult science must in this case maintain the principle
that people should speak only of what they know, and should
not make assertions about anything of which they are ignorant.

It can only recognize every man's right to communicate his own
experiences, not every man's right to declare the impossibility of
what he does not, or will not, know. The occult scientist disputes
no one's right to ignore the invisible world; but there can be no
real reason why a person should declare himself an authority,
not only on what he may know, but also on things considered
unknowable.

To those who say that it is presumption to penetrate into
unseen regions, the occult scientist would merely point out that
this can be done, and that it is sinning against the faculties with which man has been endowed if he allows them to waste instead
of developing and using them.

But he who thinks that views about the unseen world are
necessarily wholly dependent on personal opinion and feeling
is denying the common essence of all human beings. Even
though it is true that every one must find light on these things
within himself, it is also a fact that all those, who go far enough,
arrive at the same, not at different conclusions regarding them.

Differences exist only as long as people will not approach the

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

21
highest truths by the well-tested path of occult science, but
attempt ways of their own choosing. Genuine occult science
will certainly fully admit that only one who has followed, or at
any rate has begun to follow the path of occult science, is in a

[008]

position to recognize it as the right one. But all those who follow
that path will recognize its genuineness, and have always done
so.

The path to occult knowledge will be found, at the fitting
moment, by every human being who discerns in what is visible
the presence of something invisible, or who even but dimly
surmises or divines it, and who, from his consciousness that
powers of cognition are capable of development, is driven to the
feeling that what is hidden may be unveiled to him. One who
is drawn to occult science by such experiences of the soul will
find opening up before him, not only the prospect of finding
the answers to certain questions which press upon him, but the
further prospect of overcoming everything which hampers and
enfeebles his life. And in a certain higher sense it implies a
weakening of life, in fact a death of the soul, when a person is
compelled to turn away from, or to deny, the unseen. Indeed,
under certain circumstances despair is the result of a man's losing
all hope of having the invisible revealed to him. This death
and despair, in their manifold forms, are at the same time inner
spiritual foes of occult science. They make their appearance when
a person's inner force is dwindling away. In that case, if he is to
possess any vital force it must be supplied to him from without.

He perceives the things, beings, and events which approach his
organs of sense, and analyzes them with his intellect. They afford
him pleasure and pain, and impel him to the actions of which he
is capable. For a while he may go on in this way: but at length

[009]

he must reach a point at which he inwardly dies. For that which
may thus be extracted for man from the outer world, becomes
exhausted. This is not a statement arising from the personal
experience of one individual, but something resulting from an

22

An Outline of Occult Science
impartial survey of the whole of human life. That which secures
life from exhaustion lies in the unseen world, deep at the roots
of things. If a person loses the power of descending into those
depths so that he cannot be perpetually drawing fresh vitality
from them, then in the end the outer world of things also ceases
to yield him anything of a vivifying nature.

It is by no means the case that only the individual and his
personal weal and woe are concerned. Through occult science
man gains the conviction that from a higher standpoint the weal
and woe of the individual are intimately bound up with the weal
and woe of the whole world. This is a means by which man
comes to see that he is inflicting an injury on the entire world
and every being within it, if he does not develop his own powers
in the right way. If a man makes his life desolate by losing touch
with the unseen, he not only destroys in his inner self something,
the decay of which may eventually drive him to despair, but
through his weakness he constitutes a hindrance to the evolution
of the whole world in which he lives.

Now man may delude himself. He may yield to the belief
that there is nothing invisible, and that that which is manifest to

[010]

his senses and intellect contains everything which can possibly
exist. But such an illusion is only possible on the surface of
consciousness and not in its depths. Feeling and desire do not
yield to this delusive belief. They will be perpetually craving,
in one way or another, for that which is invisible. And if this
is withheld, they drive man to doubt, to uncertainty about life,
or even to despair. Occult science, by making manifest what is
unseen, is calculated to overcome all hopelessness, uncertainty,
and despair,—everything, in short, which weakens life and makes
it unfit for its necessary service in the universe.

The beneficent effect of occult science is that it not only
satisfies thirst for knowledge but gives strength and stability to
life. The source whence the occult scientist draws his power for
work and his confidence in life is inexhaustible. Any one who

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

23
has once had recourse to that fount will always, on revisiting it,
go forth with renewed vigour.

There are people who will not hear anything about occult
science, because they think they discern something unhealthy in
what has just been said. These people are quite right as regards
the surface and outer aspect of life. They do not desire that to
be stunted, which life, in its so-called reality, offers. They see
weakness in man's turning away from reality and seeking his
welfare in an unseen world which to them is synonymous with
what is chimerical and visionary. If as occult scientists we do
not desire to fall into morbid dreaming and weakness, we must
admit that such objections are partially justified. For they are

[011]

founded upon sound judgment, which leads to a half truth instead
of a whole truth merely because it does not penetrate to the
roots of things, but remains on the surface. If occult science were
calculated to weaken life and estrange man from true reality, such
objections would certainly be strong enough to cut the ground
from under the feet of those who follow this spiritual line of life.

But even in regard to such opinions as these, occult science would
not be taking the right course in defending itself in the ordinary
sense of the word. Even in this case it can only speak by means
of what it gives to those who really penetrate into its meaning,
that is, by the real force and vitality which it bestows. It does
not weaken life, but strengthens it, because it equips man not
only with the forces of the manifest world but with those of the
invisible world of which the manifest is the effect. Thus it does
not imply an impoverishment, but an enrichment, of life. The
true occult scientist does not stand aloof from the world, but is a
lover of reality, because he does not desire to enjoy the unseen
in a remote dream-world, but finds his happiness in bringing to
the world ever fresh supplies of force from the invisible sources
from whence this very world is derived, and from which it must
be continually fructified.

Some people find many obstacles when they enter upon the

24

An Outline of Occult Science
path of occult science. One of these is expressed in the fact,
that a person, attempting to take the first steps, is sometimes

[012]

discouraged because at the outset he is introduced to the details
of the supersensible world, in order that he may, with entire
patience and devotion, become acquainted with them. A series of
communications is made to him concerning the invisible nature
of man, about certain definite occurrences in the kingdom of
which death opens the portals, and regarding the evolutions of
man, the earth, and the entire solar system. What he expected
was to enter the supersensible world easily, at a bound. Now he is
heard to say: “Everything which I am told to study is food for my
mind, but leaves my soul cold. I am seeking the deepening of my
soul-life. I want to find myself within. I am seeking something
that will lift my soul into the sphere of the divine, leading it to its true home; I do not want information about the human being and
world-processes.” People who talk in this way have no idea that
by such feelings they are barring the door to what they are really
seeking. For it is just when, and only when, with a free and open
mind, in self-surrender and patience, they assimilate what they
call “merely” food for the intellect, that they will find that for
which their souls are athirst. That road leads the soul to union
with the divine, which brings to the soul knowledge of the works
of the divine. The uplifting of the heart is the result of learning
to know about the creations of the spirit.

On this account occult science must begin by imparting the
information which throws light on the realms of the spiritual
world.

So too, in this book, we shall begin with what can

[013]

be unveiled concerning unseen worlds through the methods of
occult research. That which is mortal in man, and that which is
immortal, will be described in their connection with the world,
of which he is a member.

Then will follow a description of the methods by which man
is able to develop those powers of cognition latent within him,
which will lead him into that world. As much will be said about

Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science

25
the methods as is at present possible in a work of this kind. It
seems natural to think that these methods should be dealt with
first. For it seems as though the main point would be to acquaint
man with what may bring him, by means of his own powers, to
the desired view of the higher world. Many may say, “Of what
use is it for me that others tell me what they know about higher
worlds? I wish to see them for myself.”

The fact of the matter is that for really fruitful experience of
the mysteries of the unseen world, previous knowledge of certain
facts belonging to that world is absolutely necessary. Why this
is so, will be sufficiently brought out from what follows.

It is a mistake to think that the truths of occult science which
are imparted by those qualified to communicate them, before
mention is made of the means of penetrating into the spiritual
world itself, can be understood and grasped only by means of the
higher vision which results from developing certain powers latent
in man. This is not the case. For investigating and discovering the
mysteries of a supersensible world, that higher sight is essential.

No one is able to discover the facts of the unseen world without

[014]

the clairvoyance which is synonymous with that higher vision.

When however, the facts have been discovered and imparted,
every one who applies to them the full range of his ordinary
intellect and unprejudiced powers of judgment, will be able
to understand them and to rise to a high degree of conviction
concerning them. One who maintains that the mysteries are
incomprehensible to him, does not do so because he is not yet
clairvoyant, but because he has not yet succeeded in bringing
into activity those powers of cognition which may be possessed
by every one, even without clairvoyance.

A new method of putting forward these matters consists in so
describing them, after they have been clairvoyantly investigated,
that they are quite accessible to the faculty of judgment. If
only people do not shut themselves off by prejudice, there is no
obstacle to arriving at a conviction, even without higher vision. It

26

An Outline of Occult Science
is true that many will find that the new method of presentment, as
given in this book, is far from corresponding to their customary
ways of forming an opinion. But any objection due to this
will soon disappear if one takes the trouble to follow out these
customary methods to their final consequences.

When, by an extended application of ordinary thought, a
certain number of the higher mysteries have been assimilated and
found intelligible by any one, then the right moment has come
for the methods of occult research to be applied to his individual

[015]

personality:—these will give him access to the unseen world.

Nor will any genuine scientist be able to find contradiction,
in spirit and in truth, between his science, which is built upon
the facts of the sense-world, and the way in which occult science
carries on its researches. The scientist uses certain instruments
and methods. He constructs his instruments by working upon
what “nature” gives him. Occult science also uses an instrument,
but in this case the instrument is man himself. And that instrument
too must first be prepared for that higher research. The faculties
and powers given to man by nature at the outset without his co-
operation, must be transformed into higher ones. In this way man
is able to make himself into an instrument for the investigation
of the unseen world.

[016]

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

With the consideration of man in the light of occult science, what
this signifies in general, immediately becomes evident. It rests
upon the recognition of something hidden behind that which is
revealed to the outer senses and to the intellect acquired through
perception. These senses and this intellect can apprehend only a
part of all that which occult science unveils as the total human
entity, and this part is the physical body. In order to throw light upon its conception of this physical body, occult science at first
directs attention to a phenomenon which confronts all observers
of life like a great riddle,—the phenomenon of death,—and
in connection with it, points to so-called inanimate nature, the
mineral kingdom. We are thus referred to facts, which it devolves
on occult science to explain, and to which an important part of
this work must be devoted. But to begin with, only a few points
will be touched upon, by way of orientation.

Within manifested nature the physical body, according to
occult science, is that part of man which is of the same nature as
the mineral kingdom. On the other hand, that which distinguishes
man from minerals is considered as not being part of the physical
body.

From the occult point of view, what is of supreme

[017]

importance is the fact that death separates the human being from
that which, during life, is of like nature with the mineral world.

Occult science points to the dead body as that part of man which
is to be found existing in the same way in the mineral kingdom.

It lays strong emphasis upon the fact that in this principle of
the human being, which it looks upon as the physical body, and
which death reduces to a corpse, the same materials and forces
are at work as in the mineral realm; but no less emphasis is laid
upon the fact that at death disintegration of the physical body

28

An Outline of Occult Science
sets in. Occult science therefore says: “It is true that the same
materials and forces are at work in the physical body as in the
mineral, but during life their activity is placed at the disposal of
something higher. They are left to themselves only when death
occurs. Then they act, as they must in conformity with their own
nature, as decomposers of the physical body.”

Thus a sharp distinction must be drawn between the manifested
and the hidden elements in man. For during life, that which is
hidden from view has to wage perpetual war on the materials and
forces of the mineral world. This indicates the point at which
occult science steps in. It has to characterize that which wages
the war alluded to, as a principle which is hidden from sense-
observation. Clairvoyant sight alone can reveal its workings.

[018]

How man arrives at awareness of this hidden element, as plainly
as his ordinary eyes see the phenomena of sense, will be described
in a later part of this book. Results of clairvoyant observation
will be given now for the reason already pointed out in the
preceding pages, that is, that communications about the way in
which the higher sight is obtained can only be of value to the
student when he has first become acquainted, in the form of a
narrative, with the results of clairvoyant research. For in this
sphere it is quite possible to understand things which one is not
yet able to observe. Indeed, the right path to higher vision starts
with understanding.

Now, although the hidden something which wages war on
the disintegration of the physical body can be observed only by
the higher sight, it is plainly visible in its effects to the human
faculty of judgment which is limited to the manifested world;
and these effects are expressed in the form or shape in which
mineral materials and forces are combined during life. When
death has intervened, the form disappears little by little, and the
physical body becomes part of the rest of the mineral world.

But the clairvoyant is able to observe this hidden something as
an independent member of the human organism, which during

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

29
life prevents the physical materials and forces from taking their
natural course, which would lead to the dissolution of the physical
body. This independent principle is called the etheric or vital
body.

If misunderstandings are not to arise at the outset, two things
must be borne in mind in connection with this account of a second
principle of human nature. The word “etheric” is used here in

[019]

a different sense from that of modern physics, which designates
as “ether” the medium by which light is transmitted. In occult
science the use of the word is limited to the sense given above. It
denotes that which is accessible to higher sight, and can be known
to physical observation only by its effects, that is, by its power of
giving a definite form or shape to the mineral materials and forces
present in the physical body. Again, the use of the word “body”

must not be misunderstood. It is necessary to use the words of
every day language in describing things on a higher plane of
existence, and these terms, when applied to sense-observation,
express only what is physical. The etheric body has, of course,
nothing of a bodily nature in the physical sense, however ethereal
we might imagine such a body to be. As soon as the occultist
mentions this etheric or vital body, he reaches the point at which
he is bound to encounter the opposition of many contemporary
opinions. The development of the human mind has been such that
the mention of such a principle of human nature is necessarily
looked upon as unscientific. The materialistic way of thinking
has arrived at the conclusion that there is nothing to be seen in a
living body but a combination of physical substances and forces
such as are also found in the so-called inanimate body of the
mineral, the only difference being that they are more complicated
in the living than in the lifeless body. Yet it is not very long

[020]

since other views were held, even by official science.

It is evident to any one who studies the works of many earnest
men of science, produced during the first half of the nineteenth
century, that at that time many a genuine investigator of nature

30

An Outline of Occult Science
was conscious of some factor acting within the living body other
than in the lifeless mineral. It was termed “vital force.” It is true
this vital force is not represented as being what has been above
characterized as the vital body, but underlying the conception
was a dim idea of the existence of such a body. Vital force
was generally regarded as something which in a living body was
united with physical matter and forces in the same way that the
force of a magnet unites itself with iron. Then came the time
when vital force was banished from the domain of science. Mere
physical and chemical causes were accounted all sufficient.

At the present moment, however, there is a reaction in this
respect in some scientific quarters. It is sometimes conceded that
the hypothesis of something of the nature of “vital force” is not
pure nonsense. Yet even the scientist who concedes this much
is not willing to make common cause with the occultist with
regard to the vital body. As a rule, it serves no useful purpose
to enter upon a discussion of such views from the standpoint
of occult science. It should be much more the concern of the
occultist to recognize that the materialistic way of thinking is

[021]

a necessary concomitant phenomenon of the great advance of
natural science in our day. This advance is due to the vast
improvements in the instruments used in sense-observation. And
it is in the very nature of man to bring some of his faculties to
a certain degree of perfection at the expense of others. Exact
sense-observation, which has been evolved to such an important
extent by natural science, was bound to leave in the background
the cultivation of those human faculties which lead into the
hidden worlds. But the time has come when this cultivation is
once more necessary; and recognition of the invisible will not be
won by combating opinions which are the logical outcome of a
denial of its existence, but rather by setting the invisible in the
right light. Then it will be recognized by those for whom the

“time has come.”

It was necessary to say this much, in order that it may not

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

31
be imagined that occult science is ignorant of the standpoint
of natural science when mention is made of an “etheric body,”

which, in many circles must necessarily be considered as purely
imaginary.

Thus the etheric body is the second principle of the human
being. For the clairvoyant, it possesses a higher degree of reality
than the physical body. A description of how it is seen by the
clairvoyant can be given only in later parts of this book, when
the sense in which such descriptions are to be taken will become
manifest. For the present it will be enough to say that the etheric
body penetrates the physical body in all its parts, and is to be

[022]

regarded as a kind of architect of the latter. All the physical
organs are maintained in their form and shape by the currents
and movements of the etheric body. The physical heart is based
upon an etheric heart, the physical brain, upon an etheric brain,
and the physical, with this difference, that in the etheric body
the parts flow into one another in active motion, whereas in the
physical body they are separated from each other.

Man has this etheric body in common with all plants, just as
he has the physical body in common with minerals. Everything
living has its etheric body.

The study of occult science proceeds upwards from the etheric
body to another principle of the human being. To aid in the
formation of an idea of this principle, it draws attention to the
phenomenon of sleep, just as in connection with the etheric body
attention was drawn to death. All human work, so far as the
manifested world is concerned, is dependent upon activity during
waking life. But that activity is possible only as long as man
is able to recuperate his exhausted forces by sleep. Action and
thought disappear, pain and pleasure fade away during sleep,
and on re-awaking, man's conscious powers ascend from the
unconsciousness of sleep as though from hidden mysterious
sources of energy. It is the same consciousness which sinks
down into dim depths on falling asleep and ascends from them

[023]

32

An Outline of Occult Science
again on re-awaking.

That which awakens life again out of this state of
unconsciousness is, according to occult science, the third
principle of the human being.

It is called the astral body.

Just as the physical body cannot keep its form by means of the
mineral substances and forces it contains, but must, in order
to be kept together, be interpenetrated by the etheric body, so
is it impossible for the forces of the etheric body to illuminate
themselves with the light of consciousness. An etheric body left
to its own resources would be in a permanent state of sleep.1

An etheric body awake, is illuminated by an astral body. This
astral body seems to sense-observation to disappear when man
falls asleep; to clairvoyant observation it is still present, with
the difference that it appears separated from or drawn out of the
etheric body. Sense-observation has nothing to do with the astral
body itself, but only with its effects in the manifested world,
and these cease during sleep. In the same sense in which man
possesses his physical body in common with plants, he resembles
animals as regards his astral body.

Plants are in a permanent state of sleep. One who does not
judge accurately in these matters may easily make the mistake
of attributing to plants the same kind of consciousness as that
of animals and human beings in the waking state; but this

[024]

assumption
can only be due to an inaccurate conception of
consciousness. In that case it is said that, if an external stimulus
is applied to a plant, it responds by certain movements, as
would an animal. The sensitiveness of some plants is spoken
of,—for example, of those which contract their leaves when
certain external things act upon them. But the characteristic mark
of consciousness is not that a being reacts in a certain way to an
impression, but that it experiences something in its inner nature
which adds a new element to mere reaction. Otherwise we should

1 We may also say, it could only live the life of a plant in the physical body.

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

33
be able to speak of the consciousness of a piece of iron when it
expands under the influence of heat. Consciousness is present
only when, through the effect of heat, the being feels pain or
pleasure inwardly.

The fourth principle of being which occult science attributes
to man is one which he does not share in common with the
rest of the manifested world. It is that which differentiates him
from his fellow creatures and makes him the crown of creation.

Occult science helps in forming a conception of this further
principle of human nature by pointing out the existence of an
essential difference between the kinds of experience in waking
life. On the one hand, man is constantly subjected to experiences
which must of necessity come and go; on the other, he has
experiences with which this is not the case. This fact comes out
with special force if human experiences are compared with those
of animals. An animal experiences the influences of the outer
world with great regularity; under the influence of heat and

[025]

cold it becomes conscious of pain or pleasure, and during certain
regularly recurring bodily processes it feels hunger and thirst.

The sum total of man's life is not exhausted by such experiences;
he is able to develop desires and wishes which go beyond these
things. In the case of an animal it would always be possible, on
going far enough into the matter, to ascertain the cause—either
within or without its body—which impelled it to any given act
or feeling. This is by no means the case with man. He may
engender wishes and desires for which no adequate cause exists
either inside or outside of his body. A particular source must
be found for everything in this domain; and according to occult
science this source is to be found in the human “I” or “ego.”

Therefore the ego will be spoken of as the fourth principle of the
human being.

Were the astral body left to its own resources, feelings of
pleasure and pain, and sensations of hunger and thirst, would
take place within it, but there would be lacking the consciousness

34

An Outline of Occult Science
of something lasting in all these feelings. It is not the permanent
as such, which is here designated the “ego,” but rather that which
experiences this permanent element. In this domain, conceptions
must be very exactly expressed if misunderstandings are not to
arise. With the becoming aware of something permanent, lasting,
within the changing inner experiences, begins the dawn of “ego
consciousness.”

[026]

The sensation of hunger, for instance, cannot give a creature
the feeling of having an ego. Hunger sets in when the recurring
causes make themselves felt in the being concerned, which
then devours its food just because these recurring conditions
are present. For the ego-consciousness to arise, there must not
only be these recurring conditions, urging the being to take
food, but there must have been pleasure derived from previous
satisfaction of hunger, and the consciousness of the pleasure
must have remained, so that not only the present experience of
hunger but the past experience of pleasure urges the being to take
nourishment.

Just as the physical body falls into decay if the etheric body
does not keep it together, and as the etheric body sinks into
unconsciousness if not illuminated by the astral body, so the
astral body would necessarily allow the past to be lost in oblivion
unless the ego rescued the past by carrying it over into the present.

What death is to the physical body and sleep to the etheric, the
power of forgetting is to the astral body. We may put this in
another way, and say that life is the special characteristic of the
etheric body, consciousness that of the astral body, and memory
that of the ego.

It is still easier to make the mistake of attributing memory2 to

2 Explanations such as those given in this book regarding the faculty of memory may very easily be misunderstood. For one who observes external events only would not at first sight notice the difference between what happens in the animal, or even in the plant, when something appears in them resembling memory, and what is here characterized as actual recollection in man. Of

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

35
an animal than that of attributing consciousness to a plant. It is

[027]

so natural to think of memory when a dog recognizes its master,
whom perhaps it has not seen for some time; yet in reality the
recognition is not due to memory at all, but to something quite
different. The dog feels a certain attraction toward its master
which proceeds from the personality of the latter. This gives the
dog a sense of pleasure whenever its master is present, and every
time this happens it is a cause of the repetition of the pleasure.

But memory only exists in a being when he not only feels his
present experiences, but retains those of the past. A person might
admit this, and yet fall into the error of thinking the dog has
memory. For it might be said that the dog pines when its master
leaves it, and therefore it retains a remembrance of him. This
too is an inaccurate opinion. Living with its master has made
his presence a condition of well-being to the dog, and it feels his
absence much in the same way in which it feels hunger. One
who does not make these distinctions will not arrive at a clear
course, when an animal has performed an action for a third or fourth time it may perform it in such a way that the outer process gives the impression that memory and the training associated with it are present. Nay, we may even extend our conception of memory or of recollection as far as some naturalists and their disciples, when they point out that the chicken begins to pick up grain as soon as it comes out of the shell; that it even knows the proper movements of head and body for gaining its end. It could not have learned this in the eggshell; hence it must have done so through the thousands and thousands of creatures from which it is descended (so says Hering, for example). We may call the phenomenon before us something resembling memory, but we shall never arrive at a real comprehension of human nature if we do not take into account that every distinctive element which shows itself in the human being as an inner process, as an actual perception of earlier experiences at a later date, is not merely the working of earlier conditions in later ones. In this book it is this perception of what is past that is called memory, not alone the reappearance (even though transformed) of what once existed, in a later form. Were we to use the word memory for the corresponding processes in the vegetable and animal kingdoms, we should be required to use a different word in speaking of man. In the description given here the important thing is not the particular word used, but rather that in attempting to understand human beings this distinction should be recognized. Just as little do the apparently very intelligent actions of

36

An Outline of Occult Science

[028]

understanding of the true conditions of life.

Memory and forgetfulness have for the ego much the same
significance that waking and sleeping have for the astral body.

Just as sleep banishes into nothingness the cares and troubles of
the day, so does forgetfulness draw a veil over the sad experiences
of life and efface part of the past. And just as sleep is necessary
for the recuperation of the exhausted vital forces, so must a man
blot out from his memory certain portions of his past life if he is
to face his new experiences freely and without prejudice. It is out
of this very forgetfulness that strength arises for the perception of
new facts. Let us take the case of learning to write. All the details
which a child has to go through in this process are forgotten.

What remains is the ability to write. How would a person ever be
able to write if each time he took up his pen all his experiences
in learning to write rose up before his mind?

Now there are many different degrees of memory. Its simplest
form is manifest when a person perceives an object and, after

[029]

turning away from it, retains its image in his mind. He formed
the image while looking at the object, A process was then carried
out between his astral body and his ego. The astral body lifted
into consciousness the outward impression of the object, but
knowledge of the object would last only as long as the thing itself
was present, unless the ego absorbed the knowledge into itself
and made it its own.

It is at this point that occult science draws the dividing line
between what belongs to the body and what belongs to the soul.

It speaks of the astral body as long as it is a question of the
gaining of knowledge from an object which is present. But what
gives knowledge duration is known as soul. From this it can
at once be seen how close is the connection in man between
the astral body and that part of the soul which gives a lasting
quality to knowledge. The two are, to a certain extent, united
animals have any relation to what is here called memory.

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

37
into one principle of human nature. Consequently, this unity is
often denoted the astral body. When exact terms are desired, the
astral body is called the soul-body, and the soul, in so far as it is united with the latter, is called the sentient soul.

The ego rises to a higher stage of its being when it centres
its activity on what it has gained for itself out of its knowledge
of objective things. It is by means of this activity that the ego
detaches itself more and more from the objects of perception, in
order to work within that which is its own possession. The part
of the soul on which this work devolves is called the rational-

[030]

or intellectual-soul.3 It is the peculiarity of the sentient and
intellectual souls that they work with that which they receive
through sense-impressions of external objects of which they
retain the memory.

The soul is then wholly surrendered to
something which is really outside it. Even what it has made its
own through memory, it has actually received from without. But
it is able to go beyond all this, and occult science can most easily
give an idea of this by drawing attention to a simple fact, which,
however, is of the greatest importance. It is, that in the whole
range of speech there is but one name which is distinguished by
its very nature from all other names. This is the name “I.” Every
other name can be applied by any one to the thing or being to
which it belongs. The word “I,” as the designation of a being,
has a meaning only when given to that being by himself. Never
can any outside voice call us by the name of “I.” We can apply
it only to ourselves. I am only an “I” to myself; to every one
else I am a “you,” and every one else is a “you” to me. This
fact is the outward expression of a deeply significant truth. The

3 The term “Verstandesseele” is sometimes translated by “rational soul.”

From a certain point of view one might prefer the term “intellectual soul,”

because it expresses better the activity of the soul than does “rational soul.”

In the latter one thinks of the knowledge about a perception; in intellectuality, one thinks of the actual possibility of forming this knowledge through inward activity. In German the expression “emotional soul” only coincides as it should with the second member of the soul when the inward activity is kept in view.

38

An Outline of Occult Science
real essence of the ego is independent of everything outside of it,

[031]

and it is on this account that its name cannot be applied to it by
any one else. This is the reason why those religions confessions
which have consciously maintained their connections with occult
science, speak the word “I” as the “unutterable name of God.”

For the fact above mentioned is exactly what is referred to when
this expression is used. Nothing outward has access to that part
of the human soul of which we are now speaking. It is the

“hidden sanctuary” of the soul. Only a being of like nature with
the soul can win entrance there. “The divinity dwelling in man
speaks when the soul recognizes itself as an ego.” Just as the
sentient and intellectual souls live in the outer world, so a third
soul-principle is immersed in the divine when the soul becomes
conscious of its own nature.

In this connection a misunderstanding may easily arise; it may
seem as though occult science interpreted the ego to be one with

God. But it by no means says that the ego is God, only that it
is of the same nature and essence as God. Does any one declare
the drop of water taken from the ocean to be the ocean, when
he asserts that the drop and the ocean are the same in essence
or substance? If a comparison is needed, we may say, “The ego
is related to God as the drop of water is to the ocean.” Man is
able to find a divine element within himself, because his original
essence is derived directly from the Divine. Thus man, through
the third principle of his soul, attains an inner knowledge of
himself, just as through his astral body he gains knowledge of the

[032]

outer world. For this reason occult science calls the third soul-
principle the consciousness-soul, and it holds that the soul-part of man consists of three principles, the sentient-, intellectual-, and consciousness-souls, just as the bodily part has three principles, the physical, etheric, and astral bodies.

The real nature of the ego is first revealed in the consciousness-
soul. Through feeling and reason the soul loses itself in other
things; but as the consciousness-soul it lays hold of its own

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

39
essence. Therefore this ego can only be perceived through the
consciousness-soul by a certain inner activity. The images of
external objects are formed as those objects come and go, and
the images go on working in the intellect by virtue of their
own force. But if the ego is to perceive itself, it cannot merely
surrender itself; it must first, by inner activity, draw up its own being out of its depths, in order to become conscious of it. A
new activity of the ego begins with this self cognition,—with
self-recollection. Owing to this activity, the perception of the
ego in the consciousness-soul possesses an entirely different
meaning for man from that conveyed by the observation of all
that reaches him through the three bodily principles and the two
other soul-principles. The power which reveals the ego in the
consciousness-soul is in fact the same power which manifests
everywhere else in the world; only in the body and the lower
soul-principles it does not come forth directly, but is manifested
little by little in its effects. The lowest manifestation is through
the physical body, thence a gradual ascent is made to that which
fills the intellectual soul. Indeed, we may say that with each

[033]

ascending step one of the veils falls away in which the hidden
centre is wrapped. In that which fills the consciousness-soul, this
hidden centre emerges unveiled into the temple of the soul. Yet
it shows itself just here to be but a drop from the ocean of the
all-pervading Primordial Essence; and it is here that man first
has to grasp it,—this Primordial Essence. He must recognize it
in himself before he is able to find it in its manifestations.

That which penetrates into the consciousness-soul like a drop
from the ocean is called by occult science Spirit. In this way is the consciousness-soul united with the spirit, which is the hidden
principle in all manifested things. If man wishes to lay hold of
the spirit in all manifestation, he must do it in the same way in
which he lays hold of the ego in the consciousness-soul. He must
extend to the visible world the activity which has led him to the
perception of his ego. By this means he evolves to yet higher

40

An Outline of Occult Science
planes of his being. He adds something new to the principles
of his body and soul. The first thing that happens is that he
himself conquers what lies hidden in his lower soul-principles,
and this is effected through the work which the ego carries on
within the soul. How man is engaged in this work becomes
evident if we compare a high-minded idealist with a person who
is still given up to low desires and so-called sensual pleasures.

The latter becomes transmuted into the former if he withdraws

[034]

from certain lower tendencies and turns to higher ones. He
thus works through his ego upon his soul thereby ennobling and
spiritualizing it. The ego has become the master of that man's
soul-life. This may be carried so far that no desire or wish can
take root in the soul unless the ego permits its entrance. In this
way the whole soul becomes a manifestation of the ego, which
previously only the consciousness-soul had been. All civilized
life and all spiritual effort really consist in the one work, which
has for its object to make the ego the master. Every one now
living is engaged in this work whether he wishes it or not, and
whether or not he is conscious of the fact.

Again, by this work human nature is drawn upward to higher
stages of being. Man develops new principles of his being. These
lie hidden from him behind what is manifest. If man is able by
working upon his soul, to make his ego master of it, so that the
latter brings into manifestation what is hidden, the work may
extend yet farther and include the astral body. In that case the
ego takes possession of the astral body by uniting itself with
the hidden wisdom of this astral principle. In occult science the
astral body which is thus conquered and transformed by the ego
is called the Spirit-Self. (This is the same as what is known as

“Manas” in theosophical literature, a term borrowed from the
wisdom of the East.) In the Spirit-Self a higher principle is added
to human nature, one which is present as though in the germ, and

[035]

which in the course of the work of the human being on itself
comes forth more and more.

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

41

Man conquers his astral body by pushing through to the hidden
forces lying behind it; a similar thing happens, at a later stage of
development, to the etheric body: but the work on the latter is
more arduous, for what is hidden in the etheric body is enveloped
in two veils, but what is hidden in the astral body in only one.4

Occult science gives an idea of the difference in the work on
the two bodies by pointing out certain changes which may take
place in man in the course of his development. Let us at first
think of the way in which certain soul-qualities of man develop
when the ego works upon the soul; how pleasures and desires,
joys and sorrows, may change. We have only to look back to
our childhood. What gave us pleasure then, what caused us
pain? What have we learned in addition to what we knew as
children? All this is but an expression of the way in which
the ego has gained the mastery over the astral body, for it is

[036]

this principle which is the vehicle of pleasure and pain, joy and
sorrow. Compared with these things, how little in the course of
time do certain other human qualities change, for example, the
temperament, the deeper peculiarities of the character, and like
qualities. A passionate child will often retain certain tendencies
to sudden anger during its development in later life.

This is such a striking fact that there are thinkers who entirely
deny the possibility of changing the fundamental character. They
assume that it is something permanent throughout life, and that

4 No hard and fast line can be drawn between the changes which are
accomplished in the astral body through the activity of the ego and those taking place in the etheric body. The one merges into the other. When a man learns something, and thereby gains a certain capacity for judgment, a change takes place in his astral body; but when this judgment changes his natural disposition, so that he habituates himself to feel differently, in consequence of his learning, from what he did before, this means a change in his etheric body. Everything that becomes so much a man's own that he can always recall it, is based on the transformation of the etheric body. That which little by little becomes an abiding possession of the memory has its foundation in the transmission to the etheric body of the work of the astral body.

42

An Outline of Occult Science
it is merely a question of its being manifested in one way or
another. But such an opinion is due to defective observation. To
one who is capable of seeing such things, it is evident that even
the character and temperament of a person may be transformed
under the influence of his ego. It is true that this change is slow
in comparison with the change in the qualities before mentioned.

We may compare the relation to each other of the rates of change
in the two bodies to the movements of the hour-hand and minute-
hand of a clock. Now the forces which bring about a change
of character or temperament belong to the hidden forces of the
etheric body. They are of the same nature as the forces which
govern the kingdom of life,—the same, therefore, as the forces
of growth, nutrition, and generation. Further explanations in this
work will throw the right light on these things.

[037]

Thus it is not when man simply gives himself up to pleasure
and pain, joy and sorrow, that the ego is working on the astral
body, but when the peculiarities of these qualities of the soul
are changed; and the work is extended in the same way to the
etheric body, when the ego applies its energies to changing the
character or temperament. This change, too, is one in which
every person living is engaged, whether consciously or not. The
most powerful incitement to this kind of change in ordinary life
is that given by religion. If the ego allows the impulses which
flow from religion to work upon it again and again, they become
a power within it which extends to the etheric body and changes
it as lesser impulses in life effect the transformation of the astral
body. These lesser impulses, which come to man through study,
reflection, the ennobling of feeling, and so on, are subject to
the manifold changes of existence; but religious feelings impress
a certain stamp of uniformity upon all thinking, feeling, and
willing. They diffuse an equal and single light over the whole
life of the soul.

Man thinks and feels one thing to-day, another to-morrow,
the causes of which are of many different kinds; but one who,

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

43
consistently holding to his religious convictions, has a glimpse
of something which persists through all changes, will relate his
thoughts and feelings of to-day, as well as his experiences of to-
morrow, to that fundamental feeling he possesses. Thus religious
belief has the power of permeating the whole of the soul-life. Its
influences increase in strength as time goes on because they are

[038]

constantly repeated. Hence they acquire the power of working
upon the etheric body.

In a similar way the influences of true art work upon man.

If,—going beyond the outer form, colour and tone of a work
of art,—he penetrates to its spiritual foundations with his
imagination and feeling, then the impulses thus received by
the ego actually reach the etheric body. When this thought is
followed out to its logical conclusion, the immense significance
of art in all human evolution may be estimated. Only a few
instances are pointed out here of what induces the ego to work
upon the etheric body. There are many similar influences in
human life which are not so apparent at the first glance. But these
instances are enough to show that there is yet another principle of
man's nature hidden within him, which the ego is making more
and more manifest. Occult science denotes this second principle
of the spirit the Life-Spirit. (It is the same which in current theosophical literature is called Budhi, a term borrowed from

Eastern wisdom.) The expression “Life-Spirit” is appropriate,
because the same forces are at work within it as are active in the
vital body, with the difference that when they are manifesting in
the latter the ego is not active. When, however, these powers
express themselves as the Life-Spirit, they are interpenetrated by
the ego.

Man's intellectual development, the purification and ennobling
of his feelings and of the manifestations of his will, are the
measure of the degree in which he has transformed the astral

[039]

body into the Spirit-Self. His religious experiences, as well as
many others, are stamped upon the etheric body, making it into

44

An Outline of Occult Science
the Life-Spirit. In the ordinary course of life this happens more or
less unconsciously; so-called initiation, on the contrary, consists
in man's being directed by occult science to the means through
which he may quite consciously take in hand this work on the

Spirit-Self and Life-Spirit. These means will be dealt with in
later parts of this book. In the meantime it is important to show
that, besides the soul and the body, the spirit also is working
within man. It will be seen later how this spirit belongs to the
eternal part of man, as contrasted with the perishable body.

But the work of the ego on the astral and etheric bodies does
not exhaust its activity, which is also extended to the physical
body. A slight effect of the influence of the ego on the physical
body may be seen when certain experiences cause a person to
blush or turn pale. In this case the ego is actually the occasion
of a process in the physical body. Now if through the activity
of the ego in man, changes occur influencing the physical body,
the ego is really united with the hidden forces of the physical
body, that is, with the same forces which bring about its physical
processes. Occult science says that during such activity the ego
is working on the physical body. This expression must not be
misunderstood. It must on no account be supposed that this work

[040]

is of a grossly material nature. What appears as gross material in
the physical body is merely the manifested part of it; behind this
are the hidden forces of its being, which are of a spiritual nature.

When the ego puts forth its energies in the manner described,
it unites itself, not with the outer material manifestation of the
physical body, but with the invisible forces which bring that
body into being and afterwards cause it to decay. This work
of the ego on the physical body can only very partially become
clear to man's consciousness in ordinary life. It can become
fully clear only when, under the influence of occult science, man
consciously takes the work into his own hands. Then he becomes
aware that there is a third spiritual principle within him. It is
that which occult science calls the Spirit-Man, as contrasted with

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

45
physical man. (In theosophical literature this “Spirit-Man” is
known as Atma.)

Again, with regard to the Spirit-Man, it is easy to make a
mistake. In the physical body we see man's lowest principle, and
on this account find it hard to realize that the work on that body
should be accomplished by the highest principle of the human
entity. But just because the spirit active within the physical body
is hidden under three veils, the highest kind of human effort is
needed in order to make the ego one with that which is the hidden
spiritual energy of the body.

Occult science, therefore, represents man as a being composed
of many principles. Those of a bodily nature are:

[041]

the physical body,
the etheric or vital body,
the astral body.

The soul-principles are:

the sentient-soul,
the intellectual- or rational-soul,
the consciousness-soul.

It is in the soul that the ego diffuses its light. Of a spiritual
nature are:

the Spirit-Self,
the Life-Spirit,
the Spirit-Man.

It follows from what was said above that the sentient-soul
and the astral body are closely united and in a certain sense are
one. Similarly, the consciousness-soul and the Spirit-Self form a
whole, for in the consciousness-soul the spirit shines forth, and
thence irradiates with its light the other principles of the human
being. Hence occult science also speaks of man's organization as
follows. The intellectual-soul is simply called the ego, because
it partakes of the nature of the ego, and in a certain sense is the

46

An Outline of Occult Science
ego, not yet conscious of its spiritual nature. We thus have seven
divisions of man:

(1) physical body;

(2) etheric or vital body;

(3) astral body;

(4) Ego;

(5) Spirit-Self;

(6) Life-Spirit;

(7) Spirit-Man.

[042]

Even one accustomed to materialistic habits of thought would
not find in this sevenfold organization of man the “fanciful
magic” often attributed to the number seven, if one would only
keep strictly to the meaning of the above explanations without
himself injecting arbitrarily the idea of something magical into
the matter. Occult science speaks of these seven principles of
man in exactly the same way, only from the standpoint of a
higher form of observation of the world, as allusion is commonly
made to the seven colours that make up white light, or to the
seven notes of the scale (the octave being regarded as a repetition
of the keynote). As light appears in seven colours, and sound
in seven tones, so is the unity of man's nature manifested in the
seven principles described. No more superstition attaches to the
number seven in the case of occult science than when associated
with the spectrum or with the scale.

On one occasion when these facts were put forward verbally,
the objection was made that the statement about the number
seven does not apply to colours, since there are others beyond
the red and violet rays, invisible to the eye. But even in this
respect the comparison with colours holds good, for, in fact, the
human being expands beyond the physical body on the one side,
and beyond the Spirit-Man on the other; only to the methods
of spiritual observation of which occult science here speaks, are
these extensions of the human being “spiritually invisible,” just

Chapter II. The Nature of Man

47
as the colours beyond red and violet are physically invisible.

[043]

This explanation becomes necessary, because the opinion so
easily arises that occult science does not seriously apply itself
to scientific thinking, but treats such matters unscientifically.

However, one who carefully considers the meaning of the
statements made by occult science will find that in reality it
is never at variance with genuine science; neither when it brings
forward the facts of natural science as illustrations, nor when its
statements are directly connected with natural research.

[044]

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

The nature of waking consciousness cannot be fathomed without
observing that condition which man experiences during sleep,
and the problem of life cannot be approached without studying
death. Any one failing to perceive the importance of occult
science may distrust the manner in which it studies sleep and
death. Occult science is, however, capable of appreciating the
motives from which such distrust arises. For there is nothing
incomprehensible in the assertion that man exists for an active,
purposeful life, that his acts depend on his devotion thereto, and
that absorption in such conditions as sleep and death can result
only from a taste for idle dreaming, and can lead to nothing else
than vain imaginings.

The refusal to accept anything of so fantastic a nature may
readily be regarded as the expression of a sound mind, while
indulgence in such “idle dreaming” is accounted morbid, and a
pursuit fit only for people in whom the joy and ardour of life
are lacking, and who are incapable of “real work.” It would be
wrong to set this assertion aside at once as an injustice, for it
contains a certain grain of truth. It is one quarter truth, and

[045]

must be completed by the remaining three quarters belonging
to it. Now if we dispute the one quarter which is right, with
one who recognizes that one quarter quite distinctly but who
does not dream of the other three quarters, we only rouse his
suspicions. For it must be indeed granted absolutely that the
study of that which lies hidden in sleep and death is morbid if
it leads to weakness or to estrangement from real life. No less
must we admit that much of that which has always called itself
occult science in the world, and which is even now practised
under that name, bears the impression of what is unhealthy and

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

49
hostile to life; but this certainly does not spring from genuine
occult science.

The real fact of the matter is this, that just as a man cannot
always be awake, so neither is he sufficiently equipped for the
actual conditions of life, in its entire range, without that which
occult science has to offer him. Life continues during sleep, and
the forces which work and labour during the waking state draw
their strength and refreshment from that which sleep gives them.

It is thus with the things under our observation in the manifested
world. The boundaries of the world are wider than the field of
this observation; and what man recognizes in the visible must
be supplemented and fertilized by what he is able to know of
the invisible world. A man who did not continually renew his
exhausted forces by sleep, would bring his life to destruction; and
in the same way a view of the world which is not fertilized by a

[046]

knowledge of the unseen, must lead to a feeling of desolation.

It is similarly so with regard to death. Living creatures fall
a prey to death in order that new life may arise. It is occult
science which throws light on Goethe's beautiful phrase: “Nature
invented Death in order to have much Life.” Just as in the
ordinary sense there could be no life without death, so can there
be no real knowledge of the visible world without insight into
the invisible. All discernment of the visible must plunge again
and again into the invisible in order to develop. Thus it is evident
that occult science alone makes the life of revealed knowledge
possible. When it emerges in its true form it never enfeebles life,
but strengthens it and ever renews its freshness and health, when,
left to its own resources, it has become weak and diseased.

When a man sinks into sleep the connection between his
principles changes, as described earlier in this work. The part
of the sleeping man which lies upon his couch comprises the
physical and etheric bodies, but not the astral body and not the
ego. It is because the etheric body remains bound to the physical
body in sleep that the life-activities continue. For the moment

50

An Outline of Occult Science
the physical body is left to itself, it must of necessity fall into
decay. The things that are extinguished in sleep are ideas, pain,
pleasure, joy, grief, the ability to express conscious will, and
similar facts of existence. But the astral body is the vehicle
of all these things. That the astral body, with all its joy and

[047]

sorrow, its realm of thought and will, is annihilated in sleep is
an opinion that cannot be entertained by an unbiased judgment;
it exists still, but in another condition. In order that the human
ego and the astral body may not only be endowed with pleasure
and pain and all the other things we have named, but also have a
conscious perception of them, it is necessary that the astral body
should be united with the physical and etheric bodies. This is the
case during waking life, but not in sleep. The astral body has
withdrawn itself from the other bodies. It has adopted another
kind of existence than that which it possesses while united with
the physical and etheric bodies. Now it is the task of occult
science to study this other kind of existence in the astral body.

During sleep, the astral body withdraws from the possibility of
external observation and occult science must trace it in its hidden
life, until it again takes possession of its physical and etheric
bodies on waking.

As in all cases when knowledge of the hidden things and
events of life have to be dealt with, clairvoyant observation is
necessary for the discovery of the real facts of the sleep state
in its true nature, but if that which may be discovered by this
means has once been made clear, it is comprehensible to really
unprejudiced thought without further demonstration. For events
in the unseen world show themselves by their effects in the
manifested world. If what is revealed by clairvoyant vision is

[048]

an explanation of visible events, such a confirmation by life
itself is the proof which may rightly be demanded. Even one
who will not use the means to be given later for the attainment
of clairvoyant vision, may have the following experience: he
may, in the first place, take the statements of the clairvoyant for

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

51
granted, and then apply them to the material events within his
experience. He will then find that life thereby becomes clear and
comprehensible; and the more exact and minute his observations
of ordinary life, the more readily will he come to this conclusion.

Even though the astral body during sleep passes through no
experiences, though it is not conscious of pleasure, pain, and the
like, it does not remain inactive. On the contrary, it is a fact that
active work is its function in the sleep state. For it is the astral
body which strengthens and recuperates man's forces, exhausted
during waking life. As long as the astral body is united with
the physical and etheric bodies it is related to the outer world
through these two bodies. They convey to it perceptions and
representations. Through the impressions which they receive
from their surroundings, it experiences pleasure and pain. Now
the physical body can be preserved in the form and shape suitable
to the individual only by means of the human etheric body. But
this human form can be preserved only by an etheric body which
on its part receives corresponding forces from the astral body.

The etheric body is the builder, the architect, of the physical
body. It can, however, construct in the true sense only when
it receives from the astral body the impulse as to the manner

[049]

in which it must build. In this latter are contained the models,
according to which the etheric body gives the physical body its
form. During our waking hours these models for the physical
body are not present in the astral body, or, at least, only to a
certain extent. For in waking life the soul replaces these models
with its own images. When a person directs his senses upon his
environment he thus creates in his ideas pictures which are copies
of the world around him. In fact these copies at first disturb the
prototypes which give the etheric body the impulse to preserve
the physical body. Such disturbance could not be present if a
man, by virtue of his own activity, could convey to his astral
body those pictures which would give the right impulse to the
etheric body. Yet this very disturbance plays an important part

52

An Outline of Occult Science
in human life, and is able to express itself because the models
for the etheric body do not come into full play in the waking life.

This fact is revealed by “fatigue.” Now, during sleep, no external
impressions disturb the force of the astral body. Therefore in this
condition it can expel fatigue. The work of the astral body during
sleep consists in removing fatigue, and it can accomplish this
only by leaving the physical and etheric bodies. During waking
life the astral body does its work within the physical body; during
sleep it works on the latter from without.

For instance, just as the physical body has need of the outer
world, which is of like substance with itself, for its supply of

[050]

food, something of the same kind takes place in the case of the
astral body. Let us imagine a physical human body removed from
the surrounding world: it would die. That shows that physical
life is an impossibility without the entire physical environment.

In fact, the whole earth must be just as it is if physical human
bodies are to exist upon it. For, in reality, the whole human body
is only a part of the earth,—indeed, in a wider sense, part of
the whole physical universe. In this respect it is related in the
same sense as, for example, the finger of a hand to the entire
human body. Separate the finger from the hand and it cannot
remain a finger: it withers away. Such would also be the fate
of the human body were it removed from that body of which it
is a member,—from the conditions of life with which the earth
provides it. Let it be raised above the surface of the earth but a
sufficient number of miles and it will perish as the finger perishes
when cut off from the hand. If this fact is less apparent in the
case of a man's physical organism than in that of his finger and
his body, it is merely because the finger cannot walk about on
the body as man is able to do on the earth, and because on that
account the dependence of the former is more obvious.

In the same way that the physical body is embedded in the
physical world to which it belongs, so does the astral body form
a part of its own world, only it is torn out of it in waking life.

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

53

We can form a clear idea of what happens by having recourse
to an analogy. Imagine a vessel filled with water. No one drop

[051]

is a separate thing in itself within that entire mass of water. But
let us take a little sponge and with it suck up a single drop from
the whole mass of water. Something of this kind happens to the
human astral body on awaking. During sleep it is in a world
resembling its own nature. In a certain sense it forms part of
it. On awaking, the physical and etheric bodies suck it up: they
absorb it; they contain the organs through which it perceives the
outer world. In order to achieve this perception it has to leave
its own world, for it is in that world alone that it can receive the
models which it needs for the etheric body.

Just as food is supplied to the physical body from its
surroundings, so are the pictures of the world surrounding the
astral body presented to it during the state of sleep. There, indeed,
it lives in the universe, beyond the physical and etheric bodies:

in that same universe out of which the whole man is born. The
source of the images by means of which man receives his form
is in this universe. He is linked in harmony with it; and when he
awakens he rises above the surface of this all-pervading harmony
to attain external perception. In sleep his astral body returns to
the universal harmony. He brings so much strength from it to
his bodies on awaking that he can once more dispense for a time
with sojourning in the realm of harmony. The astral body returns
during sleep to its home, and, on awaking, brings back into life
freshly invigorated forces. That which the astral body thus gains,
and brings with it on waking, finds its outer expression in the

[052]

refreshment afforded by sound sleep.

Further exposition of occult science will show that this home
of the astral body is more extensive than that which belongs to the
physical body in the narrower sense of the physical environment.

Thus, while man as a physical being is a member of this earth,
his astral body belongs to worlds in which other heavenly bodies
besides our earth are included. During sleep, therefore,—(this can

54

An Outline of Occult Science
be made clear, as we have said, only by further explanations)—it
enters a world to which other stars than the earth belong. In
recognition of the fact that man lives during sleep in a world of
stars, that is, in an astral world, occult science calls that principle of man which has its real home in that “astral” world and which,
every time it returns to the sleep state, draws renewed force from
that world, the astral body.

It should be superfluous to point out that a misunderstanding
might easily arise with regard to these facts; in our time, however,
when certain materialistic modes of representation exist, it
becomes quite necessary to draw attention to them. In quarters
where such representation prevails it may, of course, be said that
such a thing as fatigue can be scientifically investigated only in
accordance with physical conditions. Even if the learned are not
yet unanimous with regard to the physical cause of fatigue, one
thing is quite firmly established; we must accept certain physical
processes which lie at the root of this phenomenon. It would be

[053]

well, however, if it were recognized that occult science does
not in any way oppose this assertion. It admits everything that is
said in this connection, just as it is admitted that for the physical
erection of a house one brick must be laid upon another, and
that when the house is finished its form and construction can
be explained by purely mechanical laws. But the thought of the
architect is necessary for the building of the house. This cannot
be discovered merely by examination of physical laws.

Just as the thought of the creator of a house stands behind the
physical laws which make it explicable, so too, behind what is
affirmed, with perfect accuracy by physical science, stands that
of which occult science treats. This comparison is of course often
put forward when the justification for a spiritual background to
the world is in question; and it may be considered a trivial one.

But what is important in such matters is not familiarity with
certain conceptions, but that the proper weight should be given
them in establishing a fact. One may be prevented from doing

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

55
this simply because contrary ideas have so much power over the
judgment that this weight is not felt.

Dreaming is an intermediate state between sleeping and
waking. What dream experiences offer to thoughtful observation
is the many-coloured interweaving of a picture-world, which
nevertheless conceals within itself some sort of law and order. At
first this world seems to have an ebb and flow, often in confused
succession. Man in his dream-life is set free from the laws of

[054]

waking consciousness which bind him to sense-perception and
the laws of reason. And yet dreams have some sort of mysterious
law, attractive and fascinating to human speculation, and this is
the deeper reason why the beautiful play of imagination lying
at the root of artistic feeling is always apt to be compared to
dreaming. We need only recall a few characteristic dreams to find
this corroborated. A man dreams, for example, that he is driving
off a dog that is attacking him. He wakes, and finds himself in the
act of unconsciously pushing off part of the bedclothes which had
been lying on an unaccustomed part of his body and which had
therefore become oppressive. What is it that dream-life makes,
in this instance, out of an incident perceptible to the senses? In
the first place, it leaves in complete unconsciousness what the
senses would perceive in the waking state. But it holds fast to
something essential—namely, the fact that the man wishes to
repel something; and round about this it weaves a metaphorical
occurrence.

The pictures, as such, are echoes of waking life. There is
something arbitrary in the way in which they are drawn from
it. Every one feels that the same external cause may conjure
up various dream-pictures. But they give symbolic expression
to the feeling that one has something to ward off. The dream
creates symbols; it is a symbolist. Inner experiences can also be
transformed into such dream-symbols. A man dreams that a fire
is crackling beside him; he sees flames in his dream. He wakes up
feeling that he is too heavily covered and has become too warm.

[055]

56

An Outline of Occult Science

The feeling of too great warmth expresses itself symbolically
in the picture. Quite dramatic experiences may be enacted in a
dream. For example, some one dreams that he is standing on
the edge of a precipice. He sees a child running toward it. The
dream makes him experience all the tortures of the thought—if
only the child will not be heedless and fall over into the abyss!

He sees it fall, and hears the dull thud of the body below. He
awakes, and perceives that an object which had been hanging on
the wall of the room has become unfastened, and made a dull
sound by its fall. This simple event is expressed in dream-life
by one which unravels itself in exciting pictures. For the present
it is not at all necessary to engage in reflection as to the reason
why, in the last example, the moment of the falling of a heavy
object expresses itself in a series of events which seem to spread
themselves over a certain length of time; it is only necessary to
keep in view that the dream transforms into a picture that which
would present itself to the waking sense-perception.

We see that the moment the senses cease their activity, creative
power asserts itself in man. It is the same creative power which is
present in absolutely dreamless sleep, and at that time recuperates
man's exhausted forces. For this dreamless sleep to take place,
the astral body must be withdrawn from the etheric and physical
bodies. During the dream-state it is so far separated from the

[056]

physical body as to have no further connection with the organs
of sense; but it still maintains a certain connection with the
etheric body. The capacity for perceiving the experiences of
the astral body by means of pictures is due to this connection
which it maintains with the etheric body. The moment this
connection also ceases, the pictures sink into the obscurity of
unconsciousness and dreamless sleep has set in.

The arbitrary and often nonsensical element in dream-pictures
arises from the fact that the astral body cannot, on account
of its separation from the sense-organs of the physical body,
relate its pictures to the correct objects and events of the outer

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

57
environment. It is especially illuminating, in this matter, to
examine a dream in which the ego is, as it were, split up; as, for
example in the case of a person who dreams that he is a schoolboy
and cannot answer the propounded question, while immediately
afterward as the teacher, he himself answers it. The dreamer,
being unable to make use of his physical organs of perception, is
not able to connect both occurrences with himself, as the same
individual. Therefore, in order to recognize himself also as a
permanent ego, man must first be equipped with outer organs
of perception. Only when he has acquired the faculty of self-
consciousness without the aid of such organs will the permanent
ego also become perceptible to him outside his physical body.

Clairvoyant consciousness has to acquire this faculty, and the
method of doing so will be treated in detail later in this work.

[057]

Even death takes place for no other cause than a change in the
connection of the principles of man's being. And what is visible to
clairvoyant observation with regard to death may also be seen in
its effects in the manifested world; in this case also, an unbiased
judgment will find the teachings of occult science confirmed by
observing external life. The expression of the invisible in the
visible is, however, less evident with regard to these facts, and
there is greater difficulty in feeling the full importance of that
which in the events of outer life endorses the statements of occult
science in this domain. These statements may be supposed to be
mere pictures of fancy, even more readily than many other things
that have been dealt with in this work, if we shut ourselves off
from the knowledge that everywhere in the visible is contained
an unmistakable foreshadowing of the invisible.

On the approach of sleep, only the astral body is released from
its connection with the etheric and physical bodies, which still
remain united, whereas at death the separation of the physical
from the etheric body takes place.

The physical body is
abandoned to its own forces, and must therefore disintegrate
as a corpse. At death the etheric body finds itself in a condition

58

An Outline of Occult Science
in which it has never been before during the time between birth
and death,—with the exception of certain abnormal conditions
to be dealt with later. That is to say, it is now united with the
astral body in the absence of the physical body; for the etheric

[058]

and astral bodies do not separate immediately after death: they
are held together for a time by the agency of a force the presence
of which can be easily understood; for were this force not present
the etheric body could not detach itself from the physical body.

It would remain bound to the latter, as is shown in the case of
sleep, when the astral body is not able to rend asunder these two
principles of man's being. This force comes into action at death.

It releases the etheric from the physical body, so that the former
remains united to the astral body. Clairvoyant observation shows
that this connection varies with different people after death. The
time of its duration is measured by days. For the present, this
period of time is mentioned only for the sake of information.

Subsequently, the astral body is also released from the etheric
body and goes on its way alone. During the union of the two
bodies, the individual is in a state which enables him to be aware
of the experiences of his astral body. As long as the physical
body is there, the work of reinforcing the wasted organs has to be
begun from without, as soon as the astral body is liberated from
it. When once the physical body is separated, this work ceases.

Nevertheless, the force which was expended in this way while the
man was asleep, continues after death and can now be applied to
some other end. It is now used for making the astral body's own
experiences perceptible. During his connection with his physical

[059]

body the outer world enters man's consciousness in images; after
the body has been laid aside, that which is experienced by the
astral body, when it is no longer connected with sense organs,
with this outer physical world, becomes perceptible. At first it
has no new experiences. Its connection with the etheric body
prevents it from experiencing anything new.

What, however, it does possess, is memory of its past life. The

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

59
etheric body still being present causes that past life to appear
as a vivid and comprehensive panorama. That is man's first
experience after death. He sees his life from birth to death spread
out before him in a series of pictures. Memory is only present
in the waking state, when during life man is united with his
physical body, and it is present only to the extent allowed by that
body. Nothing is lost to the soul that has made an impression
on it during life. Were the physical body a perfect instrument
for the purpose, it would be possible, at any moment during life,
to conjure up the whole of the past before the eyes of the soul.

At death there is no longer any obstacle to this. As long as the
etheric body remains, there exists a certain degree of perfection
of memory. But this disappears according to the degree in which
the etheric body loses the form which it possessed while united
with the physical body, and which resembles that body. This is
the very reason why the astral body separates, after a time, from
the etheric body. It can remain united with the latter only so
long as the form of the etheric body corresponds with that of the

[060]

physical body.

During the period of life between birth and death, separation
of the etheric body occurs only in exceptional cases, and for no
longer than a brief space of time. If, for example, a man exposes
one of his limbs to pressure, part of his etheric body may become
separated from the physical one. We say on such occasion that
the limb has “gone to sleep,” and the peculiar sensation we feel
results from the separation of the etheric body. (Of course a
materialistic manner of explanation may here again deny the
invisible behind the visible and say: all this arises merely from
the physical disturbance caused by the pressure.) Clairvoyant
vision can see in such a case, how the corresponding part of
the etheric body extends beyond the physical limb. Now if a
man experiences an unusual shock, or something similar, such a
separation of the etheric body from a large part of the physical
body may result, for a short time. That is the case when a man,

60

An Outline of Occult Science
for some reason or other, is suddenly brought face to face with
death,—for example when drowning, or threatened by a fatal
accident when mountaineering. What is related by people who
have had such experiences comes, in fact, very near the truth,
and can be ratified by clairvoyant observation. They declare that
in such moments their whole lives pass before their minds as
though in a huge memory-picture.

[061]

Out of the many examples which might here be adduced,
allusion will be made to one only, because it originates from
a man whose mode of thought would make everything said
here about such things seem pure fancy.5 Moriz Benedict, the
distinguished criminal anthropologist and eminent investigator in
many other realms of natural science, relates in his Reminiscences an experience of his own,—to the effect that once, when on the
point of drowning in a bath he had seen his whole life pass before
his memory as though in a single picture. If other people describe
differently the pictures seen by them under similar circumstances,
and even in such a way that they seem to have little to do with the
events of their past life, that does not contradict what has been
said; for the pictures which arise in the quiet abnormal condition
during the separation from the physical body are sometimes
at first sight, unintelligible in their relation to life.

Correct
observation, however, would always recognize this relationship.

Neither is it an objection if, for example, some one who was
once on the point of drowning did not experience what has been
described; for it must be borne in mind that this can happen
only when the etheric body is really separated from the physical

5 As a matter of fact, it is always very profitable for any one who is taking up the study of occult science to acquaint himself with the statements of those who regard this science as merely fanciful. Such statements cannot be so easily branded as due to partiality on the part of the observer. Let occultists learn as much as possible from those who regard their efforts as nonsense. They need not be disturbed if in this respect their love is not reciprocated. Occult observation assuredly does not require such things for the verification of its results, nor are these allusions intended as proofs but as illustrations.

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

61
body,—when, moreover, the former is still united with the astral

[062]

body. If, through the fright, a loosening of the etheric and
astral bodies also takes place, the experience is not forthcoming,
because then complete unconsciousness ensues, as in dreamless
sleep.

Immediately after death the events of the past appear as
though compressed by the memory into a picture. After its
separation from the etheric body, the astral body pursues its
further wanderings alone.

It is not difficult to realize that
everything continues to exist which, by means of its activity, the
astral body has made its own during its sojourn in the physical
body. The ego has to a certain extent elaborated the Spirit-

Self, the Life-Spirit, and the Spirit-Man. As far as these are
developed, they do not owe their existence to the organs present
in the different bodies, but to the ego; and it is precisely this
ego which needs no outer organs for perception; nor does it
require any such organs in order to retain possession of what
it has made one with itself. It might be objected: “Why then
is there no perception during sleep of the developed Spirit-Self,

Life-Spirit, and Spirit-Man?” For this reason that the ego is
chained to the physical body between birth and death. Even
though, during sleep, it is out of the physical body with the
astral body it nevertheless remains closely connected with the
physical body; for the activity of the astral body is directed
toward the physical body. On this account the ego is relegated to
the outer world of sense for its observations, and cannot receive
spiritual revelations in their direct form. Not until death do these

[063]

revelations come within reach of the ego, because by means of
death the ego is freed from its connection with the physical and
etheric bodies. Another world may flash upon the consciousness
the moment it is withdrawn from the physical world which during
life monopolizes its activity.

Now there are reasons why even at this juncture all connection
with the outer physical world of sense does not cease for

62

An Outline of Occult Science
man.

That is to say, certain desires remain which sustain
the connection. There are desires which man creates just because
he is conscious of his ego as the fourth principle of his being.

These desires and wishes, springing from the existence of his
three lower bodies, can operate only in the external world, and
cease to operate when these bodies are cast aside. Hunger is
caused by the external body; as soon as that external body is
no longer connected with the ego, hunger ceases. Now, had the
ego no further desires than those springing from its own spiritual
nature, it might at death draw full satisfaction from the spiritual
world into which it is transplanted. But life has given it other
desires as well. It has kindled in it a longing for pleasures only to
be enjoyed by means of physical organs, although these pleasures
themselves do not originate in the nature of those organs. It is
not only the three bodies which demand gratification from the
physical world, but the ego itself finds pleasures in that world,

[064]

for the enjoyment of which there exist no means whatever, in
the spiritual world.

During life the ego has two kinds of desires: those that spring
from the bodies and must therefore be gratified within the bodies,
but which must also come to an end with their disintegration; and
those that arise from the spiritual nature of the ego. As long as
the ego lives in the bodies, those cravings are satisfied by means
of the bodily organs. For in the manifestations of the bodily
organs the hidden spiritual element is at work, and the senses
receive something spiritual as well, in everything of which they
are cognizant. That spiritual element is also present after death,
although in a different form. Everything spiritual that the ego
longs for while in the world of sense, it still possesses when the
senses are no longer there.

Now if a third kind of wish were not added to these two, death
would mean only a transition from desires which may be satisfied
through the senses to such as are fulfilled by the revelation of
the spiritual world. The third kind of desire is that which is

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

63
created by the ego during life in the sense-world, because it
finds pleasure in that world, even when no spiritual element is
revealed in it. The humblest pleasures may be manifestations of
the spirit. The satisfaction afforded a starving creature by taking
food is a manifestation of the spirit, for by taking food something
is thereupon brought about without which, in a certain sense, the
spiritual nature could not develop. But the ego can go beyond
the pleasure, which in this case is the outcome of necessity. It

[065]

may even long for the delicious food quite apart from the service
rendered to the spirit by taking nourishment.

It is the same with other things in the sense-world. Desires
are created in this way which would never have appeared in the
sense-world if the human ego had not been incorporated in it.

Neither do such desires arise from the spiritual nature of the ego.

The ego must have pleasures of the senses as long as it lives
in the body, even though it be for the very reason that its own
nature is spiritual. For the spirit manifests in material things, and
the ego is enjoying nothing less than spirit when it surrenders
itself to that element in the sense-world which is irradiated by the
light of the spirit. Moreover, it will continue to enjoy this light
even when the senses are no longer the medium through which
the spiritual rays pass. But there is no fulfillment possible in the
spiritual world for desires in which the spirit is not living even in
the world of the senses.

When death takes place, the possibility of gratifying desires
of this description is cut off. Pleasure in good things to eat can be
induced only by the presence of the physical organs required for
their consumption,—the palate, tongue, and so forth; but when
man has laid aside his physical body he no longer possesses
these organs.

If, however, the ego still craves that kind of
pleasure the craving must remain unsatisfied. As long as this
pleasure corresponds to the spiritual need, it is caused only by
the presence of the physical organs; but should it happen that the

[066]

ego has created the desire without serving the spirit in so doing,

64

An Outline of Occult Science
it retains it after death in the form of a craving which thirsts in
vain for gratification. We can form an idea of what man then
experiences only by imagining some one suffering from burning
thirst in a region where, far and wide, there is no water to be
found. This is the predicament of the ego after death, as long as
it retains ungratified desires for the pleasures of the outer world,
and has no organs by means of which to satisfy them. Of course
the burning thirst, serving as a comparison for the condition of
the ego after death, must be thought of as enormously increased,
and it must be imagined as extending to all desires still existing,
for which all possibility of gratification is lacking.

The next condition of the ego consists in freeing itself from
this bond of attraction to the outer world. With regard to this
world, it has to attain purification and liberation. It must be
cleansed of all wishes which it has created while in the body,
and which have no native rights in the spiritual world. As an
object is caught and burned up by fire, so is the world of desire,
described above, broken up and destroyed after death. A vista
is then opened into that world which occult science calls the

“consuming fire” of the spirit. This fire seizes upon desires
of a sensual nature which however are not rooted in the spirit.

Revelations of this kind which occult science is bound to make

[067]

with regard to such events may appear hopeless and terrible. It
may seem a fearful thing that a hope for the realization of which
sense-organs are required, should after death be transformed into
despair, and that a wish that can be fulfilled only by the physical
world should be changed into torturing deprivation. Yet we can
hold such an opinion only as long as we fail to realize that the
wishes and desires seized by the “consuming fire” after death
do not, in a higher sense, represent forces beneficial to life but
destructive to it.

By means of these forces the ego binds itself to the sense-world
more closely than is necessary, in order to draw from it all the
experience it requires. For the sense-world is a manifestation of

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

65
the hidden and spiritual world which lies behind it; and the ego
could never attain spiritual happiness through the bodily senses,
which are the only form in which the spiritual can be manifested,
unless it utilized the senses to seek the spiritual element in
sense-experience. Nevertheless, the ego loses sight of the true
spiritual reality in the physical world to such an extent that it
experiences sensual desires irrespective of the needs of the spirit.

If sense pleasure, as the expression of the spirit, serves to raise
and develop the ego, any pleasure which is not an expression of
the spirit warps and impoverishes it. Even though such a desire
finds the means of its gratification in the sense-world, still its
destructive effect upon the ego is thereby in no way diminished;
but it is not until after death that its disastrous effects become

[068]

apparent.

For this reason a man may, by gratifying such desires, create,
during his life, new and similar desires, wholly unaware that
he is enveloping himself in a “consuming fire.” What becomes
visible to him after death is only what already surrounded him
during his life, and by thus becoming visible it at once appears
in its salutary and beneficent effect. A human being who loves
another is certainly not attracted merely by that part of him which
is perceptible to the physical senses—the only part which is cut
off from observation after death—but after death, just that part
of the dear one then becomes visible for the perception of which
the physical organs were only the means. The one thing, in fact,
which would prevent a man from beholding his friend clearly is
the presence of desires which can be satisfied only by means of
physical organs. Unless these desires are extinguished, he can
have no conscious perception of his friend after death. When
looked at in this light, the terrible and hopeless character which
after-death experiences might assume for man, according to the
descriptions given by occult science, becomes changed into one
which is thoroughly satisfying and consoling.

Now the first after-death experiences differ entirely in yet

66

An Outline of Occult Science
another respect from those during life.

During the time of
purification man lives, as it were, backwards. He lives over again
the whole span of his life since birth; beginning with the events

[069]

immediately preceding his death, and reversing the order of his
experiences, he goes through them again until he reaches back
to childhood. In this process he sees with spiritually enlightened
eyes all those things which were not inspired by the spiritual
nature of the ego, with the difference that he now experiences
these things in reverse order.

For instance, a man who died in his sixtieth year, and who at
the age of forty had, in an outburst of anger, caused some one
either physical or mental pain, will go through this experience
again when, on the return journey of existence after death, he
reaches that point in his fortieth year; but now he does not
experience the satisfaction which his attack had afforded him
during life; instead, he experiences the pain which he inflicted
upon the other man. It may at once be seen, however, that
whatever pain he feels in the after-death experience is caused by
a desire of the ego arising only from the outer physical world;
in reality the ego does not only injure another by the indulgence
of such a desire, but it also injures itself; although the injury to
itself is not apparent during life.

After death, however, the whole of the harmful world of
desires becomes visible to the ego, which then feels attracted
toward every being or object which had kindled the desire, in
order that this may be destroyed in the “consuming fire” by the
same means that created it. When man, on his return journey,
reaches the moment of his birth, then only have all such desires

[070]

been purged in the purifying flames, and henceforth nothing
remains to hinder him from devoting himself entirely to the
spiritual world. He enters upon a new phase of existence. In the
same way that he laid aside his physical body at death and, soon
afterward, his etheric body, so does that part of his astral body
dissolve which can only live in the consciousness of the outer

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

67
physical world.

Occult science, therefore, recognizes three corpses,—the
physical, etheric, and astral. The period at which the last is
cast off by man is marked by the time of purification, which
amounts to about one third of the time elapsed between birth and
death. The reason why this is so can only be explained later,
when the course of human life is examined from the standpoint of
occult science. To clairvoyant observation, astral corpses, which
have been cast off by human beings passing from the state of
purification into a higher existence, are constantly visible in the
world surrounding man, in exactly the same way that physical
corpses, in places inhabited by men, are apparent to physical
observation.6

After purification an entirely new state of consciousness begins
for the ego. Whereas before death the outer perceptions must
flow to the ego, in order that upon these perceptions the light of
consciousness might be able to fall, so now in like manner from
within, streams a world which attains consciousness. The ego is
living in this world also between birth and death; only then this
world is clothed in the manifestations of the senses. It is only

[071]

when the ego, freed from all the ties of sense, turns inward to
behold its own “holy of holies,” that its true innermost nature,
which had hitherto been obscured by the senses, is revealed
to it.

In the same way that the ego is recognized inwardly
before death, so, after death and purification, is the spiritual life
inwardly revealed to it in all its fulness. This revelation really
takes place immediately after the etheric body is laid aside; but it
is obscured by the dark cloud of desires turned toward the outer
world. It is as though a world of spiritual bliss were invaded by
black demoniacal phantoms, caused by those desires which are
being destroyed by the “consuming fire.” Indeed, these desires
are not mere phantoms, but real entities, which become apparent

6 In current theosophical literature, the condition of the ego from death to the end of purification is called “Kamaloca.”

68

An Outline of Occult Science
immediately after the ego is deprived of physical organs, and is
thus able to discern those things which are of a spiritual nature.

These entities have the appearance of distorted caricatures of
the objects with which the individual had formerly become
acquainted through his senses.

Clairvoyant observation shows that this place of purging
fire is peopled by beings whose appearance may well seem
horrifying and painful to spiritual vision, whose pleasure seems
to consist in destruction, and whose passions impel them to evil-
doing of such a description that the evil of the physical world
seems insignificant in comparison. Whatever desires of the kind
described above are brought into that world by man, are looked

[072]

upon by these beings as food, by means of which their powers
are continually strengthened and invigorated.

The picture thus sketched of a world imperceptible to the
senses may seem less incredible if we look with an unprejudiced
eye on part of the animal world. What is a fierce, devouring
wolf, from a spiritual point of view? What does it reveal to us
through that which our senses perceive? Nothing else than a
soul that lives in desires, and acts by desire. The external form
of the wolf may be called an embodiment of those desires; and
if man had no organs with which to perceive that form, if its
desires appeared invisibly in their effects,—if, therefore, a force
invisible to the eye were prowling about, and might be the cause
of all that happened through the visible wolf,—he would still be
forced to recognize the existence of a creature corresponding to
it. Now the beings of the region of purifying fire are not visible
to the physical eye, but to clairvoyant sight only; but their effects
are clearly apparent. They bring about the destruction of the ego
when it gives them nourishment. These effects are clearly visible
if what began as a pleasure leads to excess and debauchery.

For even what is perceptible to the senses would attract the
ego only in so far as the pleasure had its root in the ego's own
nature. The animal is prompted by desire for that in the outer

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

69
world which its three bodies crave. Man has higher enjoyments,
because to the three principles of his bodily nature is added the
fourth, the ego. But if the ego seeks a gratification which does

[073]

not tend toward the maintenance and development of its nature
but to its destruction, then such a craving can be neither the effect
of its three bodies, nor that of its own nature, but can only be
caused by beings, concealed from the senses in their true form,
but able furtively to approach that higher nature of the ego, and
excite in it desires which, though it is cut off from the senses,
can still be satisfied only by means of sense-organs.

For there are beings which feed on passions and desires of a
worse kind than those of an animal nature, because they do not
expend themselves on objects of the senses but seize upon the
spiritual element and drag it down to a sensual level. Therefore
the forms of such beings are more hideous, more horrible, to
spiritual sight than are the forms of the fiercest animals, in which
after all only passions rooted in the senses are incarnated. And
the destructive forces of these beings immeasurably surpass any
destructive rage existing in the animal world as perceived by the
senses. Occult science must in this way enlarge man's view so as
to include a world of beings standing, in a certain respect, lower
than the visibly destructive animal world.

When man has passed through the world of purification
after death, he finds himself in a world the contents of which
are spiritual, and which also creates in him longings which
can be satisfied only by spiritual things. But even now man
distinguishes between that which properly belongs to his ego
and what forms the environment of that ego—one might say, its

[074]

spiritual outer world. Only that, of which he becomes sensible
in this environment, pours in upon him in the same way that the
perception of his own ego poured in upon him during his sojourn
in the body. Whereas man's environment in the life between
birth and death speaks to him through his bodily organs, after
death when all the bodies are laid aside the language of his new

70

An Outline of Occult Science
environment penetrates directly into the innermost sanctuary of
the ego. Man's whole environment is now filled with beings
of a like nature with his ego, for only an ego has access to an
ego. Just as minerals, plants, and animals surround man in the
sense-world, and compose it, so, after death, is he surrounded by
a world composed of beings of a spiritual nature.

Yet he takes something with him into this world which is not
part of his environment there; it is what the ego has experienced in
the world of the senses. First of all, the sum of these experiences
appeared, as a comprehensive memory-picture, immediately after
death, while the etheric body was still united to the ego. The
etheric body itself is then, indeed, laid aside, but something
of the memory-picture remains with the ego as an everlasting
possession. Just as though an extract or essence were made out of
all the events and experiences which a man encounters between
birth and death, so might we describe that which is left behind.

It is the spiritual product of life, its fruit. This product is of a
spiritual nature. It contains everything spiritual which is revealed

[075]

through the senses, yet this spiritual treasure could not have been
gathered save by life in the sense-world.

This spiritual fruit of the sense-world becomes after death
the ego's own inner world. With it the ego enters a world,
which consists of beings who reveal themselves in the same
and only manner in which man in his innermost depths, can
become conscious of his own ego. As a plant seed, which is the
essence of the whole plant, grows only when buried in another
world, the earth, so now that which the ego brings from the
sense-world gradually unfolds itself as a seed under the influence
of the spiritual environment in which it has been planted. Occult
science can, of course, only portray in pictures what happens
in this “spirit-world;” still those pictures present themselves as
absolute reality to the clairvoyant's sight, when he investigates
invisible happenings, corresponding to those which are visible to
the physical eye. Whatever of that world can be described, may

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

71
be visualized by comparison with the world of the senses for
although it is of a purely spiritual nature, it nevertheless resembles the physical world in certain respects. Just as, for instance, in
the physical world, a color appears when some object impresses
the eye, so in the spirit-world a color appears to the ego when
a being acts upon it. But this latter phenomenon is perceived in
the same manner as the ego can be perceived inwardly between
birth and death. It is not as though the light outside fell within
upon the man, but as though another being directly affected the

[076]

ego, causing the latter to picture this influence in a colour-form.

Thus do all things in the spiritual environment of the ego find
expression in a world of coloured rays. As their origin is of a
different kind, it goes without saying that these colours of the
spiritual world are also of a somewhat different character from
physical colours. A similar thing is true of other impressions
received by man in the world of sense. But it is the sounds of the
spiritual world that most nearly resemble the impressions of the
sense-world; and the more at home a man becomes in the spiritual
world, the more he realizes it as a life of self-determined motion,
which may be compared with the sounds, and the harmony of
sounds, of the physical world. Only he does not feel the tones
as something approaching an organ from outside, but as a force
streaming forth into the outer world through his ego. He feels the
sound just as in the sense-world he feels his own speech or song,
only he knows that in the spiritual world these sounds, streaming
out from him, are at the same time the manifestations of other
beings, who are pouring themselves into the world through him.

A still higher manifestation takes place in the spirit-land when
the sound becomes the “spiritual word.” Then there streams
through the ego not only the pulsing life of another spiritual
being, but such a being itself communicates its own inner nature
to the ego; and then, when the spiritual word streams through
the ego, two beings live in one another, without that separating

[077]

element which every companionship in the sense-world must

72

An Outline of Occult Science
carry with it. And this is really the nature of the communion of
the ego with other spiritual beings after death.

There are three regions in the spiritual world, which may
be compared to the three divisions of the physical sense-world.

The first region is in a certain respect the “solid land” of the
spiritual world, the second the “sphere of ocean and river,” and
the third the “atmospheric region.” That which assumes physical
form on earth, so that it can be perceived by physical organs,
in accordance with its spiritual nature, is to be seen in the first
region of the spirit-world. There, for instance, may be seen the
force that fashions the form of a crystal. Only what is there
revealed is the opposite of that which appears in the sense-world.

In that world the space which is filled by a mass of rock appears
to spiritual sight as a kind of hollow space; but round about this
hollow is seen the force which fashions the form of the rock.

The colour of the rock in the sense-world appears in the spiritual
world as its complementary colour; thus a red stone is green
when seen from the spirit-world, a green stone is red, and so
on. Other qualities also appear in their opposites. Just as stone,
masses of earth, and like materials make up the solid land—the
continental region of the world of sense—so do the structures
described above compose the solid land of the spiritual world.

All that is life in the sense-world belongs to the ocean-region

[078]

of the spiritual world. To the physical eye, life appears in its
effects in plants, animals, and men. To spiritual vision, life is a
flowing substance, like oceans and rivers, diffused through the
spirit-world. A still better comparison is that of the circulation of
the blood in the body; for whereas seas and rivers are seen to be
irregularly distributed in the physical world, a certain regularity
in distribution of the flowing life reigns in the spirit-world, as in
the circulation of the blood. This “flowing life” is simultaneously
heard as spiritual sound.

The third region of the spirit-world is its “atmosphere.” What
is known in the physical world as “feeling” is also present there,

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

73
permeating everything like the air on the earth. We must imagine
a rushing sea of feeling. Pain and sorrow, joy and rapture, flow
through this region, like wind and storms in the atmosphere of the
physical world. Imagine a battle fought on earth. There confront
one another not merely human forms, as seen by the physical
eye, but feelings opposed to feelings, passions to passions; pain
fills the battlefield just as much as do the forms of men. All that
is seething there of passion, pain, and the joy of victory is not
only perceptible in its effects as revealed to the physical senses;
it may be seen with the spiritual senses as an atmospheric process
in the spirit-world. Such an event in the spiritual world is like a
thunderstorm in the physical, and the perception of these events
may be compared to the hearing of words in the physical world.

For this reason it is said that as the air envelops and permeates
earthly things, so do “interweaving spiritual words” pervade the

[079]

beings and events of the spirit-world.

And still further observations are possible in this spirit-world.

What may be compared to light and heat in the physical world is
there too. That which permeates everything in the spirit-world,
as earthly things and beings are permeated by heat, is the world
of thought itself. There, however, thoughts must be regarded
as living and independent beings. What is understood by man
in the manifested world as thought is but a shadow of what
lives as a thought-being in the spirit-world. Imagine thought,
as it now exists in man, raised out of him and as an active,
energetic being, endowed with an inner life of its own, and you
have a feeble illustration of that which fills the fourth region of
the spirit-world. In the physical world between birth and death
what man understands as thought is but the manifestation of
the thought-world as it is able to mould itself by means of the
instruments afforded by the bodies. All such thoughts cherished
by man, that carry with them an enrichment of the physical world
have their origin in this region. By such thoughts are meant not
only the ideas of great inventors and men of genius; but those

74

An Outline of Occult Science
ideas found in every individual which he does not owe solely to
the external world, but through which he, so to speak, transforms
that world.

In so far as feelings and passions are concerned, the cause of
which lies in the outer world, these feelings are perceptible in the

[080]

third region of the spirit-world; but everything which so lives in a
man's soul as to make him a creator,—influencing, transforming
and fertilizing his environment,—is manifest in its original and
intrinsic form in the fourth division of the spirit-world.

That which exists in the fifth region may be compared
to physical light.

In its archetypal form it is wisdom in
manifestation.

Beings who diffuse wisdom throughout their
surroundings, as the sun pours light on physical beings, belong
to this realm. Whatever is illuminated by their wisdom stands
forth in its true meaning and significance for the spiritual world,
just as the colour of a physical object is seen when the light falls
upon it. There are still higher regions of the spirit-world, which
will be described later in this work.

Into this world the ego is plunged after death, together with
the results it carries with it out of physical life. And these results are still united with that part of the astral body which is not cast
off at the end of the time of purification. In fact, only that part
falls away which, in its desires and wishes, turned, after death,
toward physical life. The plunging of the ego into the spiritual
world, with what it has acquired in the physical world, may be
compared to the planting of a grain of seed in the soil in which
it can mature. As the grain of seed draws substances and forces
from its surroundings in order that it may develop into a new
plant, so the condition of the ego, when implanted in the spiritual

[081]

world, is one of development and growth.

Hidden within that which is perceived by an organ, there lies
the force whereby that same organ was formed. The eye perceives
light; but without light there would be no eye. Creatures spending
their lives in darkness do not develop organs of sight. Thus the

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

75
whole of man's physical body is created out of the hidden forces
of that of which he becomes conscious through his bodily organs.

The physical body is built up by the forces of the physical world,
the etheric body by those of the life-world, and the astral body is
formed out of the astral world. Now when the ego is transferred
to the spirit-world it is met by just those forces which remain
hidden to physical perception.

What appear to man's view in the first region of the spirit-
world are the spiritual beings that are always surrounding him,
and that have built up his physical body. Thus in the physical
world man perceives nothing but the manifestations of those
spiritual forces which have formed his own physical body. After
death he is in the very midst of these moulding forces, which,
previously hidden, now appear to him in their true forms. In
the same way, in the second region, he is in the midst of the
forces by which his etheric body was organized, and in the third
region there pour in upon him the potencies out of which his
astral body was formed. The higher regions of the spirit-world
also direct toward him those forces from which he was built in
the life between birth and death.

These denizens of the spiritual world are at present working

[082]

in co-operation with that which man has brought with him as the
product of his last life, which now becomes a germ; and through
this co-operation man is, first of all, built up anew as a spiritual
being. The physical and etheric bodies are still joined in sleep;
the astral body and the ego are, it is true, outside them, but still
connected with them. Whatever influences the astral body and
the ego receive, in such a state, from the spiritual world, can
serve only to recuperate the forces exhausted during the waking
state.

But when the physical and etheric bodies have been laid aside,
and, after the time of purification, also those parts of the astral
body still bound by their desires to the physical world, then
everything pouring in upon the ego from the spiritual world is

76

An Outline of Occult Science
not only a reforming but a reorganizing force. After a certain
period, to be dealt with in later chapters, the ego again gathers
round it an astral body which will be able to live in such an
etheric and physical body as man possesses between birth and
death. A man can once more pass through birth and renew his
earthly existence, in which, however, will be incorporated the
results of his former life. Until the rebuilding of his astral body,
man is a witness of his reconstruction. As the powers of the
spirit-world are not manifested to him through external organs,
but from within outward, like his own ego in self-consciousness,
he is able to observe that manifestation as long as his attention is
not turned to an outer world of perception. But from the moment

[083]

that the astral body is reconstituted, his attention is turned
outward; the astral body once more craves an outer etheric and
physical body. It is thus turned away from the inner revelations.

For this reason there is now an intermediate state, during which
man is immersed in unconsciousness. Consciousness can emerge
again in the physical world only when the necessary organs for
physical perception are formed.

During this period, in which consciousness illuminated by
inner perception ceases, the new etheric body begins to link itself
to the astral and man can once again enter a physical body. In
the linking together of these two bodies only such an ego could
consciously take part as had of itself created the Life-Spirit and

Spirit-Man out of the creative forces, hidden in the etheric and
physical bodies. Until the individual has evolved as far as this,
beings further advanced than himself in evolution must guide
this linking together. The astral body is guided, by such beings
as these, to parents through whom it may be endowed with the
appropriate etheric and physical bodies. Before the attachment of
the etheric body takes place, something of very great importance
happens to the man who is about to re-enter physical existence.

In his former life he created disturbing forces, which were
revealed to him on the journey retraced after death. Let us again

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

77
take an example. He caused some pain in an outburst of anger
in the fortieth year of his former life. After death, the other's

[084]

pain came before him as a force which had interfered with the
evolution of his ego. It is likewise with all such events of his
former life. On his re-entrance into physical life these hindrances
to his evolution confront the ego anew. As, on the threshold
of death, a sort of memory-picture arose before the human ego,
so there now arises a vision of the life approaching. Again he
sees a picture, this time showing all the obstacles which he has
to clear away, if he is to advance in evolution. And what he
thus sees becomes the starting-point for forces which he must
bring with him into his new life. The picture of the pain he has
caused the other man becomes a force which impels the ego,
on entering life again, to make amends for this pain. Thus the
previous life has a determining effect on the new one. The deeds
of the new life are in a certain way caused by those of the former
life. This connection, following the law, between an earlier and
later existence is to be looked upon as the “Law of Destiny”; it
has become usual to designate it “Karma,” a term borrowed from
oriental wisdom.

The building up of a new set of bodies, however, is not the
only task incumbent upon man between death and a new birth.

While this building up is taking place, man lives outside the
physical world. That world, however, continues to evolve during
this time. The surface of the earth changes in comparatively short
periods of time. What aspect did those regions which are now
occupied by Germany bear a few thousand years ago? When

[085]

man appears on earth in a new existence, the earth rarely looks
the same as it did at the time of his last incarnation. During his
absence from the earth all sorts of changes have occurred. Now
hidden forces are also at work in this alteration of the face of
the earth, proceeding from that very world in which man finds
himself after death; and he himself must co-operate with these
forces in the transformation of the earth. He can do so only

78

An Outline of Occult Science
under the direction of Higher Beings until, by the creation of his

Life-Spirit and Spirit-Man, he has acquired a clear perception
of the connection between the spiritual and its expression in
the physical. But he takes part in the transformation of earthly
conditions. It may be said that during the period between death
and a new birth, man so transforms the earth that its conditions
are in keeping with what he has evolved in himself. If we look at
a given place on the earth at a definite moment, and see it again
after a long lapse of time, under entirely changed conditions,
the forces which have wrought the change have proceeded from
those who are now dead. And it is this kind of connection which
exists between them and the earth until the time of rebirth.

Clairvoyant observation sees in all physical existence the
manifestation of a hidden spiritual element.

To physical
observation it is the light of the sun, climatic changes, and so on,
that effect the transformation of the earth, but to clairvoyance it

[086]

is the force of the dead that acts in the rays of light which fall on
the plant from the sun. The clairvoyant sees how human souls
hover about plants, how they change the surface of the earth. Not
alone upon himself nor upon the preparations for his own new
earthly existence, is man's attention bestowed after death.—No,
he is called upon then to work upon the outer world, just as he is
in life between the time of his birth and death.

Not only does the life of man affect the conditions of the
physical world from the spirit-land; but vice versa, activity
during physical existence has its effects in the spiritual world.

An example may explain what happens in this respect. A bond
of love exists between mother and child. This love arises from
a mutual attraction caused by the forces of the sense-world. But
in the course of time it changes. A spiritual tie gradually grows
out of the sense-bond, and this spiritual tie is not created for
the physical world only but for the spirit-world as well. The
same applies to other ties. Whatever is created in the physical
world by spiritual entities continues to exist in the spiritual world.

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

79

Friends who were closely united in life belong to each other in
spirit-land also, and when their bodies are laid aside they are in
much more intimate communion than during physical life. For as
spirits they exist for each other in the same way as, in the above
description, spiritual beings reveal themselves to others by inner
manifestation; and a tie created between two persons brings them
together again in a new life. Thus in the truest sense of the word

[087]

we may speak of finding one another again after death.

What has once happened to a man between birth and death
and from then till a new birth, repeats itself. Man returns to earth
again and again when the fruit he has earned in a physical life has
ripened in the spirit-world. It is not, however, a case of repetition
without beginning or end; but man has emerged out of other
forms of existence and passed into those which run their course
in the manner just described, and he will again in the future pass
into other forms. A viewpoint of these transition stages will be
gained when the evolution of the universe in connection with
man is subsequently considered from the standpoint of occult
science.

The occurrences between death and a new birth are of course
still more concealed from outer sense-observation than is the
spiritual foundation underlying manifested life between birth
and death. This sense-observation can see only the effects of that
portion of the hidden world where they impinge upon physical
existence. With regard to this the question must arise whether
man, on entering this life at birth, brings with him any results
from the events described by occult science as having taken place
between his last death and re-birth. If one finds the shell of a
snail in which there is no trace of the animal he will, in spite
of that, recognize that this snailshell was formed by the activity
of an animal, and he cannot believe that the shell constructed a
form for itself, by means of mere physical forces.

[088]

In the same way one who studies a man during life, and
finds something in him which cannot be due to this life, might

80

An Outline of Occult Science
reasonably admit that it arises from what occult science describes,
if by doing so an explanatory light is thrown on what is otherwise
inexplicable.

Here, too, the unseen causes might appear intelligible to
rational sense-observation from their visible effects, and whoever
observes life with absolute impartiality will find that, with every
fresh observation, this appears to be more and more true. The
important question, however, is how to find the right point of view
from which to observe their effects in life. Where, for example,
are the effects of that to be found which occult science describes
as incidents of the time of purification? How are the effects of
the experience which, according to occult investigations, man
undergoes in purely spiritual regions, manifested after this time
of purification?

Problems enough press upon every serious and profound
student of life in this domain. We see one man born in want
and misery, endowed only with inferior abilities, so that on
account of these facts, which are incident to his birth, he appears
predestined to a miserable existence. Another, from the first
moment of his life, is tended and cherished by loving hands and
hearts; brilliant talents are unfolded in him; his gifts point to a
successful and satisfactory career. Two opposite views may be

[089]

taken when met by such questions as these. The one will adhere
to what the senses perceive and what the understanding, relying
on these senses, is able to comprehend. This view will admit no
problem in the fact that one man is born fortunate and the other
unfortunate. Even if the word “chance” is not used, there will
be no question of thinking that such things are brought about
through any law of cause and effect. And with regard to talents
and abilities, such a view will consider them as “inherited” from
parents, grandparents, and other ancestors. It refuses to seek the
causes in spiritual events which the man himself met with before
birth—regardless of heredity—and by means of which he shaped
his talents and abilities.

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

81

Another view would find no satisfaction in such an
interpretation.

It would assert that even in the manifested
world nothing happens in definite places or surroundings without
our having to presuppose causes for the event in question. Even
though in many cases such causes have not yet been investigated,
they are there. An Alpine flower does not grow in the lowlands.

Its nature has something which associates it with Alpine regions.

Just so must there be something in a man which determines his
birth in a certain environment. Causes belonging to the physical
world alone are not sufficient to account for this. To a more
profound thinker such an explanation appears in somewhat the
same light as when one has dealt another a blow, the motive for
which is not attributed to the feelings of the one but is to be
explained by the physical mechanism of the hand.

[090]

Any explanation of abilities and talents solely by “heredity” is
to such a viewpoint equally unsatisfactory. It is true one may say:

“See how certain talents are inherited in families.” During two
and a half centuries musical talents were inherited by members
of the Bach family.

Eight mathematicians sprang from the

Bernoulli family, to some of whom quite different occupations
were assigned in their childhood; but the inherited talents always
drove them to the family vocation. It may be further pointed
out how, by an exact investigation of the line of ancestry of
a person in one way or another the gifts of this person have
shown themselves in the forefathers, and only represent the sum
of inherited talents. Whoever holds the latter of the two views
above indicated will be sure not to let such facts pass unnoticed,
but to him they cannot mean the same as they do to one who relies for his interpretation on the events of the world of sense alone.

The former will point out that inherited talents can no more of
themselves, combine into a complete personality than can the
metal parts of a watch fit themselves together. And if objection is
made that the co-operation of the parents may possibly produce
the combination of talents,—that this as it were, takes the place

82

An Outline of Occult Science
of the watchmaker,—he will reply: “Look impartially at what is
new in every child-personality, at that which is absolutely new;
that cannot come from the parents, for the simple reason that it
does not exist in them.”

[091]

Inaccurate thinking may create much confusion in this domain.

It is still worse when those who hold the second view are set
down by the supporters of the first as opponents of what is, after
all, borne out by “ascertained facts.” But it may well be that
the latter have not the slightest intention of denying the truth
or value of those facts. For instance, they see that a definite
mental aptitude or predisposition is “inherited” in a family, and
that certain gifts accumulated and combined in one descendant
result in a remarkable personality. They are perfectly willing to
acquiesce when it is said that the most celebrated name seldom
stands at the beginning but at the end of a line of descent. But
it should not be taken amiss if they are compelled to form very
different opinions on the subject from those of people who are
determined to accept nothing but material evidence. To the latter
it may be said that it is true a man shows the characteristics
of his ancestors, because the “spirit-soul”, which enters upon
physical existence at birth, draws its bodily substance from that
which heredity bestows on it. But this says nothing more than
that a being shows the peculiarities of the body into which it has
descended.

It is no doubt a singular—a trivial—comparison, but the
unprejudiced person will not deny its justification, when one says
that a human being, who shows the qualities of his forefathers,
proves the origin of the personal qualities of that human being
as little as the fact that man is wet because he has fallen into

[092]

the water, proves something regarding his inner nature. And it
may further be said that if the most celebrated name stands at the
end of a line of family descent, it shows that the bearer of that
name needed that particular ancestry to build the body necessary
for the expression of his whole personality. But it is no proof

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

83
that his actual personal qualities were transmitted to him: such a
statement is, on the contrary, opposed to sound logic. If personal
gifts were inherited, they would be found at the beginning of a
line of descent,7 and starting from that point be transmitted to
the descendants. As, however, they stand at the end, it is evident
that they are not transmitted.

Now it is not to be denied that those who speak of a spiritual
causality in life have contributed no less to bringing about
confusion of thought. Far too much generalizing and vague
discussion comes from this quarter.

To say that a man's
personality is a combination of inherited characteristics may
certainly be compared with the assertion that the metal parts of a
watch have fitted themselves together. It must also be admitted
that, with regard to many assertions about a spiritual world, it is
as though some one said that the metal parts of a watch cannot
put themselves together in such a way as to enable the hands
to move forward; some intelligence must therefore be present
to effect this forward movement. In face of such an assertion,
he certainly builds on a far better foundation who says: “Oh!

[093]

I care nothing for your ‘mystical’ beings who move the hands
forward. What I want to know is the mechanical construction by
means of which the forward movement of the hands is achieved.”

It is by no means a question of merely knowing that behind a
mechanism, a watch for instance, there is an intelligence (the

7 The assertion that a man's personal talents, if governed purely by the law of

“heredity,” must show themselves at the beginning of a line of descent, not at its end, might of course easily be misunderstood. It might be said, indeed, that they could not show themselves then, for they must first be developed. But this is no objection; for if we wish to prove that something has been inherited from an ancestor, we must show how that which was there formerly is repeated in a descendant. Now if it were demonstrated that something existed at the beginning of a genealogical line which reappeared in its further course, we might speak of heredity. We cannot do so when something appears at the end of it which was not there before. The reversal of the above proposition is only to show that the belief in heredity is impossible.

84

An Outline of Occult Science
watchmaker); it can only be of importance to know the ideas in
the watchmaker's mind which preceded the construction of the
watch. These thoughts may be rediscovered in the mechanism.

Mere dreaming and imagining about the supersensual only
result in confusion, for they are not calculated to satisfy
opponents.

The latter are right in saying that such general
allusions to super-physical beings are not at all conducive to an
understanding of facts. Of course, such opponents might also
say the same of the exact statements of occult science. But,
in that case, it may be pointed out that the effects of hidden
spiritual causes are seen in manifested life. Let us assume for the
moment that what occult science asserts, proven by observation,

[094]

is correct:—that a man has gone through a time of purification
after death, and that during this period he has experienced in his
soul how a certain deed, performed by him in a former life, was a
hindrance to his progressive evolution. While he was undergoing
this experience, the impulse arose in him to make amends for
that deed. He brings this impulse with him into a new life and
its presence produces a tendency in his nature which draws him
into conditions rendering the amendment possible.—Taking into
consideration a number of such impulses, we have the cause for
a man's being born into an environment corresponding to his
destiny.

We may deal in the same way with another assumption. Let
us again accept as correct the assertion of occult science that
the fruits of a past life are incorporated in man's spiritual germ,
and that the spirit-land in which man finds himself, between
death and a new life, is the region in which these fruits ripen,
and are transformed into talents and capabilities which will
appear in a new life and will form the personality so that it
appears as the effect of what was gained in a former life. It
will become evident to any one who accepts these hypotheses
and, bearing them in mind, surveys life impartially, that while,
by their means, all material facts may be appreciated in their

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

85
full truth and significance, at the same time everything becomes
intelligible which, if only material facts were relied upon, must
forever remain incomprehensible to one whose attention is turned
toward the spiritual world.

And more important still, that
illogical reasoning of the kind indicated above will disappear,

[095]

namely,—that because the most distinguished name in a line of
descent stands at the end of it, its bearer must have inherited
his gifts. Life becomes logically comprehensible through the
supersensual facts ascertained by occult science.

Yet another weighty objection may be raised by the
conscientious seeker after truth who desires to find his way to
facts and has no experience of his own in the supersensual world.

It may be urged that it is inadmissible to accept the existence of
facts, of any kind, simply because by means of them something
may be explained which is otherwise unintelligible. Such an
objection is meaningless to one who knows the corresponding
facts from supersensual experience, and in later chapters of this
book the path will be indicated that may be followed in order to
gain knowledge not only of the spiritual facts herein described,
but also of the law of spiritual causation as a personal experience.

Any one, however, who is not willing to enter upon this path
may find the above objection important; and what can be said
against it is also of value to one who is resolved to follow the
path indicated. For if it is received in the right spirit, it is the
very best preliminary step that can be taken on this path. It
is perfectly true that one ought not to accept a statement about
which one is otherwise ignorant merely because, by means of
it, something otherwise inexplicable can be explained, but in the
case of alleged spiritual facts the matter is different. If such
statements are accepted, the intellectual consequence is not only

[096]

that, by their means, life becomes intelligible, but that through
admitting these hypotheses into the thought-world, experiences
of quite a new kind are induced.

Take the following case. Something befalls a man which

86

An Outline of Occult Science
causes him extremely painful sensations.

He may meet the
situation in one of two ways. He may submit to the occurrence
as something affecting him painfully, and abandon himself to
the painful sensation, even becoming absorbed in his grief; or
he may meet it in another way. He may say: “It is really I
myself who in a former life set the force in motion which has
brought me into contact with this thing. I have really brought
it on myself.” He may then awaken in himself all the feelings
which such a thought brings in its train. It goes without saying
that the thought must be entertained with perfect seriousness, and
with the utmost possible force, if it is to have such consequences
in the life of sensation and feeling. One who succeeds in this
will meet with an experience which may be best illustrated by
a comparison. Let us suppose that two men have each a stick
of sealing wax in his hand. One begins reflecting upon its inner
nature. These reflections may perhaps be very wise, but if the

“inner nature” did not show itself in any way, some one might
easily retort: “That is all imagination.” The other, however, rubs
the sealing wax with a woolen rag, and then shows that it attracts

[097]

small particles. There is an important difference between the
thoughts which have passed through the first man's head and his
reflections, and those of the second. The thoughts of the first
man had no actual result; those of the second have called out a
hidden force, consequently something real.

The same thing happens with regard to the thoughts of a man
in whose mind the idea arises that in a former life he has set going
within himself the force which causes him to experience a certain
event. The mere conception of this stirs up strength within him
which enables him to face the event in quite a different manner
from that in which he would have met it without entertaining
such an idea. It dawns upon him that an event which he would
otherwise have looked upon as an accident was really a necessity
and he will immediately see that he had the right thought, because
this thought had the power to reveal the facts to him. If such

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

87
inner processes are repeated they will grow into a source of inner
power and thus prove their truth by their fruitfulness; and little
by little, this truth is found to be powerfully effective. Such
processes have a salutary effect on body, soul, and spirit,—nay,
they help life forward in every way. Man becomes aware that
in this manner he takes the right position with regard to life's
continuity; whereas, by taking into consideration only the one
life between birth and death, he is the victim of a delusion.

Such an entirely inner proof of spiritual causation can of
course be acquired only by each one for himself, in his own inner
life. But it is in every one's power to have it. Those who have

[098]

not acquired it certainly cannot judge of its convincing force;
but those who have acquired it can scarcely entertain any further
doubt in the matter. And there is no reason for surprise that this
should be so. It is only natural that what is so wholly bound up
with the constitution of man's inmost being and personality can
be adequately proven only by inner experience. On the other
hand, it cannot be alleged that because such a matter corresponds
to inner experience it must therefore be settled by every one for
himself, and that it is no subject for occult science. It is certain
that every one must undergo the experience for himself, just as
each must see for himself the proof of a mathematical problem.

But the path by which such an experience may be gained is open
to all, just as the method of proving a mathematical problem is
available to every one.

It ought not to be denied—apart from clairvoyant observation
of course—that by means of the force producing power of the
corresponding thoughts, the just cited proof is the only one
which stands firm before all unprejudiced logic.

All other
considerations are no doubt very important, but in all of them
there will be something on which an opponent might seize as a
point of attack. Surely one who has acquired a fairly impartial
way of looking at things will find something in the possibility and
actual fact of man's education, which has the power of logical

88

An Outline of Occult Science
proof that a spiritual being is struggling for existence within

[099]

the sheath of the body. He will compare animals with man
and say to himself that at the birth of the former there appears
certain definite qualities and capacities as something, decisive in
itself, which plainly shows how it has been designed by heredity
and how it will unfold itself in the outer world. We see how
a young chicken carries out life's functions in the appointed
way from its birth; but by means of education something comes
into touch with man's inner life which is independent of any
connection with his heredity, and he may be in a position to
assimilate the effects of such external influences. The educator
knows that such influences are met by forces coming from man's
inner nature. If this is not the case, all instruction and training
are meaningless. The unprejudiced educator finds the boundary
line between inherited talents and those inner forces of the man
himself which shine through them and originate in former lives,
to be very sharply marked. It is true, we cannot bring forward
such weighty proofs for things of this kind as we can for certain
physical facts, by means of scales; but then these are just the
intimate things of life, and one who has the power to appreciate
such impalpable proofs will find them convincing—even more
convincing than palpable reality.

That animals may be trained, and thus, to a certain extent,
acquire qualities and capacities by education, is no objection
to one who is able to see reality, for apart from the fact that
transitional stages are met with all over the world, the results of

[100]

training an animal by no means fade away with its individual
existence, as is the case with a man. What is more, the fact
has been emphasized that faculties acquired by domestic animals
through intercourse with man are transmitted, that is to say,
continue in the species, not in the individual. Darwin describes
how dogs fetch and carry without having been taught to do so, or
without having seen it done. Who would make such an assertion
with regard to human education?

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

89

Now there are thinkers whose observations have led them
beyond the opinion that a man is built by purely inherited forces
from without. They rise to the thought that a spiritual being,
an individuality, exists before life in the body, and fashions
it; but many of them find it impossible to conceive that there
are repeated earthly lives, and that the fruits of former lives
are moulding forces during the intermediate state between two
lives. Let us take one instance from among the ranks of these
thinkers. Immanuel Hermann Fichte, son of the great Fichte, in
his Anthropology (p. 528) gives the observations which led him to the following conclusion:

“Parents are not generators in the full sense of the word.

They supply organic substance, and not alone this, but also that
intermediate element of mental and sense nature which appears in
temperament, colouring of character, definite tendencies, and so
on, the common source of which proves to be ‘imagination’ in the
wider sense indicated by us. In all these elements of personality,
the mingling and particular combination of the souls of the
parents is unmistakable; it is therefore a perfectly well-grounded

[101]

assertion that this combination is simply the result of procreation,
even if we regard procreation, as we must do, as really a soul-
process. But the real ultimate centre of the personality is just
what is lacking here; for a deeper and more searching observation
reveals the fact that even those peculiarities of disposition are but
a covering and an instrument for the containing of the individual's
really spiritual and ideal capabilities, and are qualified to aid these in their development or to hinder them, but in no wise able to
originate them.” It is further stated in the same work (p. 532):

“Every individual pre-exists as regards the fundamental form
of his spirit, for no individual, from a spiritual point of view,
resembles another, just as no species of animal resembles another
species.”

These thoughts reach only far enough to allow a spiritual being
to come into the human body; but as the forces shaping such

90

An Outline of Occult Science
a being are not derived from causes existing in former lives, it
would be necessary that, each time a fresh personality appears,
a spiritual being should come forth from a Divine First Cause.

With this hypothesis there would be no possibility of explaining
the relationship which certainly exists between the potentialities
struggling out of man's innermost being, and that which is forcing
its way thither from his external earthly environment during life.

Man's innermost being, issuing in the case of each single person

[102]

from a Divine First Cause, would find what confronts him in
earthly life quite strange and foreign. Only then would this not
be the case—as, in fact, it is not—if there had already been a
connection between the inner man and the outer world, and if the
inner man were not living in it for the first time.

The unprejudiced educator may undoubtedly observe clearly
that he impresses the consciousness of his pupil with something
taken from life's experiences which in itself is foreign to his
merely inherited qualities, but which, however, appears to him as
if the work out of which these experiences arise, had been done
by him in the past. Only repeated lives on earth, in conjunction
with the facts set forth by occult science as taking place in
spiritual regions between two earthly lives,—only this view can
afford a satisfactory explanation of present human life looked at
from every side. I say expressly “present” human life, for occult
investigation shows that the cycle of earthly life certainly had
a beginning, and at that time man's spiritual being, which later
entered a bodily frame, existed under different conditions. In the
following chapter we shall go back to this primeval condition of
human existence. When it has been shown, from the reports of
occult science how human beings received their present form in
connection with the evolution of the earth, it will also be possible
to indicate more precisely how the spiritual germ of man's being
descends from superphysical worlds into a bodily form, and how
the spiritual law of causation, or “human destiny,” is developed.

Chapter III. Sleep and Death

91

[103]

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the

World and Man

From the foregoing observations it will be seen that man's being
is built up of four principles: the physical body, the etheric body,
the astral body, and the vehicle of the ego. The ego works within
the three other principles, and transforms them. By means of this
transformation, are formed on a lower level, the sentient-soul,
the rational- or intellectual-soul, and the consciousness-soul: on
a higher level of human existence, are formed the Spirit-Self, the

Life-Spirit, and Spirit-Man. The relations existing between these
human principles and the whole universe are of a most varied
character and their evolution is related to that of the universe.

By studying this evolution an insight is obtained into the deeper
mysteries of man's being.

It is clear that human life is related in the most varied ways to
the environment or dwelling place in which it evolves. Physical
science, through the facts presented to it, has already been driven
to the opinion that the earth itself, man's dwelling place in the
broadest sense of the word, has undergone evolution. Science
points to former conditions of the earth when man, in his present

[104]

form, did not yet exist on our planet and it shows how man
has slowly and gradually evolved to his present condition from
primitive states of civilization. Physical science, therefore, comes
also to the conclusion that there is a connection between man's
evolution and that of the heavenly body on which he lives—the
earth.

Occult science traces this connection by means of a knowledge
which obtains its data from observation quickened by spiritual
organs of perception. It traces man backwards in his course of

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

93
development, and the fact becomes evident to occult science that
the real inner spiritual being of man has progressed through a
series of lives on this earth. Occult research arrives in this way
at an epoch far back in the remote past, when for the first time
that inner being of man made its entry into “external life” as we
understand it. It was in this first earthly incarnation that the ego
began to function in the three bodies—the astral body, the etheric
or vital body, and the physical body; and it then carried over the
results of that activity into its next life.

If in our investigation we proceed backwards, in the manner
indicated, as far as that epoch, we discover that the ego finds an
earth condition in which the three bodies, physical, etheric, and
astral, are already developed and in which they bear a certain
relation to each other. The ego is, for the first time, united with
the being composed of these three bodies; and henceforth takes
part in the further evolution of the three bodies. Hitherto, up to
the stage at which that ego came in touch with them, they had

[105]

evolved without a human ego.

Occult science must now go back still farther in its researches
if it is to answer the questions, “How did the three bodies reach
that stage of evolution at which they were able to receive an ego
within them?” and “How did that ego itself come into being and
acquire the capacity for working within these bodies?”

It is possible to answer these questions only when the gradual
development of the earth-planet itself is studied from the occult
point of view. By such investigation we arrive at a beginning of
the earth-planet. That method of examination which is based only
on the facts of the physical senses cannot arrive at conclusions
concerning the beginning of the earth. A certain point of view
which avails itself of such conclusions arrives at the result that
everything material on the earth was formed out of a primeval
essence, or vapour. It is not the purpose of this work to enter more
fully into such conceptions of our planet's origin; for in occult
science the important matter is not merely to inquire into the

94

An Outline of Occult Science
material processes of the earth's evolution, but first and foremost
to discover the spiritual causes lying behind what is material.

If we see before us a man raising his hand, we may consider
his action in two different ways: we may examine the mechanism
of the arm and the rest of the organism, in order to describe the

[106]

process as it takes place from the purely physical standpoint,
or we may direct the spiritual vision to what takes place in the
man's soul and there discover what constitutes the inner motive
for raising the hand. In this way an investigator, trained in
occult research, sees spiritual processes behind all the events of
the physical sense-world. In his eyes all transformations of the
material part of the earth-planet are manifestations of spiritual
forces lying behind what is material.

But if occult observation of this kind goes farther and farther
back in the life of the earth it comes to that point in evolution at
which material things first came into being. The material element
is evolved out of the spiritual. Up to this point the spiritual
element was the only one existing. By occult investigation the
spiritual element is perceived, and the observer can see how it
becomes partly condensed, as it were, into matter. We have before
us a process which is taking place—on a higher level—much
as though we were observing a lump of ice being formed by
artificial means in a vessel of water. Just as we see the ice being
condensed out of what was previously only water, so may we, by
means of occult observation, watch the condensation of what was
previously entirely spiritual, so to speak, into material things,
processes, and beings. In this way the physical earth-planet was
evolved out of a cosmic spiritual essence; and everything that is
combined materially with the earth-planet has been condensed
out of what was previously united with it spiritually. We must

[107]

not, however, think that everything spiritual was at any one time changed into material form; but, in the latter we have before us
merely the transformed portions of what was originally spiritual.

Thus, even during the period of material evolution, it is always

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

95

Spirit that is really the guiding and ruling principle.

It is obvious that the mode of thought which restricts itself to
the processes of physical sense—and to what reason is able to
infer from them—is incapable of expressing an opinion about the
spiritual element of which we are speaking. Let us assume that a
being might exist to whose senses ice would be perceptible, but
not the finer condition of water, from which ice is detached by
refrigeration. For such a being, water would be non-existent, and
could become visible only when parts of it had been transformed
into ice. In the same way, the spiritual element behind earthly
processes remains hidden from one who only admits the existence
of what is perceptible to his physical senses.

And if, from
the physical facts which he now perceives, he draws correct
conclusions about earlier conditions of the earth-planet, he can
penetrate only as far as that point in evolution at which the
previous spiritual element was partially condensed into material
substance. Such a method of observation no more discovers the
spirit previously existing, than it perceives the spirit which even
now rules unseen behind the world of matter.

Not until we come to the last chapters of this work can we
deal with those methods by which man acquires the faculty of

[108]

looking back, by means of occult perception, upon those earlier
conditions of the earth which are now under discussion. For
the present we shall merely intimate that the facts concerning
the primeval past have not passed beyond the reach of occult
research. If a being comes into corporeal existence his material
part perishes after physical death. But the spiritual forces, which
from out their own depth gave existence to the body, do not

“disappear in this way.” They leave their traces, their exact
images behind them impressed upon the spiritual ground-work
of the world. Any one who is able to raise his perceptive faculty
through the visible to the invisible world, attains at length a level
on which he may see before him what may be compared to a
vast spiritual panorama, in which are recorded all the past events

96

An Outline of Occult Science
of the world's history. These imperishable traces of everything
immaterial are called in occult science the “Akashic Records.”

Here it must once more be repeated that investigations of
the supersensible realms of existence can be carried on only
with the aid of spiritual perception, and consequently can be
instituted in the sphere now under consideration, only by reading
the Akashic Records above-mentioned. Nevertheless, what was
said earlier in this book in a similar instance holds good here.

Supersensible facts are only to be investigated by supersensible
perceptions; but once investigated and communicated by occult

[109]

science, they may be grasped by the ordinary powers of thought,
if these are honestly exercised without bias. In the following
pages the various conditions of the earth's evolution, as given
by occult science, will be detailed. The transformation of our
planet will be traced down to the conditions of life in which
we now find it. Any one who surveys what comes before him
at the present time merely through the evidence of his senses,
and then lends an ear to what occult science has to say on the
subject, namely:—how that which now lies before him has been
evolved from a far distant past,—will be able, if his thought is
genuinely unbiased, to say to himself: “In the first place, what
occult science reports is quite logical; in the second place, I
can, if I assume the reports of occult investigation to be correct,
understand how things have become as they now appear.” By

“logical” is not meant, in this connection, of course, that errors
might not be made from a logical standpoint in some description
given by occult research. We are here speaking of “logic” as
it is understood in the ordinary life of the physical world. Just
as a logical demonstration is accepted there as it is in physical
research, even though a single investigator, in a certain domain
of facts, may make illogical statements, so is it also with regard
to occult science. It may even happen that an investigator who
possesses the power of vision in supersensible spheres may make
mistakes in a logical presentment of them, and may be corrected

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

97
by another who has no supersensible perception, but has, none
the less, a capacity for sound thinking. In reality, nothing of

[110]

any weight can be said against the logical deductions of occult
science. And it ought to be unnecessary to insist that nothing
can be adduced, on purely logical grounds, against the facts
themselves. In the domain of the physical world it can never be
proved by logic, but only by ocular demonstration, whether or
no there is such an animal as a whale; similarly, supersensible
facts can be known only through occult perception.

But it cannot be sufficiently emphasized that an obligation
is laid upon the explorer of supersensible regions, before he
determines to approach the invisible worlds with his own power
of perception, to acquire first of all the aforementioned logical
faculty, and this is none the less essential if he recognizes that
the world, manifest to his senses, will become comprehensible
if he accepts the communications of occult science as correct.

All experiences in the supersensible world are nothing but an
uncertain—nay, a dangerous—groping in the dark if we despise
the method of preparation which has been described. Therefore
in this book the facts concerning the supersensible processes of
the earth's evolution will first be given, before the path leading
to the attainment of supersensible knowledge is dealt with.

We have also, it is true, to take into account that the man
who, by sheer thinking, comes to accept what supersensible
research has to impart, is by no means in the same position as
one who listens to the account of a physical occurrence which he
is unable to see. For thinking is in itself a supersensible activity.

Materialistic thinking cannot of itself lead to supersensible

[111]

phenomena. But if thought is directed to supersensible matters
through the accounts given of them by occult science, it grows
by its own activity into the supersensible world. What is more,
one of the very best ways of acquiring supersensible perception
is to grow into the higher worlds by meditation upon what has
been communicated by occult science. For such a mode of

98

An Outline of Occult Science
entry insures great clearness of perception. For this reason such
thinking is regarded by a certain school of occult investigation
as a most valuable first step to take in occult training.

It will be readily understood that it is impossible to mention
in this book all the details of the earth's evolution, as it has been
spiritually perceived by occultists, in order to illustrate the way
in which the supersensible world is reflected in the manifested.

Nor was this what was intended when it was said that the unseen
may everywhere be demonstrated by its manifest effects. It was
meant rather that everything that man encounters may, step by
step, become clear and comprehensible if he brings manifested
events under the illumination of occult science. Only in a few
characteristic instances will reference be made in the following
pages to confirmations of the invisible by the manifest, in order
to show how this may be done everywhere in the course of
practical life, if desired.

[112]

Pursuing the evolution of the earth backward according to the
above method of scientific spiritual investigations we arrive at
a spiritual condition of our planet. But if we go farther back
along this path of research we find that everything spiritual had
previously passed through a kind of physical incarnation. Thus
we come upon a bygone physical planetary condition, which
was afterwards spiritualized, and subsequently transformed into
our earth by repeated materialization. Our earth is therefore
presented to us as the reincarnation of a very ancient planet. But
occult science can go back still farther; and it then finds the whole
process twice repeated. Thus, our earth has passed through three
previous planetary conditions separated by intermediate spiritual
conditions of rest. The physical substance, however, proves to
be finer and finer the farther back we follow the incarnations.

Now man, in the form in which he is at present evolving, makes
his first appearance upon the fourth of the planetary incarnations
which have been described, the Earth proper. And the essential

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

99
characteristic of his form is that it is composed of four principles,
the physical, etheric, and astral bodies and the ego. But that
form could not have appeared if it had not been prepared by the
preceding events of evolution. The method of preparation was
that, in the earlier planetary incarnation, beings were evolved
who already had three of the present four principles of man: the
physical, etheric, and astral bodies. These beings who, in a certain
sense, may be called man's ancestors, had as yet no ego, but they

[113]

developed the three other principles and their mutual relationship
to such a point that they became sufficiently mature to receive an
ego. Thus man's ancestor attained to a certain degree of maturity
of his three principles during the earlier planetary incarnation.

This condition became spiritualized; and out of it a new planetary
condition was formed in which man's matured ancestors were
contained, as it were, in embryo. Because the whole planet had
passed through a process of spiritualization and had appeared
in a new form, it offered those embryos, with their physical,
etheric, and astral bodies, which were contained therein, not only
the opportunity of again evolving up to the level on which they
had previously stood, but the further possibility, after having
arrived at that level, of reaching out beyond themselves through
receiving the ego.

The evolution of the Earth divides itself, therefore, into two
parts.

During the first period the Earth itself appears as a
reincarnation of the previous planetary state. But that recurring
state is a higher one than that of the previous incarnation, in
consequence of the intervening period of spiritualization. And
the Earth contains within itself the germs of man's ancestors
belonging to the earlier planet. These were first developed up
to the level they had previously reached. The attainment of this
level marks the end of the first period. But now, owing to its own
higher stage of evolution, the Earth is able to carry the germs

[114]

still higher, that is, to qualify them for receiving the ego. The
second period of the Earth's evolution is that of the development

100

An Outline of Occult Science
of the ego in the physical, etheric, and astral bodies.

In the same way that man had been thus carried a stage farther
by the evolution of the Earth, so also had this been the case during
the earlier planetary incarnations. For man had in some measure
existed as early as the first of these. Light is therefore thrown on
the present constitution of man if his evolution is followed back
to the far-remote past of the first of the planetary incarnations
mentioned above.

In occult science the first of these is called Saturn; the second is termed Sun; the third, Moon; and the fourth is the Earth.

It must be distinctly understood that these occult terms are not
to be in any way associated with the names used to designate
the members of the present solar system.8 In occult science

[115]

Saturn, Sun, and Moon are merely names for bygone forms of
evolution through which the Earth has passed. In the course of
the following account it will be shown what relation these worlds
mercury is the dwelling place of beings who are beyond the evolution of the earth; but this is just because they have developed certain qualities in a higher way than is possible on the earth itself. The present venus is a prophetic anticipation of the future Venus condition of a similar kind. It is consequently justifiable to give to the conditions preceding and following the Earth the names of their corresponding representatives in the universe.

8 In different chapters of this book it has been shown how the world of humanity, and man himself, pass, in their progressive evolution, through conditions which have been named Saturn, Sun, Moon, Earth, Jupiter, Venus, and Vulcan. The relationship has also been indicated in which human evolution stands with regard to the celestial bodies which exist besides the earth and which are called saturn, jupiter, mars, and so on. These latter planets are also passing through their evolution in the natural way. At the present period they have reached such a stage that their physical portions are seen as those bodies which physical astronomy calls saturn, jupiter, mars, and so forth. Now when the saturn of the present day is observed by occultism it is seen to be, in a certain sense, a reincarnation of the old Saturn. It has come into existence because of the presence of certain beings, who before the separation of the sun from the earth were unable, like the others, to leave with the sun. The reason of this was that they had gained so many qualities which are suitable for a saturn existence, that their place could not be where the qualities of the sun

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

101
of remote antiquity bear to the celestial bodies composing the
present solar system.

The relationship of the four planetary incarnations previously
mentioned, can here be only briefly sketched; for the events, the
beings and their destiny on Saturn, Sun and Moon were in truth,
just as varied as they are on the Earth itself. Therefore only a
few characteristics of these conditions can be chosen to illustrate
just how these earth conditions have evolved out of earlier ones.

In this connection, one should bear in mind that the further back
we go the more dissimilar to the present ones do these conditions
become. And yet they can only be described by making use
of ideas borrowed from existing conditions of the earth. If,
for instance, light, heat, etc., are mentioned in connection with
these earlier conditions, it must not be overlooked that they
are not exactly the same as that which we now term light and
heat. And yet such terminology is accurate, for the clairvoyant
observer of earlier stages of evolution perceives something that
has developed into the light and heat of the present time. And

[116]

one who follows the descriptions thus given by occult science
will, from the inner relation of these things, easily be able to
form such perceptions as correspond to those events which have
taken place in a primeval past.

Of course there will be considerable difficulty in treating of
those planetary conditions which preceded the Moon incarnation.

For during the latter, conditions prevailed which bore, at least
to a degree, some resemblance still to earthly conditions. When
one attempts to describe these conditions one finds that such
resemblances to the present time form a certain basis on which
were specially unfolded. The present jupiter, however, arose in consequence of the presence of beings possessed of qualities which can only be matured on the future jupiter of the whole evolution. A dwelling place appeared for them on which they can already begin in anticipation of this later evolution.

In the same way mars is a planetary body on which dwell beings whose
lunar evolution was such that further progress on the earth could bring them nothing. Mars is a reincarnation of the old Moon at a higher stage. The present

102

An Outline of Occult Science
may be expressed in clear concepts the observations made
through clairvoyance.

It is quite different when the Saturn
and Sun evolutions are to be described.

In that case, what
lies before clairvoyant observation is utterly different from the
objects and beings now belonging to the sphere of human
life. And this difference makes it exceedingly difficult to bring
the corresponding facts of primeval times within the scope of
clairvoyant consciousness at all.

Since however the present constitution of man cannot be

[117]

understood without going back to the Saturn state, the description
therefore must be given. And surely no one will misunderstand
such a description who keeps in view the existence of the
difficulty, and the fact that owing to it much that is said must
be in the nature of a suggestion or hint of the facts in question,
rather than an exact description of them.

The physical body is the oldest of the present four principles
of man's being. It is also the one, which, in its way, has attained
the greatest perfection. Occult research shows that this part of
man already existed during the Saturn evolution. It will be shown
in the following account that the form taken by the physical body
on Saturn was, of course, something quite different from the
present physical body of man. The earthly physical human body,
from its nature, can only exist by being in connection with the
etheric and astral bodies and the ego, in the manner described
earlier in this book. Such a condition did not as yet exist on

Saturn. The physical body was then passing through the first
stage of its evolution, without having a human etheric body, an
astral body, or an ego incorporated in it.

During the Saturn evolution it was growing ripe for the
reception of an etheric body.

For that purpose Saturn had
eventually to pass into a spiritual condition, and then to be
reincarnated as the Sun. During the Sun incarnation the physical
body developed again to the stage it had reached on Saturn as

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

103
from a germ brought over and only then could it be
inter-

[118]

penetrated by an etheric body. By means of this incorporation of
an etheric body, a change took place in the nature of the physical
body; it was raised to a second stage of perfection. A similar
thing took place during the Moon evolution. Man's ancestor,
as he had developed himself when passing from the Sun to the

Moon, incorporated in himself the astral body. As a result, the
physical body was changed for the second time, and thus raised to
its third stage of perfection; at the same time the etheric body was
likewise changed, and passed to its second stage of perfection.

On the earth the ego was incorporated in man's ancestor, now
composed of the physical, etheric, and astral bodies. Thereby the
physical body reached its fourth stage of perfection, the etheric
body its third, and the astral body its second stage; the ego is
only now at the first stage of its existence.

If we give ourselves up to an unprejudiced examination of
man's nature, there will be no difficulty in acquiring a correct idea
of these different stages of perfection of his separate principles.

For this purpose we have merely to compare the physical with
the astral body. It is true, the astral body, as a psychic principle,
stands on a higher level of evolution than the physical body.

And in future ages, when the former has been perfected, it will
be of very much more consequence to man's complete being
than the present physical body. Yet, in its own way, the latter
has reached a certain high degree of perfection. Consider the
marvelous wisdom with
which the structure of the heart is

[119]

planned, the amazing structure of the brain—nay, even of part
of a single bone, such as the upper end of the thigh bone. In the
end of this bone we find a net-work or scaffolding, wonderfully
constructed and composed of delicate spicules and lamellæ. The
whole is so arranged that with the least expenditure of material
the most effective action on the joint-surfaces is obtained—hence
the most efficient distribution of friction and a proper freedom
of movement. Thus wise arrangements are found in the parts of

104

An Outline of Occult Science
the physical body. And if we go on to observe the harmonious
co-operation of the part with the whole, we shall find that it is
certainly true that this principle of man's being is perfect and
it does not affect the question that in certain parts something
apparently useless appears, or that disturbances of structure or
functions may take place.

It will even be found that such
disturbances are in a way only the necessary shadows of the
wisdom-filled light which is poured out over the whole physical
organism.

Now compare with this the astral body as the medium or
vehicle of pleasure and pain, desires and passions.

What
uncertainty rules in it with regard to pleasure and pain; how
the desires and passions, of which it is the scene, run counter to
the higher goal of man; how senseless they often are. The astral
body is only now on its way to attain the harmony and inner poise
already possessed by the physical body. Similarly it might be

[120]

shown that the etheric body is certainly more perfect in its own
way than the astral but less perfect than the physical body. And
it will equally result from a corresponding study of the ego that
this, the real kernel of man's being, is now only at the beginning
of its evolution. For how much has already been accomplished
of its mission, that of transforming the other principles of man's
being in order that they may become a revelation of the ego's
own nature?

The result of an outer examination of this kind is intensified for
the occult student by something else. It might be pointed out that
the physical body is attacked by diseases. Now occult science is
in a position to show that a large proportion of all diseases owe
their origin to the fact that the perverse actions and mistakes of
the astral body are transmitted to the etheric body, and indirectly
through the etheric, destroy the perfect harmony of the physical
body. The deeper connection, which can here be only hinted at,
and the true cause of many of the conditions of disease, elude that
kind of scientific observation which confines itself solely to the

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

105
facts obtained by means of the physical senses. The connection in
most cases comes about in such a way that an injury to the astral
body does not cause manifestations of disease in the physical
body in the same incarnation in which the injury takes place, but
in a later one. Hence the laws now under consideration have a
meaning only for one who is able to admit that human earth-life
is repeated again and again. But even if deeper knowledge of
this kind is rejected, ordinary observation of life makes it plain

[121]

that human beings indulge in far too many pleasures and desires
which undermine the harmony of the physical body. And the
seat of pleasure, desire, passion, is not in the physical but in the
astral body. The latter is still so imperfect, in many respects, that
it is able to destroy the harmony of the physical body.

It should also be mentioned here that such explanations as
these are by no means intended as proofs of the assertions of
occult science about the evolution of the four principles of man's
being. The proofs are drawn from spiritual research, which
shows that the physical body has behind it a transformation,
enacted four times, into higher degrees of perfection, and that
man's other principles have been perfected to a lesser degree,
as has been described. It is desired merely to indicate here that
these communications made by spiritual research relate to facts
which are visible in their effects even to ordinary observation, in
the degrees of perfection reached by the physical body, etheric
body, and so forth.

If we wish to draw an approximately true picture of the
conditions prevailing during the Saturn evolution, we must take
into account the fact that while it lasted, there were virtually,
as yet, none of the things and creatures existing which now
belong to the earth and are included in the mineral, vegetable,
and animal kingdoms. The beings of these three kingdoms

[122]

were formed during later periods of evolution. Of all the earthly
beings physically perceptible today, man alone existed at that

106

An Outline of Occult Science
time and of him only the physical body existed as described. But
there are at present belonging to the earth not only the denizens
of the mineral, vegetable, animal and human kingdoms, but
other beings as well, not manifesting in a physical embodiment.

Such entities were also present during the Saturn evolution, and
their activity on the Saturn scene of action brought about the
subsequent evolution of man.

If the organs of spiritual perception are directed, not to the
beginning and end, but to the middle period of evolution of
this Saturn incarnation, we find there a condition which consists
principally of heat. Nothing is to be found composed of gaseous,
fluid, or even solid constituents. All these states appear only in
later incarnations. Let us assume that a human being, with the
present organs of sense, were to approach the Saturn condition as
a spectator. None of the sense-impressions possible to him would
confront him there except the feeling of warmth, or heat. Suppose
such a being approached this Saturn; he would only sense, upon
entering the space occupied by it, that it was in a different degree
of heat from the rest of surrounding space. But he would not find
that portion of space by any means equally warm throughout, for
warmer and colder parts would alternate in the most complicated
manner. Radiating heat would be felt along certain lines. And

[123]

not only straight lines, but regular figures would be formed by
the variation in heat. Something like a cosmic being, organically
constructed in itself would be discerned, appearing in changing
conditions, and consisting only of heat.

It is difficult for a man of the present day to form an idea
of anything consisting only of heat, for he is not accustomed
to think of heat as something self-existent, but as a perceptible
quality of warm or cold gaseous, liquid, or solid bodies. To one
who has adopted the physical conceptions of our time it will seem
particularly absurd to speak of heat in the foregoing manner. He
will, perhaps, say: “There are solid, liquid, and gaseous bodies;
but heat only denotes a condition assumed by one of these three

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

107
bodily forms. If the smallest particles of gas are in motion, the
movement will be felt by heat. Where there is no gas, there can
be no movement, consequently no heat.”

To an occult investigator the fact appears differently. To him
heat is something of which he speaks in the same sense as he
speaks of gases, of liquids, or of solid bodies. To him it is
simply a still finer substance than gas. And gas to him is nothing
but condensed heat, in the same sense that liquid is condensed
vapour, or a solid body condensed liquid. Thus the occultist
speaks of heat bodies just as he does of bodies formed of gas and
vapour.

If we are to follow the spiritual investigator into this region,
it is however necessary to admit that there is such a thing as
psychic perception. In the world, as it presents itself to the
physical senses, heat appears entirely as a condition of solid,

[124]

liquid, or gaseous bodies; but that condition is merely the outward
appearance of heat, or the effect of it. Physicists speak only of this effect of heat, not of its inner nature. Just let us try then to leave entirely out of consideration any effect of heat received through
external bodies, and to realize merely the inner experience which
comes from saying the words: “I feel warm,” “I feel cold.” That
inner experience is the only thing capable of giving an idea of
what Saturn was during its period of evolution described above.

It would have been possible to pass right through the portion
of space it occupied; no gas would have been there to exercise
pressure, no solid or liquid body from which light-impressions
could have come; but at every point of space occupied, one would
have felt inwardly, without any external impression: “Here there
is such and such a degree of heat.”

In a cosmic body of this character there are no conditions for
the animal, vegetable, and mineral organisms of to-day.9 The

9 Therefore it is perhaps scarcely necessary to remark that what has been described above could never actually happen. A contemporary man, as he is, could not have approached ancient Saturn as a spectator. The account was

108

An Outline of Occult Science
beings whose sphere of action was this Saturn, were at quite a
different stage of evolution from that of the present inhabitants
of the earth who are perceptible to the senses. In the first place
there were beings there who had no physical body like that

[125]

of contemporary man. We must also guard against thinking
of man's present physical embodiment, when mention is made
of a “physical body” in this connection. We should instead
carefully distinguish between the physical and the mineral body.

A physical body is one governed by the physical laws which
are now observable in the mineral kingdom. Now man's present
physical body is not only ruled by those physical laws, but is also
permeated with mineral matter. There can be no question as yet
on Saturn of a physical-mineral body of this kind. There is only a
physical bodily form, governed by physical laws; but these laws
are manifested only through the agency of heat.

Therefore the physical body is a fine, subtle, ethereal heat
body; and the whole of Saturn consists of such heat bodies. They
are the beginnings of the present physical-mineral human body.

The latter has been formed out of the former, because there have
become incorporated with the original body the more recently
formed gaseous, liquid, and solid substances.

Among the beings of which we are now speaking, who, besides
man, were inhabitants of Saturn, there were, for instance, some
which did not need a physical body at all. The lowest principle
of their nature was an etheric or vital body. On the other hand,
they had one principle higher than the human principles. Man's
highest principle is the Spirit-Man (Atma); these beings have one
still higher. And between the etheric body and the Spirit-Man

[126]

they have all the principles described in this treatise
which
are also found in man: the astral body, ego, Spirit-Self, and

Life-Spirit. Just as our earth is surrounded by an atmosphere,
so too was Saturn; only in this case the “atmosphere” was of a
spiritual nature. It really consisted of the beings just named and
given merely for the sake of illustration.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

109
some others. Now there was constant reciprocal action between
the heat bodies of Saturn and the beings we have described.

The latter projected the principles of their being down into the
physical heat bodies of Saturn. And while there was no life
in those heat bodies themselves, the life of their neighbours
was expressed in them. They might be compared to mirrors;
only there were reflected in them, not the images of the living
beings mentioned above, but their conditions of life. Therefore,
although nothing living could have been discovered in Saturn
itself, yet it had a vivifying effect on its environment in celestial
space, because it reflected back into space, like an echo, the life
which had been sent down into it. The whole of Saturn appeared
as a mirror of celestial life. The very high beings, whose life
was reflected by Saturn, are called in occult science “Lords of

Wisdom.”10 Their activity on Saturn was not just beginning in
the middle period of that evolution, which has been described; in
a certain way it had even then already ceased. Before they could
be in a position to rejoice in the reflection of their own life from

Saturn's heat bodies they had to make those bodies capable of
producing such a reflection. Therefore their activity began soon

[127]

after the beginning of the Saturn evolution. When this happened,
the body of Saturn was still chaotic material, which could not
have reflected anything.

And in contemplating this chaotic matter, one has transferred
himself, by spiritual observation, to the beginning of the Saturn
evolution. What is to be observed there does not as yet bear
anything of the later character of heat. If we wish to describe it,
we can only speak of a quality which may be compared with the
human will. From first to last it is nothing but “Will.” Therefore
it is an entirely spiritual condition that meets us here. If we ask
whence came this “Will,” we see it proceeding from the effluence
of exalted beings, who brought their evolution, by steps only to

10 In Christian spiritual science they bear the name of “Kyriotetes,” that is,

“Dominions.”

110

An Outline of Occult Science
be dimly conceived, up to such a height that when the Saturn
evolution began they were able to pour forth “Will” from their
own being. When this effluence had lasted a certain time, the
activity of the Lords of Wisdom described above was combined
with this Will. Through this means the will, which had hitherto
had no attributes, gradually received the quality of reflecting life
back into celestial space. In occult science the beings who found
their happiness in pouring forth will, at the beginning of the

Saturn evolution are called the “Lords of Will.”11

After a certain stage of the Saturn evolution had been reached,

[128]

through the co-operation of will and life, begins the influence of
other beings, who are also within Saturn's environment. These
are the “Lords of Motion.”12 They have no physical or etheric
body.

Their lowest principle is the astral body.

When the

Saturn bodies have acquired the capacity for reflecting life, the
qualities which have their seat in the astral bodies of the Lords
of Motion interpenetrate that reflected life. In consequence of
this, it appears as though expressions of feelings, emotions,
and similar psychic forces had been cast out of Saturn into
celestial space. The whole of Saturn appears like one animated
being, manifesting sympathies and antipathies. These psychic
manifestations, however, are by no means its own, but merely
the activity of the Lords of Motion reflected back.

This also having lasted for a certain period, there begins the
activity of yet other beings, that is, of the “Lords of Form.”13

Their lowest principle, too, is an astral body; but that body is at
a different stage of evolution from that of the Lords of Motion;
whereas the latter communicate only general manifestations of
feeling to the reflected life, the astral body of the Lords of Form
operates in such a way that the manifestations of feeling are flung
out into cosmic space as if they came from individual beings. It

11 In Christian esoteric science they are called “Thrones.”

12 The Christian “Dynamis,” or “Powers.”

13 The Christian “Exusiai,” or “Authorities.”

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

111
might be said that the Lords of Motion make the whole of Saturn
appear as an animated being. The Lords of Form separate that
life into individual living beings, so that Saturn now appears as

[129]

a conglomerate of such psychic beings.

Let us imagine, for the sake of illustration, a mulberry or
blackberry, made up, as it is, of small individual berries. In a
similar manner, to clairvoyant vision, Saturn, during the period of
evolution now being described, is made up of individual Saturn
beings, which of course have neither life nor soul of their own,
but reflect the life and soul of its denizens. Into this condition
of Saturn now come beings whose astral body is also their
lowest principle, but who have brought it to such a high stage
of development that it operates in the same way as the present
human ego. Through these beings, the ego in the environment
of Saturn looks down on that planet, and imparts its nature to

Saturn's individual living beings. Thus something is sent out
from Saturn into cosmic space, which has an effect similar to
that of human personality in the present conditions of life. The
beings causing that effect are designated “Sons of Personality.”14

They confer on the Saturn bodies the appearance of personality.

Personality itself, however, is not present on Saturn, but only, as
it were, its reflected image, the shell or husk of personality. The
real personality of these spirits is in the environment of Saturn.

As a result of these Sons of Personality letting their essence
stream back from the Saturn bodies in the manner described, that
fine substance is bestowed on those bodies which has previously
been described as heat. In the whole of Saturn there is no

[130]

subjectivity; but the Sons of Personality recognize the image of
their own subjectivity, when it streams out to them from Saturn
as heat.

When all this is taking place, the Sons of Personality are on
the same level on which man now stands. They are then passing

14 The Christian “Archai,” or “Principalities.”

112

An Outline of Occult Science
through their “human” period. In order to look at this fact with an
unprejudiced eye, we must imagine it possible for a being to be
human without being in the exact form in which man now exists.

The Sons of Personality are “human beings” on Saturn. They
have as their lowest principle not the physical body, but the astral
body with the ego. Hence they cannot express the experiences
of their astral body in such physical and etheric bodies as those
of contemporary man; they not only have an ego, however, but
are aware of the fact, because the heat of Saturn brings that ego streaming back into their consciousness. In fact, they are human
beings under different circumstances from those of earth.

As the Saturn evolution progressed, facts follow of a different
kind from those already related. Whereas everything hitherto was
a reflection of outer life and feeling, there now begins a kind of
inner life. In the Saturn world a life of light begins flickering here and there, and growing dim again. A quivering glimmer is seen
in some places, something like flashes of lightning in others. The

Saturn heat bodies begin to glimmer, to sparkle, and even to emit

[131]

rays. This stage of evolution having been reached, there again
arises the possibility for certain beings to develop their activity.

They are those known to occult science as “Sons of Fire.”15

Although these beings have an astral body, they are unable at his
particular stage of their existence to stir their own astral bodies;
they would not be capable of any feeling or emotion unless
they could act upon the Saturn heat bodies which have attained
the stage of evolution described. That action affords them the
possibility of recognizing their own existence from the effect
which they produce. They cannot say to themselves, “I am here”;
but rather, “My environment causes me to be here.” They have
perceptions, and what they perceive is the light-effects in Saturn
which have been described. These are, in a certain manner,
their ego. This gives them a peculiar kind of consciousness. It

15 The Christian “Archangeloi,” or “Archangels.”

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

113
is designated “picture-consciousness.” It may be represented as
having the nature of human dream-consciousness, except that
the degree of activity it enjoys must be imagined as being very
much greater than it is in human dreams, and also that it is not a
question of shadowy dream-pictures floating hither and thither,
but of pictures that have a real connection with the play of light
on Saturn.

During this reciprocal action between the Sons of Fire and the

Saturn heat bodies, the germs of the human sense organs begin
their evolution. The organs, by means of which contemporary
man becomes cognizant of the physical world, begin to shine in

[132]

their first delicate ethereal outlines. Human phantoms, displaying
as yet nothing but the primeval light pictures of the sense-organs,
become discernible within Saturn to the clairvoyant faculty of
perception. Thus these sense-organs are the result of the activity
of the Sons of Fire; but they are not the only spirits who shared
in their creation. Other beings come upon the scene of Saturn
at the same time as these Sons of Fire,—beings so far advanced
in their evolution that they are able to make use of the germs of
the human sense-organs for beholding the cosmic events taking
place in the Saturn life. They are the “Lords of Love.”16 If they
were not there, the Sons of Fire could not have the consciousness
described above.

They behold the events on Saturn with a
consciousness which makes it possible for them to convey these
events as pictures to the Sons of Fire. They themselves forego all
the advantages which might accrue to them from contemplating
events on Saturn; they renounce all joys and pleasures; they
give up all these in order that the Sons of Fire may come into
possession of them.

A new period of Saturn's existence succeeds these occurrences.

Something else is added to the play of light. If what here presents
itself to clairvoyant perception be reported, it may seem an

16 The Christian “Seraphim.”

114

An Outline of Occult Science
absurdity to many. Within Saturn, intermingled sensations of
taste seem to be surging. Sweet, bitter, sour, etc., are perceived

[133]

throughout the interior of Saturn;
while without, in cosmic
space, all this expresses itself as tone, as a kind of music.

In the course of these processes there are again certain beings
who find it possible to develop activity on Saturn. These are the

“Sons of Twilight, or Life.”17 They enter into reciprocal action
with the forces of taste surging up and down within Saturn. By
this means their etheric or vital body attains a state of such
activity that it may be called a kind of metabolism. They bring
life into the interior of Saturn. Hence processes of nutrition and
excretion take place. This inner life makes it possible for yet
other beings to come into the planet, the “Lords of Harmony.”18

They bestow a dim kind of consciousness on the Sons of Life,
which is even more vague and dim than the dream-consciousness
of contemporary man. It is of the kind that now comes to man
in dreamless sleep, and is, indeed, of such a low order that it
does not, so to speak, “enter into his consciousness.” Yet it is
there. It differs from waking consciousness in degree and also in
its nature. Plants, too, have this dreamless-sleep consciousness
at the present time. Even though it does not bring about any
perceptions of an external world, in the human sense of the word,
yet it regulates the life processes and brings them into harmony
with the processes of the outer world.

This adjustment cannot be perceived by the Sons of Life at the

[134]

stage of Saturn's evolution now being described; but the Lords
of Harmony perceive it, and therefore it is they who really do
the adjusting. All this life is enacted within the human phantoms
already described.

To clairvoyant vision they consequently
appear animated; yet their life is only a semblance of life. It is
the life of the “Sons of Life,” who, so to speak, make use of the
human phantoms in order to manifest themselves.

17 The Christian “Angeloi,” or “Angels.”

18 The Christian “Cherubim.”

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

115

Let us now turn our attention to the human phantoms with
their semblance of life. During the Saturn period described,
their form is constantly changing. Sometimes they bear one
aspect, sometimes another. In the further course of evolution,
their forms become more definite, and occasionally permanent.

This is due to their becoming interpenetrated by the action of the

Spirits described at the beginning of the Saturn evolution,—the

Lords of Will (the Thrones). The consequence is that the human
phantom itself is endowed with the simplest, dullest form of
consciousness. This must be thought of as still duller than the
consciousness of dreamless sleep. Under present conditions,
minerals have that consciousness. It brings the inner being into
harmony with the outer physical world. On Saturn it is the Lords
of Will who regulate that harmony. And thus man appears as a
copy of the Saturn life itself. That life which is on a large scale on Saturn, is at this stage on a small scale in man. Thus the first germ
is prepared for that which is still only a germ in contemporary
man the “Spirit-Man” (Atma). This dull human will (within

Saturn) is manifested to clairvoyant faculty by effects which

[135]

may be compared with odours. Outside in celestial space, there
is a manifestation like that of a personality, which however is
not directed by an inner ego but is regulated from without, like a
machine. Those who regulate it are the Lords of Will.

It will become evident, from a survey of the foregoing,
that starting from the previously described middle period of
the Saturn evolution, the following steps of that evolution can
be characterized by comparing their effects with the sense-
perceptions of the present time. It might be said that the Saturn
evolution manifests as heat; then a play of light is added; then an
appearance of taste and sound; finally something emerges which
manifests within the interior of Saturn as sensations of smell, and
without, as a human ego acting mechanically.

What have the Saturn revelations to say about what preceded
the heat condition?

Now this is something that cannot be

116

An Outline of Occult Science
compared with anything accessible to outer sense-perception. A
state of things precedes the heat condition, which contemporary
man experiences only in his inner being. When he gives himself
up to ideas which he forms in his own soul, without having any
inducement brought to bear on him by an external impression,
then he has something within himself which cannot be perceived
by any physical sense, but is only accessible to the perception
of the higher clairvoyant vision. Manifestations precede the
heat condition of Saturn, which can only be perceived by a

[136]

clairvoyant. Three such conditions may be mentioned: pure
psychic warmth, not outwardly perceptible; pure spiritual light,
which is outward darkness; and lastly, something of a spiritual
essence which is complete in itself, and needs no outer being in
order to become self-conscious. Pure, inner heat accompanies
the appearance of the Lords of Motion; pure, spiritual light, that
of the Lords of Wisdom; pure inner being is linked with the first
emanation of the Lords of Will.

Thus, with the appearance of heat on Saturn, our evolution
comes forth out of the inner life of pure spirituality into outwardly
manifested existence. It will be particularly difficult for present-
day consciousness to accept this, if it must be said in addition that
at the same time, with the advent of the Saturn heat condition,
what we call “Time” also makes its first appearance. That is to
say, the previous conditions have nothing to do with time. They
belong to that sphere which may be called, in occult science,

“duration.” Consequently, everything that is said in this book
about the conditions existing in the “Sphere of Duration” must
be understood in such a way that when expressions referring to
time conditions are used, they are only to be accepted for the sake
of comparison and explanation. That which, in a certain sense,
precedes “time,” can be expressed in human language only by
terms which imply the idea of time. Even if we are aware that
the first, second, and third Saturn conditions were not enacted

[137]

“one after the other,” in the present sense of the word, yet

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

117
we cannot do otherwise than describe them one after the other.

Indeed, in spite of their duration or coexistence in time, they are
so dependent on one another that this very dependence may be
compared with sequence, in time.

This indication of the first conditions of evolution on Saturn
also throws light on any further questions that may be asked as to
the origin of those conditions. From the purely intellectual point
of view, it is, of course, quite possible, when dealing with the
source of anything, to inquire after “the source of the source.”

But in the face of facts, this is not possible. A comparison,
however, will help us to realize this. If we find ruts on a road
we may ask, “To what are they due?” And the reply may be, “To
a carriage.” It may further be asked: “Whence did the carriage
come? Whither is it going?” An answer founded on fact is
again possible. We may then proceed to ask, “Who occupied the
carriage? What purpose had the person in using it? What was
he, or she, doing?” At last, however, we shall reach a point at
which inquiry by means of facts finds its natural limit; and on
inquiring further we get away from the original questions. We
only continue the inquiry mechanically, as it were.

In such matters as the one brought forward as a comparison, it
is easy to see where facts demand the end of the inquiry. It is not
so evident when we are face to face with great cosmic questions.

But as the result of really exact observation, it will nevertheless

[138]

be seen that all inquiry as to origins must come to an end at the

Saturn condition portrayed above. For we have reached a region
in which beings and events are no longer justified by that from
which they proceed, but by themselves.

As a result of the Saturn evolution it appears that the human
germ developed up to a certain point. It attained the low, dim
state of consciousness described above. We must not imagine
that its evolution does not begin until the last of the Saturn stages.

The Lords of Will carry on their work through all conditions.

Only the result is most striking to clairvoyant perception in the

118

An Outline of Occult Science
last period. There is nothing like a fixed boundary between the
activities of the several groups of beings. If it is said that the

Lords of Will work first, then the Lords of Wisdom, and so on,
it is not meant that they are working only at that time. They
are working all through the Saturn evolution; only their activity
can best be observed during the periods specified. The several
groups have, as it were, the leadership at those times.

Thus the whole Saturn evolution appears as a working out
of what streamed forth from the Lords of Will through the

Lords of Wisdom, Motion, Form, and the rest. Through this
process those spiritual beings themselves experience evolution.

For instance, after they have received their life reflected back
from Saturn, the Lords of Wisdom stand on a different level than

[139]

before. The result of that activity exalts the faculties of their
own being. The consequence is that, on the completion of such
activity, something similar to human sleep comes upon them.

To their periods of activity in connection with Saturn succeed
other periods, during which they live, as it were, in other worlds.

At these times their activity is withdrawn from Saturn. On this
account clairvoyant perception sees an ascent and a descent in
the Saturn evolution that has been described. The ascent lasts
until the formation of the heat condition. Then, with the play
of light, the ebb-tide sets in. When the human phantoms have
assumed form through the Lords of Will, the spiritual beings
have also gradually withdrawn themselves. The Saturn evolution
dies away; as a phase of evolution, it disappears. A kind of
resting pause occurs.

The human germ at the same time enters upon a state of
dissolution; not, however, a state in which it passes away, but
one like that of a plant seed, resting in the earth in order that it
may ripen into a new plant. Thus the human germ reposes, until a
new awakening, in the depth of the cosmos. And by the time the
moment of awakening has arrived, the spiritual beings described
above have acquired, under other conditions, the faculties by

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

119
means of which they can further advance the human germ. The

Lords of Wisdom have, in their etheric body, gained the faculty
not only of enjoying the reflection of life as they did on Saturn,
but of pouring life forth from themselves, and endowing other
beings with it. The Lords of Motion are now as far advanced as

[140]

were the Lords of Wisdom on Saturn. Then the lowest principle
of their being was the astral body; they now possess an etheric,
or vital body; and in a corresponding degree the other spiritual
beings have reached a further stage of evolution.

All these
spiritual beings are therefore able to work at the further evolution
of the human germ in a different way than on Saturn.

But the human germ was dissolved at the end of the Saturn
evolution. In order that the more highly evolved spirit-beings
might resume their work where they had left it off, the human
germ must once more briefly recapitulate the stages through
which it had passed on Saturn. This, in fact, is what appears to
clairvoyant faculties of perception. The human germ comes forth
out of its retirement and begins to develop by its own ability,
by means of the forces which had been implanted within it on

Saturn. It comes forth out of the darkness as a “being of Will,”

and assumes the appearance of life, of soul qualities, etc., up to
that mechanical manifestation of personality which it possessed
at the end of the Saturn evolution.

The second of the great periods of evolution that have been
mentioned, the “Sun period,” effects the raising of man's being
to a higher stage of consciousness than that which it had attained
on Saturn. Compared with man's present state of consciousness,
the Sun condition might certainly be termed “unconsciousness.”

[141]

For it is approximately that condition which contemporary man
experiences during absolutely dreamless sleep.

Or it might
be compared to the low degree of consciousness in which our
vegetable world now slumbers. For occult science there is no

120

An Outline of Occult Science
such thing as unconsciousness, but only different degrees of
consciousness. Everything in the world is conscious.

In the course of the Sun evolution, the human being attains a
higher degree of consciousness through the incorporation within
it of the etheric, or vital body. Before this can take place the

Saturn conditions must be recapitulated in the manner described
above. This recapitulation has quite a definite meaning. That is to
say, when the period of rest which was spoken of in the foregoing
statement has come to an end, that which was formerly Saturn
issues forth, out of “cosmic sleep,” as a new celestial body, the

Sun. But the conditions of evolution have meanwhile changed.

The spiritual beings, whose activity on behalf of Saturn we have
portrayed, have progressed onward into different conditions. Yet
at first the human germ appears on the newly formed Sun in the
form it possessed on Saturn. It has first of all so to transform the
various stages of evolution through which it has passed on Saturn
that they may suit the new conditions on the Sun. Consequently,
the sun epoch begins with a recapitulation of the occurrences on

Saturn, adjusted to the changed conditions of Sun life. Now when

[142]

the human being has advanced so far that the stage of evolution
it reached on Saturn has been adapted to the Sun conditions, the

Lords of Wisdom already mentioned, begin to let the etheric, or
vital body, pour into the physical body. The higher stage which
man reaches on the Sun may therefore be characterized in this
way: the physical body, already formed in the germ-state on

Saturn, is raised to a second stage of perfection by becoming the
vehicle of an etheric or vital body. This last-named etheric body
attains its first degree of perfection on its own account during
the Sun evolution. In order, however, that the second degree
of perfection for the physical and the first for the etheric body
may be reached, the intervention of still other spirit-beings is
necessary during the further course of the Sun life, in a similar
manner to that which has been described as taking place during
the Saturn stage.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

121

When the Lords of Wisdom begin to stream forth their etheric
body, the Sun, previously dark, begins to shine. At the same
time the first appearances of inner activity are seen in the human
germ; life has begun. What had to be described as a semblance
of life on Saturn now becomes actual life. The influx lasts for
a certain time, at the end of which an important change for the
human germ sets in—that is to say, it organizes itself into two
parts. Whereas up to this point the physical and etheric bodies
formed an intimately connected whole, the physical body now
begins to detach itself as a separate part. Yet even that separated
physical body is still pervaded by the etheric body. Therefore we
have now to do with a human being composed of two principles.

[143]

One portion is a physical body permeated by an etheric body; the
other is an etheric body and nothing else. This separation comes
to pass, however, during a period of rest in the Sun life. During
this pause the shining, which had begun to appear, dies away.

The separation takes place during a “cosmic night,” as it were.

Yet this interval of rest is much shorter than the one between the

Saturn and Sun evolutions mentioned above. At the expiration
of the rest period the Lords of Wisdom work for a while on
the two-fold being of man, just as they had previously done
on the undivided being. Then the Lords of Motion begin their
activity. They cause their own astral body to stream through the
human etheric body. By this means man acquires the capacity for
executing certain inner movements in the physical body. These
movements may be compared with those of sap in a plant of our
own time.

The Saturn body consisted exclusively of heat substance.

During the Sun evolution that heat substance is condensed into
a state which may be compared with that of our present-day gas
or steam. In occult science “air” is the name ordinarily used for
this condition. The first beginnings of such a state are seen after
the Lords of Motion have begun their activity. The following
spectacle is presented to clairvoyant consciousness. Within the

122

An Outline of Occult Science
heat substance there appears something like delicate formations

[144]

which are set in rythmic motion by the forces of the etheric
body. These formations represent the human physical body at
the stage of evolution now attained by it. They are permeated
through and through with heat, and are also wrapped, as it were,
in a heat envelope. From a physical point of view, man's nature
may now be said to be composed of heat structures with air
forms embedded in them—the latter in regular motion. Hence,
if we wish to retain the foregoing comparison with a plant of
the present day, we must remember that it is not a solid plant
organism which we have to consider, but an air or gas form,19
the movements of which may be compared with the circulation
of the sap in plants of to-day.

The evolution thus indicated continues. After a certain time
another interval of rest sets in; after this the Lords of Motion
go on working until their activity is supplemented by that of the

Lords of Form. The effect of the latter is that the gas structures,
which before were constantly changing, now assume lasting
form. This, too, happens because the Lords of Form cause their
forces to flow in and out of the human etheric body. When the

Lords of Motion alone were acting on the gaseous organisms,
these were in perpetual motion, not keeping their form for an
instant. Now, however, they temporarily assume distinguishable
shapes. Again, after a certain period, there occurs a time of rest;

[145]

and then once more the Lords of Form continue their activity.

But the conditions within the Sun evolution are now entirely
changed. For the point has been reached when the Sun evolution
has attained its zenith. This is the time at which the Lords of

Personality, who attained their human stage on Saturn, ascend to
a higher degree of perfection. They advance beyond the human
stage; they attain a form of consciousness which contemporary

19 The gas appears to clairvoyant consciousness through the effect of light which emanates from it. We might therefore speak also of light forms, which are apparent to spiritual vision.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

123
man does not yet possess in his normal course of development
on the earth. He will acquire it when the earth—the fourth of
the planetary stages of evolution—has reached its goal and has
entered upon the next planetary period. Then man will not only
perceive around him what his present physical senses enable him
to apprehend, but he will be able to see in images the inner
psychic conditions of the beings surrounding him. He will have a

(clairvoyant) picture-consciousness, although retaining complete
self-consciousness. There will be nothing dream-like or vague
in his clairvoyance, but he will perceive what is psychic, in
pictures certainly, but in such a way that these images will be the
expression of realities, as physical colours and sounds are now.

Man, at present, can attain to this degree of clairvoyance only
through occult training, which will be treated later in this book.

Now this clairvoyance is attained by the Sons of Personality,
as a gift of their normal evolution, midway in the Sun period; and
it is just on this account that they become capable of acting on the
newly formed etheric body of man during the Sun evolution, in

[146]

a way similar to that in which they acted on the physical body on

Saturn. Just as there the heat reflected their own personality back
to them, so do the gaseous organisms now reflect back to them,
in gleams of light, the images of their clairvoyant consciousness.

They clairvoyantly behold what is taking place on the Sun. And
this vision is by no means mere observation; it is as though
something of the force which mortals call love made itself felt
in the images which stream forth from the Sun. If a clairvoyant
looks more closely, he will find the cause of this phenomenon.

Exalted beings have blended their activity with the light that is
being radiated from the Sun. They are the Lords of Love (the

Christian Seraphim) already mentioned. Henceforth they act,
together with the Sons of Personality, on the human etheric, or
vital body. By means of that activity the etheric body advances
a step farther along its path of evolution. It acquires the capacity
not only of transforming the gaseous forms within it, but of so

124

An Outline of Occult Science
elaborating them that the first indications of a propagation of
living human beings appear. Emanations, so to speak, are driven
out (as though exuded) from the gaseous organisms that take on
shapes resembling their mother-forms.

In order to describe the further course of the Sun evolution,
reference must be made to a fact in the formation of worlds
which is of the greatest possible significance. It is this,—that
by no means every being attains the goal of its evolution in

[147]

the
course of one epoch; there are some that fall short of
that goal. Thus, during the Saturn evolution, not all of the

Sons of Personality actually reached the human stage for which,
as described above, they were destined; and just as little did
all the physical human bodies, developed on Saturn, attain the
degree of maturity which qualifies them to become vehicles of
an independent etheric body on the Sun. The consequence is
that beings and organisms are present on the Sun which are not
in harmony with their environment. These must now make up,
during the Sun evolution, for what they failed to attain on Saturn.

The following may, therefore, be clairvoyantly observed during
the Sun period. When the Lords of Wisdom begin their pouring
in of the etheric body, the Sun body is to some extent darkened.

Structures are mingled with it which, properly speaking, belong
to Saturn. They are heat organisms which are not able to condense
themselves into air in the proper manner. These are the human
beings left behind in the Saturn stage. They are not able to
become vehicles of a normally developed etheric body.

Now the heat substance of Saturn, which has thus been left
behind, splits into two parts on the Sun. One part is absorbed,
as it were, by human bodies, and henceforward forms a kind of
lower nature within man's being. Thus something, which really
corresponds to the Saturn stage, is incorporated in the bodily part
of man on the Sun. Now just as the Saturn body of man made

[148]

it possible for the Sons of Personality to raise themselves to the
human stage, the Saturn part of man performs the same office on

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

125
the Sun for the Sons of Fire. They raise themselves to the human
stage by letting their forces flow in and out of the Saturn part of
man, as did the Sons of Personality on Saturn.

This also happens during the middle period of the Sun
evolution.

The Saturn part of the human being is then so
far matured that with its help the Sons of Fire (Archangeloi)

are able to pass through their human stage. Another part of
the Saturnian heat substance becomes detached and attains an
independent existence alongside of and among the human beings
on the Sun. This forms a second kingdom by the side of the
human kingdom, a kingdom which develops on the Sun only
a perfectly independent physical body, like a heat body. In
consequence of this, the fully evolved Sons of Personality are not
able to direct their activity toward any independent etheric body
in the manner before described. But there were also certain Sons
of Personality left behind at the Saturn stage who fell short of
the human stage. A bond of attraction exists between them and
the second Sun kingdom which has become independent. They
must now act toward the backward kingdom on the Sun as their
advanced brethren did on Saturn in regard to human beings. The
latter had only their physical body perfected here. But there is no
possibility on the Sun for such a work on the part of the backward

Sons of Personality. They therefore separate themselves from
the Sun body, and form an independent celestial body outside

[149]

it. This body, accordingly, withdraws from the Sun, and from
it the backward Sons of Personality act on the beings of the
second Sun kingdom which have been described. In this way
two world-organisms have been formed out of the one which
was previously Saturn. The Sun has now in its environment
a second celestial body, one which exhibits a kind of re-birth
of Saturn, a new Saturn. From this Saturn the character of
personality is conferred on the second Sun kingdom. Therefore
within this kingdom we have to do with beings which have no
personality on the Sun itself. Yet they reflect back to the Sons

126

An Outline of Occult Science
of Personality on the new Saturn the special personality of those
spirits. Clairvoyant consciousness is able to observe among the
human beings on the Sun, heat forces which act upon the regular
course of Sun evolution, and in which the sway of the spirits
described as belonging to the new Saturn is to be seen.

We notice the following facts about man's being during the
middle period of the Sun evolution. It is divided into a physical
body and an etheric body.

Within these the activity of the
advanced Sons of Personality plays, conjointly with that of the

Lords of Love. Now part of the backward Saturn nature is
mingled with the physical body. In this plays the activity of
the Sons of Fire. We now see in everything which the Sons
of Fire effect on the backward Saturn nature, the forerunners
of the present human sense-organs. It has been shown how

[150]

these Sons of Fire were already at work on the elaboration
of the sense-germs in the heat substance on Saturn. The first
outline of the present human glands is to be recognized in what
is accomplished by the Sons of Personality conjointly with the

Lords of Love (Seraphim).

But the above described is not the whole of the activity of
the Sons of Personality dwelling on the new Saturn. They not
only extend their activity to the second Sun kingdom mentioned
above, but they also establish a kind of connection between
that kingdom and the human senses. The heat substances of this
kingdom flow in and out of the germs of the human sense-organs.

By this means the human being on the Sun acquires a kind of
perception of the lower kingdom situated outside him. That
perception is naturally a dim one, closely corresponding to the
dull Saturn-consciousness previously described. And it consists
essentially of varied heat effects.

Everything here described as taking place in the middle of the

Sun evolution continues for a certain definite period. Then a time
of rest again occurs. After that, things continue for a while in
the same manner up to a certain point of evolution, at which the

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

127
human etheric body is so far matured that a united action of the

Sons of Life (Angeloi) and the Lords of Harmony (Cherubim)

can set in. To clairvoyant consciousness, certain manifestations
now appear within man's being, which may be compared with
perceptions of taste, and which are made known externally as

[151]

sounds. A similar thing has already been stated about the Saturn
evolution. But here on the Sun the processes relating to human
beings are more from within and are full of more independent
life.

The Sons of Life thereby acquire that dim picture-
consciousness which the Sons of Fire had already attained on

Saturn. In this the Lords of Harmony are their helpers. They really
behold clairvoyantly what is now being enacted within the Sun
evolution; only they give up all the results of that contemplation,
and the enjoyment of those revelations of Wisdom that arise
from it, and allow them to stream, like splendid visions of
enchantment, into the dream-like consciousness of the Sons of

Life. The latter again work these pictures of their visions into the
etheric body of man, so that it attains higher and higher stages of
development.

Again an interval of rest ensues, again everything is awakened
from “cosmic sleep”; and after further lapse of time the human
being is sufficiently advanced to use its own forces. These forces
are the same that were poured forth into man's being by the

“Thrones” during the latter part of the Saturn period. This human
being now evolves an inner life, which, in its manifestation
to clairvoyant consciousness, may be compared with an inner
perception of smell. But outside, in the direction of celestial
space, man's being is manifested as a personality, though not
one directed by an inner ego. It appears more like a plant with
the character of a personality.

It has been stated that at the

[152]

end of the Saturn evolution personality is manifested somewhat
machine like. And just as then, the first germ was developed
of that which still remains a germ in contemporary man,—the

128

An Outline of Occult Science

Spirit-Man (Atma),—so at this point there is formed a similar
first germ of the Life-Spirit (Budhi).

When all this has continued for some time, an interval of
rest again occurs.

Following this, as in previous instances,
the activity of the human being is resumed for a while. Then
conditions commence, which mark a new intervention of the

Lords of Wisdom. By its means human nature becomes capable
of feeling the first traces of sympathy and antipathy for its
environment. In all this there is still no real sensation but only
a premonition of sensation. For the inner life-activity, which
might be characterized in its manifestation as perception of
smell, is revealed externally as a kind of primitive language. If
the human being is inwardly conscious of a useful smell—or
taste, or glitter,—it is manifested outwardly by a sound; and the
same thing happens, in a corresponding way, with an inwardly
uncongenial perception. Through all the events described, the real
meaning of the Sun evolution for the human being is indicated.

The human being has reached a higher stage of consciousness
than that of the Saturn period. It is the consciousness of sleep.

After a time, the point of evolution is also reached at which
the higher beings connected with the Sun stage must pass into

[153]

other spheres in order to work out that with which they have
endowed themselves by their work on the human being. A long
period of rest sets in, one similar to that between the Saturn and

Sun evolutions. Everything that has been perfected on the Sun
passes into a condition which may be compared with that of a
plant when its powers of growth are resting in the seed. But just
as those powers of growth appear again in a new plant, so does
everything that was living on the Sun come forth again, after the
period of rest, from the cosmic depths, to begin a new planetary
existence.

The meaning of such a term of rest, or “cosmic sleep,” will
readily be understood if we will only direct our spiritual vision to
one of the orders of beings already mentioned, for instance, to the

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

129

Lords of Wisdom. They were not far enough evolved on Saturn
to be able to ray forth an etheric body from themselves. They
were only prepared for this after they had gone through their
experiences on Saturn. During the rest (Pralaya) they transform
into actual capacity what has been previously only prepared
within them. Thus on the Sun they are evolved far enough to
pour forth life from themselves, and to endow the human being
with an etheric body of its own.

After the interval of rest, that which had previously been the

Sun comes forth again out of the “cosmic sleep.” That is, it again
becomes perceptible to the clairvoyant faculties which had been
able to observe it before, but had lost sight of it during the resting

[154]

period. There are now two points to be observed with regard to
the newly appearing planetary organism, which may, in occult
science, be denoted the “Moon” (and this must not be confused
with that portion of it which is now the earth's moon). In the
first place, that which had detached itself during the Sun period
as a “new Saturn” is once more within the new planetary body.

This Saturn has therefore been again united with the Sun during
the term of rest. Everything which was in the original Saturn
reappears at first as one world-organism. Secondly, the human
etheric bodies which had been formed on the Sun have been
absorbed, during the resting period, by that which constitutes the
spiritual sheath of the planet. At this point of time, therefore,
they do not make their appearance united with the corresponding
physical human bodies, but these latter at first appear separately.

They contain everything which had been gained for them on

Saturn and the Sun, but they are without the etheric, or vital
body. Indeed, they cannot incorporate that etheric body within
themselves immediately, for it has also been passing, during the
period of rest, through an evolution with which they are not yet
harmonized.

What occurs at the beginning of the Moon evolution, in

130

An Outline of Occult Science
order to bring about this adjustment, is, first of all, another
recapitulation of the Saturnian events. The physical part of man
passes once more through the stages of the Saturn evolution, but

[155]

under greatly altered circumstances. On Saturn there were only
the forces of a heat body at work within him; now there are
also those of the gas body that has been elaborated. These latter
forces do not, however, appear quite at the beginning of the Moon
evolution. Then everything appears as though man's being were
composed only of heat substance, and as though the gas forces
were lying dormant within that substance. Then comes a time
when the first indications of these forces make their appearance;
and lastly, in the latest period of the Saturn recapitulation, man's
being has the same appearance as during the animated period of
his Sun existence. Yet, all life still proves to be but a semblance
of life.

Next occurs a period of rest similar to the short periods of rest
of the Sun evolution. Then the pouring in of the etheric body, for
which the physical body has now become ripe, begins anew. As
in the case of the recapitulation of Saturn, this influx takes place
in three distinct periods. During the second of these, man's being
is so far adjusted to the new Moon conditions that the Lords of

Motion are able to bring into play the faculty they have acquired.

This faculty consists in pouring the astral body out of their own
being into man's being. They prepared themselves for this work
during the Sun evolution, and during the time of rest between the

Sun and Moon they transformed what had been prepared into the
faculty alluded to. This influx lasts for a while, then one of the

[156]

shorter intervals of rest sets in. After that the influx continues
until the Lords of Form begin their activity. In consequence of
this pouring of the astral body into the human being by the Lords
of Motion, man acquires his first psychic qualities. He begins
to develop sensations in connection with the processes which
take place within, through the possession of an etheric body,
and which during the Sun evolution were still of a plant-like

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

131
nature; these processes now give him sensations of pleasure and
displeasure. But it is nothing more than a constant inner ebb and
flow of such pleasure and displeasure, until the Lords of Form
intervene. Then these changing feelings are so transformed that
there appear in man's being what may be regarded as the first
signs of wish or desire. The human being strives after a repetition
of what has once caused pleasure, and tries to avoid what has
been felt as antipathetic. However, since the Lords of Form do
not give up their own nature to the human being, but merely
let their forces stream in and out, desire is wanting in depth of
feeling and independence. It is directed by the Lords of Form,
and has an instinctive character.

The human physical body on Saturn was a heat body; on the

Sun a condensation into the gaseous state, or into “air,” has taken
place. Now, as during the Moon evolution, the astral element is
rayed into the physical part, which at a definite moment attains
a further degree of condensation and arrives at a state which
may be compared with that of a liquid substance of today. In
accordance with the usage of occult science this state may be

[157]

called “water.” By water, is not meant only the water we now
have, but this term applies to every liquid form in existence. The
physical human body now gradually assumes a form composed
of three kinds of material structures. The densest is a “water
body”; through this flow air currents; and all of this again is
permeated by manifestations of warmth.

Now all the organisms do not attain full, adequate maturity
during the Sun stage. Therefore there are organisms to be found
on the Moon which are only at the Saturn stage, and others which
have only reached the Sun stage. In this way two other kingdoms
arise by the side of the normally evolved human kingdom. One
consists of beings which have stopped short at the Saturn stage,
and therefore have only a physical body, which even on the

Moon is not yet able to become the vehicle of an independent
etheric body. This is the lowest of the Moon kingdoms. A

132

An Outline of Occult Science
second consists of beings which have been left behind at the

Sun stage, and which therefore do not mature sufficiently on
the Moon to take on an independent astral body. These form
a kingdom between the one just mentioned and the regularly
developed human kingdom.

But there is still something else taking place: The substances
containing only heat forces and those containing only air forces,
permeate these human beings. Thus it happens that the latter have
within them on the Moon both a Saturnian and a solar nature. In

[158]

this way a kind of cleavage has taken place in human nature;
and by means of this cleavage, something very momentous is
called forth within the Moon evolution after the activity of the

Lords of Form has begun. The first evidences of a cleavage
in the cosmic body of the Moon becomes then apparent. One
part of its substances and beings separates from the other; two
heavenly bodies are formed out of one. One of these becomes the
abode of certain higher beings who were previously more closely
connected with the undivided celestial body; while the other is
occupied by human beings, the two lower kingdoms described
above, and certain higher beings who did not pass over to the
first celestial body.

The first heavenly body, with the higher beings, appears like
a reborn but refined Sun; the other is really the new formation,
the “old Moon.” The regenerated Sun, on going out, takes with
it only “heat” and “air” from the substances which have been
formed on the Moon; on what is left as the Moon there is the
liquid condition as well as the other two substances. As a result
of this separation the beings which have withdrawn with the
newborn Sun are not, in the first place, hampered in their further
evolution by the denser Moon beings. Thus they are able to
continue their own progress without hindrance. But thus they
attain just that much more power to act now upon the Moon
beings from their Sun. And they in turn also acquire thereby
new possibilities of evolution. Most important of all, the Lords

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

133
of Form are still in union with them.

These accentuate the

[159]

passions and the desire-nature, and this expresses itself gradually
also in a further condensation of the physical human body.

What was previously nothing but liquid in that body assumes a
densely viscous form; and the air-like and heat-like formations
are correspondingly condensed. Similar processes take place in
the two lower kingdoms.

The result of the separation of the Moon-body from the Sun-
body is that the former bears the same relation to the latter as the

Saturn-body once did to the whole cosmic evolution surrounding
it.

The Saturn-sphere was formed out of the body of the

“Lords of Will” (the Thrones). From out its substance emanated
back into cosmic space everything which the above-mentioned
spiritual beings in the environment of Saturn experienced. And
this radiation by degrees awakened independent life, by means
of the subsequent processes. All evolution is due to the fact
that independent beings differentiate themselves from their
environment, then this environment like a reflection stamps
itself upon those differentiated beings who then evolve further
independently. The Moon-body, having likewise separated from
the Sun-body, reflects at first the life of the latter. If nothing
further had then happened, the following cosmic process would
have taken place: There would have been a Sun-body in which
spiritual beings adapted to that body would have lived through
their experiences in the elements of heat and air.

[160]

Set over against this Sun-body would have been a Moon-body,
in which other beings of like nature with the Sun-beings would
have undergone their experiences in the conditions of heat, air,
and water. The progress from the Sun-incarnation to that of
the Moon would have consisted in the Sun-beings seeing their
own life, as in a reflection of the events on the Moon. They
would have thus been able to enjoy it, something which they
were still incapable of doing during the Sun incarnation. But
evolution did not remain at this stage.

Something occurred

134

An Outline of Occult Science
which was of the deepest significance for all future evolution.

Certain beings adapted to the Moon-body, take possession of the
element of will (the heritage of the Thrones) which was at their
disposal, and by its means develop a life of their own, which
takes shape independently of the Sun-life. Alongside of those

Moon experiences which are entirely under the influence of the

Sun, there arise independent Moon experiences, and, at the same
time, states of rebellion or mutiny against the Sun-beings. And
the various kingdoms which had arisen on the Sun and Moon,
first and foremost of which was the kingdom of man's ancestors,
are drawn into these conditions. In this way the Moon-body
contains within it, spiritually and materially, two kinds of life:

one that is in inner union with the Sun-life, and another which
has “fallen away” from it and goes its own way independently.

This division into a twofold life appears in all subsequent events

[161]

of the Moon incarnation.

What presents itself to clairvoyant consciousness in this period
of evolution may be realized from the following pictures. The
whole basic mass of the Moon is formed of a semi-animated
substance which at one time moves sluggishly, at another quickly.

This is not yet a mineral mass like the rocks and constituents of
the earth upon which present day humanity walks. We might
call it a kingdom of plant-minerals, only we have to imagine
that the main body of the Moon consists wholly of this plant-
mineral substance, as the earth today consists of rock, soil and
other substances. Just as now we have towering masses of rock,
so there were then harder portions embedded in the Moon's
bulk; these may be compared with hard wooden structures or
formations of horn; and as plants now arise out of mineral soil,
so the surface of the Moon was covered and penetrated by the
second kingdom, consisting of a kind of plant-animal. Their
substance was softer than the general mass of the Moon, and
more mobile. This kingdom extended over the other, like a
viscous sea.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

135

Man himself at that time may be called animal-man. He had
in his nature the component parts of the other two kingdoms;
but his being was thoroughly interpenetrated by an etheric and
an astral body, upon which the forces of higher beings worked,
issuing from the severed Sun. His form was thus brought to
greater perfection. While the Lords of Form were giving him
a form which adapted him to Moon life, the Sun-Spirits were
giving him a nature which lifted him beyond that life. He had

[162]

the power of ennobling his own nature with the faculties given
him by these Spirits,—in fact, of raising what was akin to the
lower kingdoms to a higher level.

Seen spiritually, the events now under consideration may be
described in the following way. Man's ancestor had been brought
to greater perfection by beings who had fallen away from the Sun
kingdom. This improvement extended especially to everything
that could be experienced in the element of water. Over that
element the Sun-beings, who were rulers in the elements of heat
and air, had less influence. The consequence of this was that in
the organism of man's ancestor two kinds of beings manifested
themselves. One part of the organism was wholly interpenetrated
by the influences of the Sun-beings.

In the other part, the
rebellious Moon-beings were operative. Owing to this, the latter
part was more independent than the former. In the former there
could only arise states of consciousness in which the Sun-beings
lived; in the latter there lived a kind of cosmic consciousness,
such as was typical on Saturn, only now upon a higher level.

Man's ancestor consequently felt himself to be an “image of the
universe,” whereas his “Sun-part” felt itself to be only an “image
of the Sun.” The two beings now came to a kind of conflict in
man's nature. A settlement of this conflict was brought about
by the influence of the Sun-beings, through which the material
organism which made the independent universal consciousness

[163]

possible, was rendered frail and perishable. From time to time
this part of the organism had to be thrown off. During and also

136

An Outline of Occult Science
some time after the separation, man's ancestor was a being wholly
dependent on the Sun influence. His consciousness became less
independent; he lived within it, entirely surrendered to Sun-
life. Then the independent portion of the Moon was once more
renewed. After some time this process was repeated. Thus man's
ancestor lived on the Moon in alternating conditions of clearer
and duller consciousness; and the alternation was accompanied
by a change of his being in a material respect. From time to
time he laid aside his Moon-body and resumed it later. Seen
physically, great variety appears in the kingdoms of the Moon
above mentioned. The mineral-plants, plant-animals and animal-
men are differentiated into groups. This will be understood when
it is borne in mind that as a result of certain organisms having
been left behind at each of the earlier stages of evolution, forms
possessing most varied qualities took physical shape. There are
formations still retaining the qualities of the early Saturn period,
others showing those of the middle period and again others of
the closing period of Saturn. A similar statement is true of all the
stages of the Sun evolution.

As organisms belonging to the evolving planet are left behind,
so is it also with certain beings connected with that evolution.

Through the progress of evolution up to the Moon period,

[164]

different grades of such beings have already arisen. There are
the Sons of Personality who not even on the Sun have attained
their human stage; but there are also others who then caught up
with evolving humanity. A number of the Sons of Fire, who
should have attained humanity on the Sun, fell behind. Now, just
as during the Sun evolution certain of the Sons of Personality
withdrew from the Sun and caused the reappearance of Saturn
as a separate body, so it also happens that in the course of the

Moon evolution the beings described above separate and form
individual celestial bodies. So far we have mentioned only the
separation into Sun and Moon; but for the reasons already given,
other world-organisms detached themselves from the Moon-

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

137
body, which made its appearance after the great interval between
the Sun and Moon.

After a certain time we have a system of cosmic bodies the
most advanced of which, as can easily be seen, must be called
the New Sun. And just such a bond of attraction as was described
above for the evolution as existing between the backward Saturn
kingdom and the Sons of Personality on the new Saturn, is
formed between each of these bodies and the corresponding

Moon-beings. It would take us much too far to follow up in detail
all the celestial bodies that come into existence. It must suffice
to have pointed out the reason why a succession of them arises
by degrees from the undivided world-organism which appears as

Saturn at the beginning of human evolution.

[165]

After the intervention of the Lords of Form, on the Moon,
evolution proceeds for a while in the manner described. At the
end of this time there is again a pause. While it lasts, the coarser
portions of the three Moon kingdoms are in a sort of resting
state, but the finer parts, in particular the human astral body,
extricate themselves from those coarser organisms. They reach
a condition in which the higher forces of exalted Sun-beings are
able to act upon them very powerfully. After the interval of rest
they again interpenetrate those parts of man's being which are
composed of the coarser substances. Because they received such
powerful forces during the pause—in a free state—they are able
to make those coarser substances ripe for the influence, after a
certain time, of the Sons of Personality and the Sons of Fire, who
have progressed normally.

In the meantime these Sons of Personality have raised
themselves to a level upon which they possess the “consciousness
of inspiration.” Here they are not only able—as was the case with
clairvoyant picture-consciousness—to observe the inner state of
other beings in images, but to apprehend the inner nature itself
of those beings, as though in a spiritual tone-language. But the

Sons of Fire have risen to that height of consciousness possessed

138

An Outline of Occult Science
on the Sun by the Sons of Personality. Thus both kinds of spirits
are able to influence the now more developed life of the human
being. The Sons of Personality act on the astral body, the Sons
of Fire on the etheric body of this human being. The astral body

[166]

thereby acquires the character of personality. It now not only
experiences pleasure and pain, but relates them to itself. It has
not arrived at a complete ego-consciousness, that says to itself, “I
am here”; but it feels itself upheld and protected by other beings
in its environment. When looking, as it were, up to these, it is
able to say, “This, my environment, keeps me alive.”

The Sons of Fire now work upon the etheric body. Under
their influence the movement of forces in that body becomes
more and more an inner function of life. What then results finds
physical expression in a circulation of fluids and in phenomena
of growth. The gaseous substances have become condensed
into liquid substances; we may speak of a kind of nutritive
process, in the sense that what is received from without becomes
transformed and elaborated within.

Perhaps if we think of
something intermediate between nutrition and respiration in the
present meaning of the terms, we may get an idea of what then
happened in this respect. The nutritive matter was drawn from
the animal-plant kingdom by the human being. We must think
of those animal-plants as floating or swimming—or even lightly
attached in an element surrounding them, as the lower animals
of the present time live in water, or land animals in air. Yet
the element is neither water nor air in the present sense, but
something midway between the two, a kind of thick vapour in
which most heterogeneous substances move hither and thither,

[167]

as though dissolved in currents flowing in all directions.

The animal-plants appear only as condensed regular forms
of this element, often differing little physically from their
environment.

The process of respiration exists alongside of
the process of nutrition. It is not as it is upon the earth, but
like a drawing in and a streaming out of heat. To clairvoyant

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

139
observation it is as though during those processes, organs opened
and closed, through which a warming current passed in and out,
and through which airy and watery substances were also carried
in and out. And since man's nature at this stage of evolution
already possesses an astral body, respiration and nutrition are
accompanied by feelings, so that a sort of pleasure ensues when
materials which promote the upbuilding of man's nature are taken
in from without. Aversion is caused if injurious substances flow
in, or even if they merely approach.

Just as during the Moon evolution the respiratory and the
nutritive processes were closely connected, as has been described,
so was the process of perception in close connection with
reproduction. No immediate effect was produced on any of
the senses by the things and beings in the environment of Moon
humanity. Perception was, on the contrary, of such a nature
that the presence of things and beings called up pictures in the
dull, dreamy consciousness. These pictures were much more
closely connected with the real nature of the environment than
the present sense-perceptions, which record in colour, sounds,

[168]

smell etc., so to speak, only the outside of things and beings.

In order to get a clearer idea of the human consciousness
on the Moon, let us imagine human beings immersed in the
vaporous environment described above. Most varied processes
take place in this vapour-element. Materials unite, substances
break asunder one from the other; some parts become condensed,
others rarified. All this happens in such a way that human beings
do not see or hear anything of it directly, but it calls up pictures in their consciousness. These may be compared with the images of
our present dream-consciousness, as for instance when an object
falls to the ground, and a sleeping man does not discern what
has really happened but perceives it in the form of a picture;
let us say he thinks that a shot has been fired. However, the
pictures in the Moon-consciousness are not arbitrary, as is the
case with such dream-pictures; although they are symbols, not

140

An Outline of Occult Science
representations, yet they correspond with outer events. A definite
outer event can call up only one definite picture. The Moon-being
is therefore in a position to regulate his conduct by means of these
pictures, as present-day man does by means of his perceptions.

We must nevertheless be careful to notice that conduct, regulated
by perception, is governed by choice whereas action, under the
influence of the pictures we have described, takes place as if
prompted by some dim instinct.

[169]

It is by no means as though only outer physical processes
become perceptible through this picture-consciousness, but it is
through the pictures that the spiritual beings, who rule behind
the physical facts together with their activities, become likewise
perceptible. Thus the Lords of Personality become visible, so
to speak, in the phenomena of the animal-plant kingdom; the

Sons of Fire appear behind and in the mineral-plant beings; and
the Sons of Life appear as beings whom man is able to imagine
unconnected with anything physical,—whom he sees, as it were,
as etheric-psychic organisms.

Though these pictures of the Moon-consciousness were not
representations, only symbols of outer things, they nevertheless
had a much more important effect on the inner nature of man than
the images now caused by perception. They were able to set the
whole inner being into motion and activity. The inner processes
were moulded in conformity with them. They were genuine
formative forces. Man's being became what those formative
forces made it; it became, to a certain extent, a representation of
the events of its consciousness.

The further evolution progresses in this manner, the more
it results in a deeply incisive change in man's being.

The
power issuing from the pictures in the consciousness gradually
becomes unable to extend over the whole human bodily frame,
which divides into two parts, or two natures. Members are formed
subject to the shaping influence of the picture-consciousness, and
they become to a great extent a copy of that life of imagination in

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

141
the way just described. Other organs escape such an influence.

[170]

They are, as it were, too dense, too much determined by other
laws, to conform themselves to the picture-consciousness. These
organs withdraw from the human influence; but they come under
another, that of the exalted Sun-beings themselves. A period of
rest, however, is first seen to precede this stage of evolution.

During this pause, the Sun-Spirits are gathering force to influence
the Moon-beings under quite new circumstances.

After this term of rest, man's being is distinctly divided into
two natures. One of these is withdrawn from the independent
action of the picture-consciousness; it assumes a more definite
form, and comes under the influence of forces which, though
issuing from the Moon body, are only called forth there through
the influence of the Sun-beings. This part of the human being
shares more and more in the life which is stimulated by the Sun:

the other part rises, like a kind of head, out of the first one. It
is flexible, can move itself, and takes shape in conformity with
the life of dull human consciousness. Yet the two parts are
closely connected with each other; they send one another their
vital fluids, and members extend from one into the other.

An important harmony is now attained by the working out,
during the time in which all this happened, of such a relation
between the Sun and Moon as is in keeping with the aim of this
evolution. It has already been intimated in a former passage how
the advancing beings throughout their stages of evolution, shape

[171]

their celestial bodies from out the general cosmic mass. They
emanate, as it were, the forces which govern the aggregation of
the substances. The Sun and Moon have thus separated from each
other, as was necessary for the preparation of the right abodes
for their respective beings. But this regulation of material and
its forces by the spirit is carried very much farther. The beings
themselves condition as well, certain movements of the heavenly
bodies, and the definite revolutions of them around each other.

In consequence, those bodies occupy changing positions with

142

An Outline of Occult Science
regard to each other. And if the position or situation of one
body relative to another is altered, the effects of their respective
inhabitants upon each other also change. So it is with the Sun
and Moon. Through the movement of the Moon around the

Sun, which by this time had come about, the human beings come
alternately at one time more into the sphere of the Sun's influence,
at another they are turned away from it and are then thrown back
more on their own resources. The movement is a consequence of
the “fall” of certain Moon-beings, as already described, and of
the settlement of the conflict which was thereby brought about.

It is the physical expression of the new relation of spiritual
forces created by this falling away. As a consequence of the
rotation of the one sphere round the other the beings inhabiting
these heavenly bodies experience the alternating conditions of
consciousness above described. We may put it thus, that the

[172]

Moon alternately turns its life toward the Sun and away from
it. There is a Sun time and a planetary time and during this
latter, the Moon-beings develop on the side of the Moon which
is turned away from the Sun.

It is true however, that so far as the Moon is concerned,
in addition to the movement of the celestial bodies, still
something else must be considered. That is to say, clairvoyant
consciousness, on looking back, can plainly see the Moon-beings
wandering around their own planet, at quite regular periods of
time. Thus at certain times they seek localities where they can
give themselves up to the Sun influence; at other periods they
wander to places where they are not subject to that influence, and
where they can, as it were, reflect upon their own being.

In order to complete the picture of these events, we must
further notice that the Sons of Life attain their human stage
during this period.

Man's senses, the beginnings of which
already existed on Saturn, cannot even yet, on the Moon, be
used for his own perception of external objects. But at the Moon
stage those senses become the instruments of the Sons of Life,

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

143
who make use of them in order to perceive through them. These
senses, belonging to the physical human body, enter thereby into
reciprocal relations with the Sons of Life, by whom they are not
only used but improved.

Through the changing relations of the Sun, there appears now
in the human being himself, as has been already indicated, a
change in the conditions of life. Things so shape themselves
that when the human being is dominated by the Sun influence,

[173]

he devotes himself more to the Sun life and its phenomena than
to himself. At such times he feels the greatness and glory of
the universe; he, so to speak, absorbs them. Those very exalted
beings who dwell on the Sun then influence the Moon, which
again influences human beings. This influence, however, does
not extend to the whole of man, but chiefly to those parts which
have thrown off the influence of their own picture-consciousness.

It is then that especially the physical and the etheric bodies attain
a definite size and form. On the other hand, the phenomena of
consciousness retire into the background. But when the human
being is turned away from the Sun, it is occupied with its own
nature; an inner activity begins, especially in the astral body while
the outer form, on the contrary, becomes more insignificant, and
less perfect in form.

Thus during the Moon evolution there are two states of
consciousness to be clearly distinguished, alternating with each
other; duller during the Sun period and clearer during the time
when life is left more to its own resources. The first state though
duller, is on the other hand more unselfish; man then lives a
life more devoted to the outer world, to the universe. It is an
alternation of states of consciousness, which on one hand may be
compared with the alternation of sleeping and waking in present
day humanity, as well as with his life between birth and death,
on the other hand with the more spiritual existence between
death and a new birth. The awakening on the Moon, when the

[174]

Sun period gradually ceases, might be described as something

144

An Outline of Occult Science
intermediate between the awakening of contemporary man each
morning, and his being born. And in the same way the gradual
dulling of consciousness at the approach of the Sun period
resembles a condition midway between falling asleep and dying.

For on the old Moon there was not yet such a consciousness of
birth and death as man now possesses. Man gave himself up
to the enjoyment of the universe in a kind of Sun life. During
this period he was carried beyond his own life; he lived more
spiritually. We can only attempt an approximate description, by
way of comparison, of what man experienced during such times.

He felt as though the forces of the universe were streaming into
him, pulsing through him. He felt as though intoxicated with the
harmonies of the universe which he thus experienced.

As such times his astral body was as though set free from the
physical body; also part of the etheric body went with it out of the
physical body. This organism, consisting of the astral and etheric
bodies, was like a delicate, wonderful musical instrument, from
the strings of which the mysteries of the universe reverberated.

And the members of that part of the human being on which
consciousness had but slight influence were shaped in accordance
with the harmonies of the universe. For the Sun-beings worked
in those harmonies. Thus this part of man was given its form
by the spiritual sounds of the universe; and at the same time the

[175]

alternation between the clearer state of consciousness during
the Sun period, and the duller one, was not so abrupt as was
that between the waking state and that of absolutely dreamless
sleep in contemporary man. The picture-consciousness was not
so clear as the present waking consciousness; but on the other
hand, the other consciousness was not so dull as the dreamless
sleep of the present day.

Thus the human being had a conception, even though dim,
of the play of the cosmic harmonies in his physical body and
in that part of his etheric body which had remained united with
the physical body. During the time when, so to speak, the Sun

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

145
did not shine on humanity, the picture-concepts replaced these
harmonies in man's consciousness. There was then a revival
particularly of those parts of the physical and etheric bodies
which were under the immediate power of consciousness. On
the other hand, other parts of the human being, now not exposed
to the formative forces streaming from the Sun, underwent a
kind of hardening and drying up process. When the Sun period
again drew near, the old bodies decayed; they fell away from
the human being, and as though from the grave of his old bodily
form, the rejuvenated human being appeared, who even in this
new form, was still uncomely.

A renewal of the life-process had taken place. By the operation
of the Sun-beings and their harmonies, the new-born body shaped
itself again in its perfection, and the process described above was
repeated. Man felt that renewal as if it were the putting on of

[176]

new garments. The kernel of his being had not passed through
an actual birth or death; it had only passed from a spiritual tone-
consciousness, in which it was given over to the outer world, to
one of a more inner nature. It had sloughed off its skin. The old
body had become useless; it was thrown off and renewed. This
then more clearly describes what has been characterized above
as a kind of reproduction, and which as has been said, is closely
connected with perception. Man's being has brought forth his
likeness with respect to certain parts of the physical and etheric
bodies. However a being totally different from the parent being
does not come into existence, but the kernel of the parent-being
passes over into the offspring. No new being arises, but the same
one in a new form.

Thus the Moon human being experiences a change of
consciousness. When the Sun period draws near, his pictured
images become dimmer and dimmer, and blissful devotion takes
possession of him; the harmonies of the universe resound in his
peaceful inner being. Toward the end of this time the images
of the astral body begin to be animated; he begins to be more

146

An Outline of Occult Science
conscious of himself and able to experience sensation. Man
experiences something like an awakening from the bliss and
tranquility in which he was wrapped during the sun period.

At the same time another important experience begins. With
this new clearing up of the picture-consciousness the human

[177]

being sees himself as though enveloped in a cloud, which has
descended upon him like a being from the cosmos.

And he feels that being as something belonging to him, as a
completion of his own nature; he feels it as that which gives him
existence, as his “ego.” That being is one of the Sons of Life.

Man feels toward him somewhat like this: “I have lived in this
being, even when I was given up to the glory of the universe in
the Sun period,—only then he was not visible to me; now he is.”

And it is also this Son of Life from whom proceeds the force
which, during the Sunless period, acts upon the body of man.

Then when the Sun period again approaches, man feels as though
he himself became one with the Son of Life. Even if man does
not see him, he nevertheless feels closely united with him.

Now the connection with the Sons of Life was such that not
every individual human being had a Son of Life to himself, but
an entire group of people felt such a being belonging to them.

Thus people on the Moon lived segregated into groups, and
each group felt in one of the Sons of Life its common “group-
ego.” The etheric body of each particular group had a specific
form, in this way these groups differed from each other. But
as the physical bodies shaped themselves in conformity with the
etheric bodies, the differences of the latter were also stamped
upon the former; and the individual groups of human beings
appeared as so many species of people. As the Sons of Life
looked down on the human groups belonging to them, they saw

[178]

themselves to a certain extent reproduced in manifold individual
human beings. And therein they felt their own egohood. They,
so to speak, mirrored themselves in man.

This was indeed
the mission of the human senses at that time. It has already

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

147
been shown that the senses did not as yet transmit objective
perceptions. But they reflected the nature of the Sons of Life.

What those Sons of Life perceived through reflection, gave them
their “ego-consciousness.” What was aroused in the human astral
body by this reflection was the dull dim pictures of the Moon-
consciousness. By thus acting conjointly and reciprocally with
the Sons of Life, the human beings laid the foundations of the
nervous system within their physical bodies. The nerves appear,
one might say, as continuations of the senses, directed inwardly
into the human body.

It is evident, from this description, in what manner the three
kinds of Spirits, those of Personality, of Fire, and of Life, act
upon Moon-humanity. If we look back upon the most important,
namely the middle period of the Moon evolution, we may say
that the Sons of Personality are at that time implanting in the
human astral body independence and the character of personality.

It is owing to this fact that man can turn his attention inwards
and work upon himself during those times when the Sun is not
shining upon him.

The Sons of Fire act upon the etheric body in so far as the
independent formation of the human being becomes imprinted
upon it. Through their means it comes to pass that human beings
are again conscious of themselves, as such, every time the body

[179]

is renewed. Thus a kind of memory is bestowed on the etheric
body through the Sons of Fire.

The Sons of Life act on the physical body in such a way that
it is able to become the expression of the astral body which has
now become independent. They thus make it possible for the
physical body to become a physiognomic copy of its astral body.

On the other hand, higher spiritual beings, in particular the Lords
of Form and of Motion, reach down into the physical and etheric
bodies, as far as these are developing during the Sun periods,
regardless of the independent astral body. Their intervention
comes from the Sun, in the manner described above.

148

An Outline of Occult Science

Under the influence of such facts, the human being gradually
matures to a point where it can develop within itself the germ
of the Spirit-Self just as during the second half of the Saturn
evolution it developed the germ of the Spirit-Man and on the

Sun that of the Life-Spirit. Thereby all the Moon conditions
are changed. Human beings have not only become more noble
and refined through successive transformations and renewals,
but they have also gained in power. For this reason the picture-
consciousness was more and more maintained during the Sun
periods. It also gained influence in the formation of the physical
and etheric bodies, which hitherto had been formed entirely by
the action of the Sun-beings.

What took place on the Moon through human beings and the

[180]

Spirits connected with them became more and more like that
which had formerly been effected by the Sun with its higher
beings. The consequence was that those Sun-beings were able
more and more to concentrate their forces on their own evolution.

By this means the Moon became, after a time, mature enough
to be again re-united with the Sun. To spiritual vision, these
occurrences take place as follows: The “rebellious Moon-beings”

had been gradually overcome by the Sun-beings and compelled
to submit to them in such a manner, that their activities became
a part of and subordinate to the activities of the Sun-beings.

It is true that this happened only after the lapse of long ages
during which the Moon periods had become shorter and shorter,
and the Sun periods longer and longer. Now there again comes
an evolution during which the Sun and Moon form one world-
organism. By this time the physical human body has become
quite etheric.

When it is said that the physical body has become etheric, it
must not be imagined that under such circumstances there is no
existing physical body. What was formed as a physical body
during the Saturn, Sun, and Moon periods, still exists. It is
important to recognize the physical element even where it is not

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

149
externally and physically manifested. It may also be present in
such a way that it shows outwardly an etheric or even an astral
form. We must distinguish between the outward appearance and
the inner law. What is physical may become etheric and astral,
at the same time retain in itself the physical law. That is the case

[181]

when the physical body of man has attained a certain degree of
perfection on the Moon. It becomes etheric in form.

But when clairvoyant observation, which can perceive such
things, is directed toward an etheric body of this kind, that body
is seen to be ruled by physical, not etheric, laws. The physical
element has in this case been taken into the etheric world,
there to rest and to be nurtured as though in a mother's tender
care. Later it again emerges in a physical form, but at a higher
stage. If Moon-humanity had kept its physical body in its coarse
physical form, the Moon would never have been able to unite
itself with the Sun. By accepting the etheric form, the physical
body becomes more closely related to the etheric body, and by
this means can again be more closely interpenetrated with those
parts of the etheric and astral bodies which had been forced to
withdraw from it during the Sun periods of the Moon evolution.

Man, who appeared as a being with a two-fold nature during the
separation of Sun and Moon, again becomes an undivided being.

The physical becomes more psychic. Therefore the psychic also
becomes more closely connected with the physical.

Now the Sun-Spirits, into whose immediate sphere this
undivided human being has entered, are able to act upon it
in quite a different manner from their previous influence from
without on the Moon. Man is now in a more psycho-spiritual
environment. Owing to this, the Lords of Wisdom are able to
effect something momentous. They imbue and inspire him with

[182]

wisdom. He thereby becomes in a certain sense an independent
soul. And to the influence of these beings is added that of the

Lords of Motion. They act principally on the astral body, so that
under their influence it produces psychic activity, and an etheric

150

An Outline of Occult Science
body filled with wisdom. The latter is the foundation of that
which has been described above as the rational or intellectual soul
in contemporary man, whereas the astral body, inspired by the

Lords of Motion, is the germ of the sentient soul. And because
all this is effected in man's being in his progressed condition
of independence, these germs of the rational and sentient soul
appear as the expression of the Spirit-Self. In this connection
the mistake must not be made of thinking that at this period
of evolution the Spirit-Self was something separate from the
intellectual and sentient souls. The latter are only the expression
of the Spirit-Self, which signifies their higher unity and harmony.

It is especially significant that the Lords of Wisdom intervene
at this period in the manner described. For they do this not only
with regard to humanity but also for the benefit of the other
kingdoms which have been elaborated on the Moon. Upon the
reunion of Sun and Moon these lower kingdoms are drawn into
the Sun sphere. Everything in them which was physical becomes
etheric. There are, therefore, minela-plants and plant-animals
now in the Sun, just as there is humanity there. But those other
creatures are still endowed with their own laws of being. They

[183]

therefore feel like strangers in their environment. They came
upon the scene with a nature but little in harmony with their
surroundings. But as they have become etheric, the activity of
the Lords of Wisdom may also extend to them. Everything which
has come from the Moon into the Sun now becomes pervaded
with the forces of the Lords of Wisdom. Hence what is developed
out of the Sun-Moon organism during this period of evolution
may be called in occult science the “Cosmos of Wisdom.”

When, therefore, after an interval of rest, our Earth system
appears as the successor of this Cosmos of Wisdom, all the
beings newly emerging on the earth, developing out of their

Moon-germs, prove to be filled with wisdom. And this is the
reason why earthly man when contemplating the things around
him, is able to discover the wisdom concealed in their inner

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

151
nature. The wisdom in each leaf of a plant, in every bone in
animal and man, in the marvelous structure of the brain and heart,
fills us with admiration. If man requires wisdom to understand
things, and therefore gathers wisdom from them, this shows that
there is wisdom in the things themselves. For however much
man might have striven to understand things by means of wise
perceptions, he could not draw wisdom from them unless it had
first been put into them. He who tries by means of wisdom to
understand things, assuming at the same time that wisdom had
not first been concealed within them, may just as reasonably
believe that he can empty water out of a glass into which it

[184]

has not first been poured. As will be shown later in this book,
the Earth is the “old Moon” risen again. And it appears as
an organism full of wisdom, because it was permeated by the

Lords of Wisdom and their forces during the epoch that has been
described.

It will easily be understood that this description of the Moon
condition could take account only of certain temporary forms
of evolution. It was necessary to pause at certain things in the
progress of events, and single them out for delineation. It is true
that this kind of description gives only isolated pictures, and it
may be deplored for this reason, that in the foregoing account
the evolutionary scheme was not brought down to a system of
precise and definite concepts. But in the face of such an objection
it may be well to point out that the description was intentionally
given in less clearly defined outlines. For it is not of so much
consequence here to give speculative ideas and to construct
theories as to represent what really passes before the spiritual
eyes of clairvoyant consciousness, when looking back upon these
events. With regard to the Moon evolution this cannot be done
in such sharp and definite outlines as are characteristic of earthly
perceptions. In the Moon period we are mainly concerned with
variable, changing impressions, with shifting, moving pictures
and their transitory stages. We have, moreover, to bear in mind

152

An Outline of Occult Science
that we are contemplating an evolution continuing through long,

[185]

long periods of time, and that out of all that presents itself, it is
possible to seize upon only momentary pictures and fix them for
delineation.

The Moon period actually reached its highest point at the time
when the astral body, implanted in man, had brought him so
far along the evolutionary path that his physical body afforded
the Sons of Life the possibility of attaining their human stage.

Man had then attained all that this epoch could give him for
himself, for his inner nature on the upward path. The following,
or second half of the Moon evolution may therefore be termed
the “ebb-tide,” or wane.

But even during this ebb-tide one
sees a most important thing taking place with regard to man's
environment, and even with regard to himself. It is now that
wisdom is implanted in the Sun-Moon body. It has been shown
that during the ebb-tide the germs of the intellectual and sentient
souls are implanted. But the development of these, as well as of
the consciousness-soul and with it the birth of the “Ego”—the
free self consciousness—does not ensue until the Earth period.

At the Moon stage the intellectual- and sentient-souls have as
yet no appearance of being used by human beings as a means of
expression; they appear rather as instruments of those Sons of

Life who belong to humanity. Were we to describe the feeling
of the human dweller on the Moon in this respect, we should
have to say that he experiences the following: “The Son of Life

[186]

lives in and through me; he surveys through me the environment
of the Moon; in me he reflects upon the things and beings
of that environment.” The Moon human being feels himself
overshadowed by the Son of Life, and looks upon himself as the
instrument of that higher being. During the time of the separation
of Sun and Moon he felt a greater measure of independence
when the Sun was turned away from him; but at the same
time he also felt as though the ego belonging to him, which
had disappeared from the picture-consciousness during the Sun

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

153
period, now became visible. It was, for Moon-humanity, what
may be described as a change in the states of consciousness, so
that the Moon-being had this feeling: “In the Sun period my ego
wafts me away into higher regions, into the presence of exalted
beings, and when the Sun disappears it descends with me into
lower worlds.”

The actual Moon evolution was preceded by a preparatory
stage. In a certain way the Saturn and Sun evolutions were
recapitulated.

Now, after the reunion of Sun and Moon,
during what we have termed the ebb-tide, two epochs may
be distinguished one from the other. In the course of these,
even physical condensation occurs to a certain degree. Therefore
psycho-spiritual conditions of the Sun-Moon organism alternate
with others of a more physical nature. In such physical epochs
human beings and those of the lower kingdoms appear as though
they were preparing, in stiff not yet self-reliant forms, the type
of what they were to become in a more independent manner
during the

Earth period.

We may therefore speak of two

[187]

preparatory epochs in the Moon evolution, and of two others
during the ebb-tide. In occult science such epochs may be termed
cycles.20

In that period which follows the two preparatory
epochs, and precedes those of the ebb-tide—that is to say, during
the time of the separation of the Moon—three epochs can again
be distinguished. The middle period is the time when the Sons
of Life reached the human level. It is preceded by a period in
which all conditions lead up to that crowning event; and it is
followed by one which may be called a time of adaptation and of
perfecting the new creations.

In this way the middle period of the Moon evolution is
again divided into three epochs, which, with the two preparatory
periods and the two during the ebb-tide make up seven Moon

20 In current theosophical literature they are called "rounds." Yet, if we bear in mind the more graphic description already given, we shall guard against a too schematic concept of such matters.

154

An Outline of Occult Science
cycles, or rounds. It may therefore be said that the whole Moon
evolution passes through seven cycles, or rounds. Between them
are intervals of rest, which have been mentioned repeatedly in the
above description. Yet we can approach a true concept of these
facts only if we do not think of the changes between the periods
of activity and those of rest, as sudden ones. For instance, the

Sun-beings little by little withdraw their activity from the Moon.

A time begins for them which, viewed from without, appears to

[188]

be their resting period, whereas in reality an intense, independent
activity still continues on the Moon itself. Thus the active period
of one kind of being repeatedly extends into the resting time of
another. If we take account of such things we may speak of a
rhythmic ascent and descent of forces in cycles. Indeed, similar
divisions are to be recognized even within the seven Moon cycles
mentioned. We may then call the whole Moon evolution one
great cycle, and the seven divisions, or rounds, within it, “small”

cycles; and again, the separate parts of these, “smaller” cycles.

This systematic arrangement into seven times seven divisions is
also noticeable in the Sun evolution and can be indicated during
the Saturn period. Yet we must bear in mind that the boundaries
between the divisions are somewhat obliterated even in the Sun,
and still more so in Saturn. These boundaries become more and
more defined the nearer evolution advances to the Earth period.

At the close of the Moon evolution, which has been sketched
in the foregoing pages, all the beings and forces connected with
it enter upon a more spiritual form of existence. This is on quite
a different plane from that of the Moon period, and also from
that of the Earth evolution which follows. A being possessed of
faculties so highly developed as to enable him to perceive all the
details of the Moon and Earth evolutions need not necessarily

[189]

be able to see what happens during the interval between the
two periods. For one possessing such vision, beings and forces
would, at the end of the Moon period, disappear, as it were, into

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

155
nothingness; and after an interval they would issue forth again
from the dusky twilight of the cosmic depths. Only a being
endowed with considerably higher faculties would be capable of
following up the spiritual events which take place during this
interval.

When this interval is over, the beings who took part in
the evolutionary processes on Saturn, Sun, and Moon reappear
endowed with new faculties. Beings of a higher order than
man have, by their former achievements, won the power of
bringing man's evolution forward to a point at which he would
be able to unfold in himself, during the Earth period, a form
of consciousness which stands a step higher than the picture-
consciousness he had possessed during the Moon period. But
man must first be prepared to receive this gift.

During the Saturn, Sun, and Moon evolutions, he incorporated
within his being the physical, etheric, and astral bodies. But
those bodies were only endowed with such faculties and powers
as enabled them to have a picture-consciousness; the organs and
forms by means of which they could attain to a cognizance of a
world of outer sense-objects, such as is requisite for the Earth
stage, were still wanting. Just as the new plant unfolds only
what is concealed in the seed originating from the old plant, so
do the three principles of man's nature appear, at the beginning
of the new stage of evolution, with such forms and organs as

[190]

will enable them to develop only a picture-consciousness. It is
necessary first to prepare them for the unfolding of a higher state
of consciousness.

This takes place in three preliminary stages. During the first,
the physical body is raised to a level at which it becomes able
to undergo the necessary remodeling which is to serve as a
basis for consciousness of outer objects. This is one of the
preliminary stages of the actual earth evolution, and may be
called a recapitulation of the Saturn period on a higher level. For
during this period, as during the Saturn period, higher beings

156

An Outline of Occult Science
are working only on the physical body. When the latter has
progressed far enough in its evolution, all beings must first again
pass into a higher form of existence before the etheric body can
also progress. The physical body must, as it were, be recast, in
order to be able, in its remodeled state, to receive the more highly
constituted etheric body. After this interval devoted to a higher
form of existence, a kind of recapitulation of the Sun evolution
on a higher level, occurs for the purpose of shaping the etheric
body. And after another interval, a similar thing occurs for the
astral body, by means of a recapitulation of the Moon evolution.

Let us now turn our attention to the evolutionary processes
taking place after the close of the third recapitulation described.

All beings and forces have passed again into a state of
spiritualization.

During that state they ascended into higher

[191]

worlds. The lowest of the worlds, in which something of them is
still to be perceived during this spiritualizing epoch, are the same
in which contemporary man sojourns between death and a new
birth. These are the regions of the spirit-world. Thence the beings
and forces gradually descend again into lower worlds. Before the
physical Earth evolution begins they have so far descended that
their lowest manifestations are to be seen in the astral or psychic
world.

Everything human existing at that period is still in its astral
form. In order to understand this condition of humanity, attention
should be paid especially to the fact that though man has within
him the physical, etheric and astral bodies, yet the physical and
etheric bodies are not present in their own forms but in astral
form. It is not physical form that makes the physical body
physical, but the fact that it embodies physical laws, although
possessing an astral form. It is a being in a psychic form with
a physical law of existence. The etheric body is in a similar
position.

To spiritual vision the Earth at this stage of evolution appears
at first as a heavenly body all soul and spirit, in which, therefore,

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

157
even physical and life forces appear in a psychic form. In this
world-organism everything which will subsequently be moulded
into the creatures of the physical earth is contained in a germinal
state. The globe is luminous; but its light is not yet such as could
be seen by physical eyes, supposing even that they had then

[192]

existed. The globe shines only in psychic light to the opened
vision of the seer.

A process now takes place on this globe which may be
designated “condensation.” The result of this is that after a time
a fiery form appears in the midst of the psychic globe; this
condition was similar to that of Saturn in its densest state. This
fiery form is interpenetrated by the action of the various beings
who are taking part in the evolution. The reciprocal action which
is to be observed between those beings and the planetary body
is like a rising out of and a diving into the earth's fiery globe.

Hence the earth's globe is by no means a homogeneous substance,
but has somewhat the character of an ensouled and spiritualized
organism. The beings destined to become human on the earth
in man's present form are as yet in a condition which renders
them the least capable of sharing in the activity of plunging into
the fiery globe. They remain almost entirely in the uncondensed
environment. They are still living in the bosom of the higher
spiritual beings. At this stage they come in contact with the fiery
earth at only one point of their psychic form, and this causes
one part of their astral form to be densified by the heat. Thus
earth-life is enkindled in them. They therefore still belong to
psycho-spiritual worlds with regard to the greater part of their
nature, but by coming in contact with the earth's fire, vital heat
plays around them.

If we wish to draw a material, yet supersensible, picture of

[193]

these human beings in the very beginning of the earth's evolution,
we must imagine a psychic ovoid, or egg, contained within the
circumference of the earth, and enclosed on its lower surface,
as an acorn is by its cup. The substance of the cup, however,

158

An Outline of Occult Science
consists solely of heat or fire. The process of being enveloped
by heat not only causes the kindling of life in the human being,
but a change appears simultaneously in the astral body. In this
body becomes incorporated the first germ of what afterwards
becomes the sentient-soul. We may therefore say that man at
this stage of his existence consists of the sentient-soul, the astral
body, the etheric body, and the physical body, which latter
is formed out of fire. Those spiritual beings who participate
in human existence surge through the astral body. Man feels
himself bound to the earth body by the sentient-soul. He has
therefore at this time a preponderating picture-consciousness, in
which are manifested those spiritual beings in whose bosom he
reposes; and the feeling of his own body seems to be merely a
point within that consciousness. He looks down, so to speak,
from the spiritual world upon earthly possession, which he feels
belongs to him.

Further and further the condensation of the earth now proceeds
and at the same time the differentiation of the various parts of
man, as has been described, becomes more and more defined.

From a definite point of evolution onward, the earth is so far

[194]

condensed that only part of it is fiery; another part has assumed
a substantial shape, which may be termed “gas” or “air.” A
change also takes place now in man. He is not only brought
into contact with the heat of the earth, but the air substance is
incorporated in his fire-body. And as heat kindled life in him, the
air playing around him creates an effect within him which may
be called (spiritual) sound. His etheric body begins to resound.

Simultaneously, a part of the astral body becomes separated from
the remainder; this part is the germ of the intellectual-soul which
appears later.

In order to bring before our eyes what takes place in the
human soul at this time, we must notice that the beings superior
to man are surging through the airy-fiery body of the earth. In
the fire-earth it is at first the Sons of Personality who are of

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

159
importance to man, and when man is stirred into life by the heat
of the earth his sentient soul says to itself, “These are the Sons
of Personality.” In the same way the beings called “Archangels”

earlier in this book (in accordance with Christian esotericism)

appear in the air-sphere. It is their influences which man feels
within him as sound, when the air plays around him. And the
intellectual-soul then says to itself, “These are the Archangels.”

Thus what man at this stage perceives, through his connection
with the earth, is not as yet a collection of physical objects, but
he lives in sensations of heat which rise up to him, and in sounds;
in those heat currents and sound waves, however, he feels the

Sons of Personality and the Archangels. It is true that he cannot

[195]

perceive those beings directly, only, as it were, through a veil of
heat and sound. While these perceptions are penetrating from the
earth into his soul, there continue to ascend and descend within
it the images of those higher beings in whose tender care he feels
himself to be.

Now evolution takes a further step, which is once more
expressed in condensation. Watery substance is incorporated
into the Earth-body, so that now the latter consists of three
parts,—igneous, aeriform, and aqueous. Before this happens,
something of great importance takes place.

An independent
celestial body is split off from the fiery-aeriform earth; this
new body becomes in its later development our present sun.21

Previously, earth and sun had formed one body. After the sun had
been split off, the earth still has at first everything within it which is in and on the present moon. The separation of the sun takes
place because higher beings could no longer carry on their own
evolution as well as their task on Earth within this atmosphere,
now densified to the consistency of water. They separate from
the general mass of the Earth the only substances useful to them,

21 In the next few pages, Sun and Moon are printed with capital letters when the old evolutions are referred to, but are printed “sun” and “moon” when the Earth period is indicated.— Translator.

160

An Outline of Occult Science
and fare forth to make a new abode for themselves in the sun.

They now influence the earth from the sun, from outside. Man,

[196]

however, needs for his further evolution an environment
in
which matter becomes still more condensed.

With the incorporation of watery substance in the earth-body
a change also takes place in man. Henceforth not only does fire
stream into him and air play around him, but watery substance
is incorporated into his physical body. At the same time his
etheric part changes: that is, it is now perceived by man as a fine
light-body. Previous to this, man had felt currents of heat rising
up to him from the earth: he had felt air surrounding him through
tones; now, the watery element also penetrates his fire-air body,
and he sees its ebb and flow as the alternate flaring up and
dimming of light. But a change has also taken place in his soul.

To the germs of the sentient and intellectual souls is added that
of the consciousness-soul. The “Angels” work in the element of
water; they are also the real producers of light. It was as though
they appeared to man in light.

The higher beings who were previously in the Earth-planet
itself, now influence it from the sun. On this account all effects
produced on the earth are changed. The human being chained to
earth would no longer be able to feel the influence of the sun-
beings within him, if his soul were unceasingly turned toward
the earth, from which his physical body is taken. A change now
appears in the conditions of human consciousness. At certain
times the sun-beings wrest the soul of man from his physical

[197]

body, so that man is now alternately purely psychic,
in the
bosom of the sun-beings, and, when united with the body, in a
condition in which he receives earth influences. When in the
physical body, heat currents stream up to him; a sea of air is
sounding round him and water pours into and out of him. When
man is out of his body the images of the higher beings in whose
care he is, float through his soul.

The earth passes through two periods at this stage of its

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

161
evolution. During one of these it allows its substances to circulate
around the human souls and clothe them with bodies; during the
other, the souls have withdrawn from it, and only the bodies
are left and the human beings are in a condition of sleep. It is
speaking quite in conformity with facts to say that in those times
of a remote past the earth passed through a day and a night time.

(Expressed in terms of physical space this means that through
the reciprocal action of the sun-beings and the earth-beings, the
earth is brought into a movement in relation with the sun; thus
there is brought about the alternation of day and night periods
described above. The day period is when the surface of the earth,
on which man is evolving, is turned toward the sun; the night
period, the time when man leads a purely psychic existence, is
when the earth's surface is turned away from the sun. Now it
must not, of course, be imagined that in that far-off time the
earth's motion around the sun was like its present motion. The
conditions were still utterly different. But even at this early point
it is helpful to realize that the motions of the celestial bodies

[198]

are a consequence of the mutual relations of the spiritual beings
inhabiting them. Spiritual-psychic causes produce in the celestial
bodies positions and motions which permit the manifestation of
spiritual conditions on the physical plane.)

If our gaze were turned upon the earth during its night period,
its body would appear like a corpse. For it consists to a great
extent of the decaying bodies of those human beings whose
souls are in another state of existence. The organized watery
and aeriform structures of which human bodies were formed
become disintegrated, and dissolve into the rest of the earth's
substance. Only that part of man's body which was formed from
the very beginning of the earth evolution by the co-operation
of fire and the human soul, and which subsequently became
denser and denser, continues to exist as an insignificant looking
embryo. Now when the day period begins, the earth once more
participates directly in the sun influence, and human souls press

162

An Outline of Occult Science
forward into the sphere of physical life. They come in contact
with the embryos, and cause them to spring up and assume an
external form, which appears like an image of man's psychic
being. Something like a delicate fertilization then takes place
between the human soul and the bodily embryo.

The souls thus embodied now begin once more to attract the
aeriform and watery substances and incorporate them in their
own bodies. Air is expelled and absorbed by the organized

[199]

body,—the first beginning of that which later appears as the
respiratory process. Water too is absorbed and expelled; the
nutritive process in its original form has begun.

But these
processes are not yet perceived as external ones. A kind of
external perception takes place in the soul only by means of the
already characterized kind of fertilization. Here the soul vaguely
feels its awakening to physical existence when it comes in contact
with the embryo which is held toward it from the earth. It then
feels something which may be put into words thus: “This is my
form.” And such a feeling, which might even be called a dawning
consciousness of self, abides within the soul through this union
with the physical body. But the soul still feels the process of
absorbing air in an absolutely psycho-spiritual way, as an image,
which appears in the form of tone-pictures surging up and down;
these give form to the embryo which is being incorporated within
them. The soul everywhere feels itself in the midst of sound
waves, and that it is fashioning the body in accordance with those
tone forces. Thus are human forms developed at that stage of
evolution. They cannot be observed in any external world by
our present consciousness. They evolve like vegetable or flower
forms of fine substance, therefore appear like flowers waving in
the wind.

During his Earth period, man experiences the blissful feeling
of being fashioned into such forms.

The absorption of the
watery parts is felt in the soul as an accession of force, or inner

[200]

strength. From without it appears as growth of the physical

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

163
human structure. As the direct influence of the sun decreases, the
human soul also loses the power of controlling these processes.

By degrees they are cast aside. Only those parts are left which
allow the embryo, above described, to mature. But man leaves
his body, and returns to the spiritual form of existence. (As
not all parts of the earth's body are employed in building up
human bodies, we must not imagine that during the earth's night
period, it is composed exclusively of disintegrating corpses and
embryos waiting to be awakened. All these are imbedded in
other structures, which are formed out of the earth's substances.

The status of those structures will be explained later.)

Now, however, the process of condensing the earth's substance
continues. To the watery element is added the solid or “earthly”

substance (“earthly” in the sense of occult science).

And
when this happens man also, during his earth period, begins
to incorporate the earthly element in his body. As soon as this
incorporation begins, the forces which the soul brings with it
out of the disembodied state, no longer have the same power
as before. Previously, the soul had fashioned its body out of
the igneous, aeriform, and watery elements, in accordance with
the tones which resounded and the light-pictures which played
around it. The soul cannot do this with regard to the solidified
form. Other forces now interpose to shape it. What is left behind
of man, when the soul withdraws from the body, is not only

[201]

an embryo to be fanned into life by the returning soul, but a
structure containing in itself reanimating power. The soul, at its
departure, not only leaves its image behind on earth but sends
down some of its animating power into that image.

Now on its reappearance on earth the soul alone no longer
suffices to awaken the image to life; reanimation must take place
in the image itself. The spiritual beings influencing the earth
from the sun now uphold the reanimating force that is in the
human body, even though man himself is not upon the earth.

Thus, during its incarnation, the soul is not only sensible of the

164

An Outline of Occult Science
sounds and light-pictures floating around, in which it feels the
beings next above it, but, through receiving the earthly element,
it comes under the influence of those still higher beings who
have taken up their abode on the sun. Previously, man felt that
he belonged to the psycho-spiritual beings with whom he was
united when free from the body. His ego was still within them.

Now that ego confronts him during physical incarnation, quite as
much as everything else which is around him during that period.

Independent images of the psycho-spiritual being of man were
henceforth on the earth. These structures, in comparison with the
present human body, were of a finer material. For the earthly part
mixed with them only in its finest state, much in the same way
as when man of the present day absorbs the finely distributed
substances of an object through his organ of smell. Human bodies

[202]

were like shadows. But as they were distributed over the whole
earth they came under earth influences, which varied in their
nature on different parts of the earth's surface. Whereas formerly
bodily images corresponded to the human soul animating them,
and on that account were essentially alike over the whole earth,
differences now appeared between human forms. In this manner
the way was prepared for what appeared later as differences of
race.

When the human body became independent, the previous close
union of the earth-man with the psycho-spiritual world was to a
certain extent dissolved. Henceforth, when the soul left the body,
the latter, in a way, continued to live. If evolution had gone on
advancing in this manner, the earth would have hardened under
the influence of its solid elements. To the eyes of the seer who
looks back on those conditions, human bodies, when abandoned
by their souls, appear to become more and more solidified. And
after a time the human souls returning to earth would have found
no available material with which to combine. All the substances
available for man would have been used up in filling the earth
with the hardened, wood-like remains of incarnations.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

165

Then an event took place which gave a new turn to the whole
evolution. Everything in the solid earthly substance which could
contribute to permanent induration was eliminated. At this point
our present moon left the earth. And what had previously directly
conduced to a moulding of permanent forms, now operated
from the moon indirectly and in a diminished degree. The higher
beings, on whom that moulding of forms depended, had resolved

[203]

to exercise their influences upon their earth no longer from its
interior, but from without. By this means there was brought
about in the bodily structure of man a difference which must be
called the beginning of the separation into a male and a female
sex.

The finely constituted human forms which formerly inhabited
the earth, had produced through cooperation of the two forces
within themselves, that of the embryo and that of the animating
force, the new human form, their descendant. These descendants
are now transformed. In one group the animating power of
the psycho-spiritual element was paramount; in another the
animating germinal force. This was caused by the weakening
of the power of the solid element in consequence of the moon's
leaving the earth. The reciprocal action of these two forces
now became more delicate than it had been before—when it
occurred within one single body, consequently the descendant
also became more delicate and fine. He entered the earth in a
delicate condition, and only gradually incorporated more solid
parts within him.

In this way the possibility of union with
the body was once more given to the human soul returning to
earth. It no longer animated the body from without, because that
animation took place on the earth itself; but it became united
with the body, and enabled it to grow. Of course a certain limit
was set to that growth. Through the separation of the moon,
the human body had for a time become supple; but the more it
continued to grow on the earth, the more the solidifying forces

[204]

got the upper hand. At length the share borne by the soul in

166

An Outline of Occult Science
the organization of the body grew less and less, and the body
disintegrated when the soul ascended to psycho-spiritual modes
of existence. One can trace how the forces gradually acquired by
man during the Saturn, Sun, and Moon evolutions take part more
and more in the progress of man during the described formative
periods of the earth. The first part to be kindled by the earth's
fire is the astral body, still containing within it the etheric and
physical bodies in a state of solution. Then the astral body is
organized into a more subtle astral part, the sentient soul, and
into a grosser etheric part, which henceforth is in contact with the
earth-element; when this occurs, the etheric or vital body, already
fore-shadowed, makes its appearance. And while the intellectual
and consciousness-souls are being evolved in the astral man,
there are incorporated into the etheric body those coarser parts
which are susceptible to sound and light.

At the time when the etheric body still further densifies and
changes from a light-body into a fire or heat-body, the stage of
evolution has been reached at which, as described above, parts
of the solid earth-element are incorporated into man. Because
the etheric body has condensed to the consistency of fire, it is
now able, by means of the forces of the physical body previously
implanted in it, to combine with those substances of the physical

[205]

earth attenuated as far as the fire-state. But by itself it would no
longer be able to introduce air substances into the body which has
meanwhile become more solidified. Then, as indicated above,
the higher beings dwelling on the sun interpose, breathing air
into the body. While man, by virtue of his past, is able of himself
to become permeated with earthly fire, higher beings direct the
breath of air into his body. Heretofore the etheric body of man,
as a receiver of sound, had been the director of the air current.

It permeated man's physical body with life. Now the physical
body gets life from without. The result is that this life becomes
independent of the soul part of man. On departing from the earth,
the soul leaves behind not only the seed of its form, but also a

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

167
living image of itself. The Lords of Form now remain united
with that image, and the life they have bestowed, they transfer to
man's descendants, when his soul has left the body. Thus comes
about what may be called heredity, and when the human soul
once more appears on earth it feels that it is in a body animated
by the life of its ancestors. It feels itself especially attracted to
just that kind of a body. In this way something like a memory
is formed of the ancestor with whom the soul feels itself to be
at one. This memory passes through the line of descendants in
the form of a consciousness possessed in common. The ego thus
flows down through the generations.

At this stage of evolution man, during his life on earth, was
conscious of himself as an independent being. He felt the inner
fire of his etheric body to be combined with the external fire of

[206]

the earth. He could feel the heat that was streaming through him
as his own ego. In those heat currents, interwoven with life, are
to be found the first beginnings of the circulation of the blood.

But in what flowed into him as air, he did not exactly feel as his
own being. Indeed, it was the forces of the higher beings we have
described that were working in that air. But still there was left
to him, within the air that flowed through him, that part of the
active forces which belonged to him by virtue of his previously
formed etheric powers. He was master in one part of those air
currents. And to that extent, it was not only the higher beings
who were shaping him, but he himself. He formed the air parts
of his being in accordance with the images of his astral body.

While air was thus flowing into his body from without, a process
which became the basis of respiration, part of the air was formed
within him into an organism which became fixed and was the
basis of the subsequent nervous system. Thus man at this period
was connected with the external earth by heat and air.

On the other hand, he was not conscious of the introduction
within himself of the solid element of the earth.

Although
it contributed to his own embodiment, he could not perceive

168

An Outline of Occult Science
directly what was being supplied but could only do so through
a dim consciousness in the image of the higher beings who
were active in the process. In the same kind of picture-form,
as an expression of the beings above him, man had previously

[207]

perceived the introduction of the fluid element into the earth.

Through the densification of his earthly form the pictures have
now undergone a change in his consciousness. The solid element
has been mixed with the fluid. This incoming of the solid element
must also be seen to be the work of higher beings operated from
without. It is no longer possible for the human soul to have the
power of directing the supply for that supply has now to serve
his body, which is being built up from without. He would spoil
its form if he were to direct the influx himself.

What, therefore, reaches him from without appears to him to
be directed by authoritative orders issuing from the higher beings
who are at work on the shaping of his body. Man feels himself
to be an ego; he has within him, as part of his astral body, his
intellectual-soul, through which he inwardly perceives, in the
form of pictures, what is happening externally, and by means
of which he permeates his delicate nervous system. He feels
himself to be descended from ancestors, by virtue of the life
flowing down through the generations. He breathes, and feels it
to be the effect of the higher beings who have been described
as the Lords of Form. He is likewise subject to their impulses
in all that which comes to him from the outside (as his food).

What he finds most obscure is his origin as an individual. As
to that, he only knows that he has been under the influence of
the Lords of Form expressing themselves in earth-forces. In his

[208]

relations with the outer world, man was guided and ruled. This
finds expression through the fact that man has a consciousness
of the psycho-spiritual activities operating behind his physical
environment. It is true that he does not see the spiritual beings
in their own form, but he is conscious in his soul of sounds and
colors. He knows, however, that it is the actions of spiritual

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

169
beings that are realized through that world of images. What
those beings communicate to him, reaches him as sound; their
manifestations appear to him in light-pictures.

The innermost concepts, of which earthly man becomes
conscious, are those conveyed to him by the element of fire
or warmth. He can already distinguish between his own inner
heat and the heat currents of the earth's periphery. In these latter
are manifested the Sons of Personality. But man has only a dim
consciousness of what is behind the currents of external heat. It
is in those very currents that he feels the influence of the Lords
of Form. When powerful effects of heat are produced in man's
environment, the soul feels that spiritual beings are now heating
the earth's circumference—beings, from whom a spark has been
detached, which warms his inner being.

In the effect of light, however, man does not yet distinguish
in quite the same manner between the outer and the inner. When
light-pictures appear around him, they do not always produce the
same feeling in the soul of the earth-man. There were times when
he felt them as external images. This was during the period

[209]

when he had just descended from the disembodied state into
incarnation. It was the period of his growth on earth. As the time
approached for the embryo to be developed those images faded,
and man only retained something like inner memory-pictures
of them. The actions of the Sons of Fire (Archangels) were
contained in those light-pictures, which appeared to man to be
the servitors of the Fire-spirits who sent down a spark into his
own inner being. When their outer manifestations died away,
man felt them inwardly in the form of images (memories). He felt
himself united with their forces. And so indeed he was. For by
means of what he had received from them, he was able to work
upon his surrounding atmosphere. This, under his influence,
began to emit light.

At that time nature forces and human forces were not as
yet separated from each other as they subsequently became.

170

An Outline of Occult Science

What happened on earth still emanated to a great extent from
human forces. Viewing nature processes on the earth from the
outside, one would then have seen in them not only something
independent of man, but also the effect of human activity within
those processes. Sound-perceptions assumed a still more different
form to the earth-man. From the beginning of earth-life they had
been perceived as outer tones. Whereas the external air pictures
were perceived up to the middle of earth existence, the external
tones could be heard even after that middle period. And only

[210]

toward the end of his life did the earth-man become insensible
to them. But the memory-pictures of those sounds remained.

In them were contained the manifestations of the Sons of Life

(Angels). When, toward the end of his life, man felt himself
inwardly united with those forces, he was able, by imitating
them, to produce mighty effects in the earth's watery element.

The waters surged in and above the earth under his influence.

Man had perceptions of taste only during the first quarter of his
earth-life, and even then they seemed to the soul like a memory
of the experience of his disembodied state. As long as they lasted,
his body continued to grow more and more solid by assimilating
external substances. In the second quarter of earth life growth
still continued, but the form was already fully developed. At
this time man could perceive other living beings near him only
through their heat, light, and sound effects; for he was not as
yet capable of imagining the solid element. During the first
quarter of his life he received the taste-impressions described,
only through the watery element.

Man's external bodily form was an image of this inner
psychic condition.

Those parts were most fully developed
which contained the first fore-shadowing of the later form of the
head. The other organs appeared only as appendages. These were
shadowy and indistinct. Yet earth-beings varied with regard to
form. There were some in whom the appendages were more or
less developed, according to the earth-conditions under which

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

171
they lived. This varied with people's different dwelling places on

[211]

the earth. Where they were more involved in the things of earth,
the appendages became more prominent. Those human beings
who at the beginning of physical development on earth were the
ripest, owing to their previous evolution, having come in contact
with the fire-element at the very beginning before the earth had
been condensed into air, were those now able to develop the
first beginnings of the head most completely. They were those
persons possessing most inner harmony.

Others were ready for contact with the fire-element only
when the earth had already evolved air within it. They were
more dependent upon outer conditions than the first mentioned,
who distinctly felt the Lords of Form through heat, and during
their earth-life felt as though they retained a memory of having
belonged to those spirits and of having been connected with
them in the disembodied state. The second species of human
beings only had the memory of the disembodied state to a more
limited degree; they were conscious of their fellowship with
the spiritual world chiefly through the light-influences of the

Sons of Fire (Archangels). A third type of human beings was
still more entangled in earthly existence. It was they who were
unable to come in contact with the fire-element until the earth
was separated from the sun and had absorbed the watery element
within itself. Their feeling of fellowship with the spiritual world
was especially slight at the beginning of earth-life. Only when
the activities of the Archangels, and more especially of the

[212]

Angels, influenced the inner imaginative life, did they feel this
connection to any degree. On the other hand, at the beginning of
the earth-period they were full of active impulses for performing
deeds which can be accomplished under earthly conditions only.

In them the extremities were particularly strongly developed.

When the Moon-forces, before the separation of the moon
from the earth, tended more and more to harden the latter, it
happened that among the descendants of the embryos left behind

172

An Outline of Occult Science
upon the earth by man, there were some in whom human souls
returning from the disembodied state could no longer incarnate in
consequence of the Moon-forces. The form of these descendants
was too much solidified and through the Moon-forces, had
become too unlike the human form to be able to reassume it.

Consequently certain human souls no longer found it possible,
under these circumstances, to return to earth. Only the ripest and
strongest of these souls felt competent to transform the earth-
body during its growth, so that it could blossom into a human
form. Only a portion of the bodily descendants of man became
the vehicles of earthly human beings. Another part, because of
its solidified form, was able to receive only souls on a lower
level than those of men. But there was one group of human
souls, however, which was prevented from participating in the
earth-evolution of that time. In this way they were driven to
embark on another course.

[213]

There were souls who, as far back as the separation of the
sun from the earth, found no place on the latter.

For their
further evolution they were removed to a planet which, under
the guidance of cosmic beings, was detached from the universal
world-substance,—that substance of which the earth formed a
part at the beginning of its physical evolution, and from which the
sun had separated. This planet, in its physical expression, is the
one known to outer science as “Jupiter.” (Here we are speaking of
celestial bodies, planets, and their names exactly in the sense of
a more ancient science, and as is in harmony with occult science.

Just as the physical earth is only the physical expression of a
great psycho-spiritual organism, so is every other celestial body.

And as the seer does not denote only the physical planet by the
word “earth,” nor only the physical fixed star by “sun,” so when
speaking of “Jupiter,” “Mars,” and the other planets, he signifies
far-reaching spiritual relationships. The form and mission of the
heavenly bodies have, in the nature of things, been essentially
changed since the times of which we are here speaking,—in a

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

173
certain respect even their position in celestial space has been
changed. It is possible only for one who follows with the seer's
vision the evolution of those celestial bodies back to remote ages
of the past, to apprehend the connection of contemporary planets
with their predecessors.) On Jupiter the souls that have been
described continued their evolution.

And later, when the earth was tending more and more toward
solidification, still another abode had to be prepared for souls

[214]

who even though they were able to occupy the solidified bodies
for a time, could no longer do so when this solidification
had progressed too far. An appropriate place for their further
evolution was prepared on “Mars.” Even as far back as the time
when the soul was still united with the sun, and was incorporating
the sun's air elements within itself, certain souls were proving
unfit to participate in the earth's evolution.

They were too
powerfully affected by the earthly bodily form. Accordingly,
even at that time, they had to be withdrawn from the direct
influence of the Sun-forces. These had to influence them from
without. The planet Saturn became the scene of their further
evolution.

Thus, in the course of the earth's evolution, the number of
human forms decreased, and forms appeared which had not
embodied human souls. These were able to receive only astral
bodies as the human physical and etheric bodies on the old

Moon had done. While the earth was becoming depopulated as
far as human beings were concerned, these other beings were
colonizing it.

Eventually all human souls would have been
compelled to leave the earth if, by detaching the Moon from it,
a way had not been provided to preserve those human bodies
which at that time could still harbor human souls. It was made
possible for these, during their earth life, to withdraw the human
ego from the effects of the Moon-forces coming directly from the
earth, thus allowing it to mature sufficiently within themselves

[215]

until it could be exposed directly to those forces. As long as the

174

An Outline of Occult Science
embryo was developing within man, it was under the influence
of those beings who, under the leadership of the mightiest of
their number, had detached the moon from the earth in order to
conduct the evolution of the latter over a critical point.

When the earth had developed the air element within it, astral
beings were present as described above, who had belonged to the
old Moon and who had been left behind. They had fallen short
even of the lowest human souls in their evolution. They became
the souls of those forms which already before the separation
of the Sun had to be abandoned by man. These beings are
the ancestors of the animal kingdom. As time went on, they
developed especially those organs which in man thus far only
existed as appendages. Their astral body had to work on the
physical and etheric bodies in the same way as did the human
astral body during the old Moon-period. Now the animals which
had thus come into existence had souls which could not dwell in
the individual animals. The soul extended its being also to the
descendant. Virtually, animals descended from one form have
a soul in common. Only when the descendant diverges from
the ancestral type through special influences, does a new animal
soul become incarnated. In this sense, in accordance with occult
science, we can speak of a species or group-soul, in animals.

[216]

Something of a similar nature took place at the time of the
separation of sun and earth. There came forth from the watery
element, forms no further evolved than man was before the old

Moon-evolution. They could only receive an impression from
anything of an astral nature when the latter influenced them from
without. This could not happen until after the departure of the
sun from the earth. Whenever the sun-period of the earth set in,
the astral element in the sun stimulated these forms in such a
way that they formed their vital body out of the etheric part of
the earth. When the sun turned away from the earth, that etheric
body was again dissolved into the common earth-life. And as a
result of the co-operation of the astral part of the sun with the

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

175
etheric part of the earth, there emerged from the watery element
those physical forms which became the ancestors of the present
vegetable kingdom.

Man became an individualized soul-being on earth. His astral
body, which had been poured into him on the Moon through
the Lords of Motion, now became organized on earth into the
sentient-intellectual-and consciousness-souls.

And when the
consciousness-soul had progressed so far that it was able to form
for itself during earth-life, a body adapted to that life, the Lords of Form endowed that body with a spark from their fire. The “ego”

was enkindled within it. Every time man left the physical body
he was in the spiritual world, in which he met the beings who,
during the Saturn, Sun, and Moon evolutions, had given him
his physical, etheric, and astral bodies, and who had developed

[217]

them as far as the earth-stage. Since the spark of ego had been
enkindled during earth-life, there had also come about a change
in the disembodied life. Up to this point of evolution, man had
had no independence in the spiritual world. Within that world
he did not feel himself a separate being, but as though he were
a member of the exalted organism which was composed of the
beings superior to him. The “ego experience” on earth now takes
effect also in the spiritual world. Henceforth man feels himself
to be, to a certain degree, a unit in that world. But he feels also
that he is unceasingly linked with it. In the disembodied state he
again finds the Lords of Form, in a higher aspect, and this aspect
he had perceived in their manifestation on earth by means of the
spark of his ego.

At the separation of the moon from the earth, the disembodied
soul began to have experiences in the spiritual world which were
connected with that separation. To develop such human forms
upon earth which could receive soul individuality, only became
possible through the fact that a part of the shaping forces passed
over from the Earth to the Moon. Thus human individuality came
within the sphere of the Moon-beings. And in the disembodied

176

An Outline of Occult Science
state the reminiscence of earthly individuality could only operate
because, even in that state, the soul remained within the sphere of
those mighty spirits who had brought about the separation of the

[218]

moon. The process worked in such a manner that immediately
after leaving the earth-body the soul could only see the exalted

Sun-beings as though in a lustre reflected from the Moon-beings.

And it was only when sufficiently prepared by gazing at that
reflected splendor, that the soul attained to the vision of the
exalted Sun-beings themselves.

The mineral kingdom of the earth also arose out of what was
ejected from human evolution in general. Its structures are what
remained solidified after the moon was detached from the earth.

The only soul-element which felt attracted to those structures
was that which had been left behind at the Saturn stage, and was
therefore only adapted for developing physical forms. All the
occurrences treated of here and in what follows were enacted
in the course of exceedingly long periods. But the question of
chronology cannot be entered into here.

The events described, present the evolution of the earth
from without. Seen spiritually from within, the facts present
themselves as follows: The spiritual beings who drew the moon
out of the earth and incorporated their own existence with the
moon,—thus becoming earth-moon beings,—brought about a
certain formation of the human organism by means of the forces
which they sent to the earth from the moon. Their influence
affected the “ego” which man had acquired, and made itself felt
in the interplay of that “ego” with the astral, etheric, and physical
bodies. They made it possible for man to reflect within himself
consciously and to reproduce within his cognition, the wisdom

[219]

revealed in the cosmos.

It will be remembered that during
the old Moon-period man, owing to the separation from the sun
at the time, acquired a certain independence in his organism,
a more unfettered stage of consciousness than that which he
had been able to derive directly from the Sun-spirits.

This

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

177
free, independent consciousness—a heritage from the old Moon-
evolution—appeared again during the earth-period in question.

But it was just this consciousness which, through the influence
of the described earth-moon beings, could again be brought into
union and harmony with the universe and be made a reflection of
it. This would have happened if no other influence had asserted
itself. Without that influence, man would have become a being
whose consciousness would not have reflected the world in
pictures of cognition, through his own free volition, but through
natural necessity. But things did not happen in this way. At the
time when the moon split off, certain spiritual beings interposed
in human evolution who had retained so much of their Moon
nature that they could not take part in the exodus of the sun from
the earth, and were shut out from the influence of the spirits
who from the earth-moon had exerted their activity upon the
earth. These spirits with the old Moon nature were, so to say,
banished to the earth, but with an irregular development. In their

Moon-nature was that which had rebelled against the Sun-spirits
during the old Moon-evolution, and which had so far been a
blessing to man that it had led him to a free, independent state of

[220]

consciousness. The consequences of the peculiar development
of these spirits during the earth-period entailed their becoming
adversaries of the spirits who, acting from the moon, desired
to make human consciousness an automatic reflector of the
universe. What had helped man to a higher state of development
of the old Moon, proved to be in opposition to the possibilities
which had arisen through the evolution of the earth.

The
opposing forces had brought with them from their Moon nature
the power of working upon the human astral body, namely,—as
above indicated,—the power of making it independent. They
exercised that power by giving the astral body a certain degree
of independence—even throughout the earth-period—compared
with the automatic (involuntary) state of consciousness which
had been brought about by the spirits of the earth-moon.

178

An Outline of Occult Science

It is difficult to express in the language of to-day the effects on
man, in that far-off time of the spiritual beings referred to. They
must not be thought of as analogous to natural influences of the
present time, nor yet as similar to the influence of one human
being on another, when the first awakens in the second inner
powers of consciousness by words which help the second person
to understand something, or which stimulate him to virtue or vice.

The effect referred to as operative in that primeval age was not a
force of nature but a spiritual influence, conveyed in a spiritual
way, which descended upon man as a spiritual influx from higher

[221]

spirits, conformable with man's state of consciousness at that
time. If we think of this influence as a force of nature we
altogether miss its essential reality. If we say that the spirits with the old Moon nature tempted man in order to lead him astray for
their own ends, we are using a symbolical expression, which is
good as long as we remember that it is but a symbol and are at
the same time clear in our minds that a spiritual fact underlies
the symbol.

The influence brought to bear on man by the spirits who
had remained behind during the Moon-evolution had a two-
fold result. Man's consciousness was divested of the character of
being merely a mirror of the universe, because the possibility was
aroused in the human astral body of regulating and controlling,
by means of this astral body, the images in the consciousness.

Man became the ruler of his own knowledge. But on the other
hand it was the astral body that was the starting point of that
rulership, and consequently the ego set over the astral body
came to be continually dependent upon it.

Hence man was
from this time forth exposed to the lasting influences of a lower
element in his nature. It was possible for him in his life to sink
below the height on which he had been placed by the spirits
of the earth-moon in the course of the world's progress. And
subsequently he was open to the lasting influence on his nature of
the irregularly evolved Moon-spirits. We may call these Moon-

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

179
spirits Luciferian, to distinguish them from the other spirits who,
from the earth-moon, made consciousness into a mirror of the

[222]

universe, without bestowing free will. The Luciferian spirits
endowed man with the possibility of developing free activity in
his consciousness, and at the same time created the possibility of
error and evil.

As a result of these events man was brought into a different
connection with the Sun-spirits from that which had been destined
for him by the spirits of the earth-moon. These wished to develop
the reflecting human consciousness in such a manner that within
the whole life of the human soul, the influence of the Sun-spirits
would have become dominant. These purposes were thwarted,
and an opposition was thus created in human nature between
the influence of the Sun-Spirits and that of the spirits who were
irregularly developed on the old Moon. Owing to this opposition,
the inability to recognize the physical Sun-influences as such
also arose in man; they were hidden by the earthly impressions
of the outer world. Filled with these impressions, the astral part
of man was drawn into the sphere of the ego. This ego,—which
otherwise would have felt only the spark of fire bestowed on it
by the Lords of Form, and which would have submitted to the
bidding of those spirits in everything that had to do with external
fire,—henceforth worked upon external heat phenomena through
the element with which it had itself been inoculated. A bond
of attraction was thereby established between the ego and the
earth-fire.

In this way man became more involved in earthly materiality
than had been ordained for him, which was effected through the

[225]

earth-moon spirits in man's body. The real individual ego was
thereby set free from the mere earth-ego so that although man
during earth-life only partially felt himself to be an ego, he at
the same time felt his earth-ego to be a continuation of that of
his ancestors through the generations. The soul was conscious
of a kind of “group-ego” in earth-life, dating back to remote

180

An Outline of Occult Science
ancestors; man felt himself to be a member of this group. Only
in the disembodied state could the individual ego be conscious
of itself as a separate being. But this state of isolation was
impaired because the ego was still burdened with a memory of
the earth-consciousness (earth-ego.) This memory clouded its
vision of the spiritual world, which began to be covered as with
a veil between death and birth just as it is hidden from physical
vision upon earth.

The many changes which took place in the spiritual world
while human evolution was passing through the conditions just
described, found physical expression in the gradual adjustment
of the mutual relations existing between the sun, moon, and earth

(and, moreover, between other celestial bodies).

The alternation of day and night stands out as one result of
those relations. (The motions of celestial bodies are regulated
by the beings who inhabit them. The earth's motion, of which
day and night are the result, was induced by the mutual relations
of various spirits superior to man. The moon's motion had been

[226]

brought about in the same way, in order that after the separation
of the moon from the earth, the Lords of Form might, by means
of the revolution of the former around the latter, work upon
the human physical body in the right way, and with the right
rhythm.) The ego and astral body of man now worked within the
physical and etheric bodies by day; at night that activity ceased:

for the ego and the astral body then left the physical and etheric
bodies and came wholly within the sphere of the Sons of Life or

Angels, the Sons of Fire or Archangels, the Sons of Personality,
and the Lords of Form. Besides the Lords of Form, the Lords of

Motion, of Wisdom and the Thrones also included the physical
and etheric bodies in their sphere of influence at this time. The
injurious effects produced on man by the errors of his astral body
during the day, could thus be counter-balanced.

As people upon Earth now again multiplied there was no reason
why human souls should not incarnate in their descendants.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

181

The earth moon-forces now acted in such a way that under
their influence the human bodies became entirely capable of
incarnating human souls. The souls who had previously removed
to Mars, Jupiter and the other planets were now guided to earth,
and there was thus a soul ready for each human being born in
the physical line of descent. This went on through long periods
so that the immigration of souls to earth corresponded to the
increase of human beings. Souls now leaving their bodies at
physical death retained the echo of their earthly individuality
as a memory in the disembodied state. This memory acted in

[227]

such a way that whenever a body was born on earth suitable
for them, they again incarnated it. Consequently there were
among the human descendants some whose souls came from
without and who appeared on earth for the first time since its
very earliest periods, and there were others whose souls had
continually incarnated on the earth. In subsequent periods of
earthly evolution the number of young souls appearing for the
first time grows ever smaller and smaller, and the reincarnated
souls become more and more numerous; yet for long ages the
human race was composed of the two types of beings conditioned
by these facts.

Henceforth man on earth felt himself united with his
forefathers through the group-ego which he had in common
with them. On the other hand, the experience of the individual
ego was all the stronger in the disembodied state between death
and a new birth. The souls which entered human bodies from
celestial space were in a different position from those which
had one or more earthly lives behind them. The former, as
souls entering upon the physical earth-life, brought with them
only the conditions to which the higher spiritual world and their
experiences outside the sphere of earth had subjected them. The
others had, by their actions in former lives, added conditions of
their own. The fate of the first was determined only by facts
lying outside of the new earth-conditions; that of the reincarnate

182

An Outline of Occult Science

[228]

souls is also determined by what they themselves have done in
former lives under earthly conditions. Individual human Karma
makes its first appearance simultaneously with reincarnation.

Because the human etheric body was withdrawn from the
influence of the astral body in the manner above indicated, the
generative faculty was not included in the sphere of human
consciousness, but was under the sway of the spiritual world.

When the time had come for a soul to descend to earth, procreative
impulses arose in the human being.

The entire process, to
a certain degree was veiled in mysterious obscurity as far as
earthly consciousness was concerned. The consequences of this
partial separation of the etheric from the physical body were felt
during earthly life also. The qualities of the etheric body were
capable of being especially heightened by spiritual influence.

In the life of the soul this expressed itself through a special
perfection of memory. Independent logical thought was at this
period only in its most rudimentary stage in man; on the other
hand, the faculty of memory was almost unlimited. Externally
it appeared as though man had direct knowledge of the working
forces of every living being. He had at his disposal the vital
and generative forces of the animal and, more especially, of the
vegetable kingdom. He was able, for instance, to draw out of a
plant the force which impels it to grow, and to use that force,
just as we now use the forces of inanimate nature; for example,

[229]

the power dormant in coal which is extricated and used for
propelling engines.22

The inner soul life of man was also transformed in many
different ways by the Lucifer influence. Many kinds of feelings
and emotions due to it might be instanced. Of these only one can
be mentioned. Previous to this influence, the human soul acted,
in that which it had to shape and to do, according to the purposes
of higher spiritual beings. The plan of everything that was to be

22 Further particulars on this subject will be found in my book, Atlantis and Lemuria, which deals with man's ancestors.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

183
carried out was determined from the beginning. And in proportion
to the degree to which human consciousness was evolved, it
was able to foresee how things must develop in the future in
accordance with that preconceived plan. That consciousness of
the future was lost when the veil of earthly perceptions was
woven across the manifestations of higher spiritual beings and in
these the real forces of the Sun-spirits were hidden. Henceforth
the future became uncertain, and in consequence of this the
possibility of fear was implanted in the soul. Fear is a direct
result of error.

It is however evident that through the Luciferian influence,
man became independent of certain definite forces to which
he had previously submitted without the exercise of his will.

Henceforth he was able to form resolutions of his own. Freedom
is the result of the Luciferian influence, and fear and similar

[230]

feelings are only the phenomena attendant on the evolution of
human freedom.

Spiritually seen, fear makes its appearance in this way. Within
the earth-forces, under whose influence man had come by means
of the Luciferian powers, other beings were operating, which
had developed irregularly much earlier in the course of evolution
than the Luciferian powers. With the earth-forces man admitted
into his nature the influence of these other beings. They gave
the quality of fear to feelings, which without them would have
operated quite differently. They may be called Ahrimanic beings.

They are the same that Goethe calls Mephistophelian.

Although the Luciferian influence manifested itself at first only
in the most advanced individuals, it soon spread to others. The
descendants of the advanced individuals intermingled with the
less progressive described above, and in this way the Luciferian
force was conveyed to the latter.

But the etheric body of
these souls returning from the different planets could not be
protected to the same extent as that of the descendants of those
who remained on earth. The protection of the etheric body of

184

An Outline of Occult Science
these descendants emanated from an exalted Being in Whom
was vested the leadership of the cosmic when the separation of
the sun from the earth took place. That Being is the Ruler of
the Kingdom of the Sun. With him those lofty spirits, whose
cosmic development was sufficiently matured, departed for their

[231]

dwelling-place in the Sun. But there were other beings who had
not reached such a height at the separation of the sun; these were
obliged to seek other spheres. It was through their instrumentality
that Jupiter and other planets became detached from that general
cosmic substance of which, at the outset, the earthly physical
organism consisted. Jupiter now became the abode of those
beings who were not highly enough developed to live on the
sun, and the most advanced of these became the leader. As
the Leader of the Sun evolution became the “higher ego” which
worked in the etheric body of the descendants of those who had
remained on earth, so the Jupiter leader became that “higher
ego” which manifested as a common consciousness in certain
other human beings. Those were the human beings descending
from the intermixing of those who had only appeared on earth at
the time of the air-element and had gone over to Jupiter. These
human beings may be called, in conformity with occult science,

“Jupiter-humanity.” They were scions of the human race which
had adopted human souls far back in that ancient time; but who,
at the beginning of earthly evolution, were not yet mature enough
to take part in the first contact with fire. They were souls midway
between the human and animal soul-kingdoms.

Now there were other beings who, under the leadership of the
greatest one among them had detached Mars from the general
cosmic substance, to make it their dwelling place. Under their

[232]

influence there
arose a third kind of humanity, formed by
interbreeding,—the “Mars-humanity.” (This knowledge throws
light upon the origin of the formation of the planets of our solar
system; for all the members of that system originated through
the various stages of maturity reached by the beings inhabiting

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

185
them.

But of course it is not possible to enter into all the
details of cosmic differentiation here.) Those people who felt
in their etheric body the influence of the exalted Sun-being

Himself may be called “Sun-humanity.” The Being Who lived
in them as the Higher Ego—of course only in the race, not in the
individual,—is the same to Whom various names were given in
later times, when man had gained conscious knowledge of Him.

It is he Who appears to the human race today as the Christ.

“Saturn-humanity” is also to be distinguished at that time.

The “higher ego” of this race appeared as a being who, with his
associates, had been forced to leave the general cosmic substance
before the separation of the Sun. In these individuals not only the
etheric body but also the physical body was partly exempt from
the Luciferian influence. But the etheric body was nevertheless
not well enough protected in the less developed races of mankind
to be able to sufficiently resist the influences of the Luciferian
beings. These individuals could arbitrarily use the spark of the
ego within them to such a degree that they were able to call forth
mighty and destructive effects of fire around them. The result
was a mighty terrestrial catastrophe. A large part of the inhabited

[233]

earth was wrecked by fiery storms, and with it the human beings
that had fallen into sin. Only a very small part of those who had
remained untouched by sin, were able to take refuge in a region
which had so far been shielded from the fatal human influence.

The country occupying that part of the earth now covered by
the Atlantic Ocean proved to be peculiarly well fitted for the
abode of the new human race. Thither that part of humanity
repaired which had preserved purity.

Only stray groups of
humanity inhabited other regions. Occult science gives the name
of “Atlantis” to that part of the earth which once existed between
the present continents of Europe, Africa, and America. (This
particular stage of human evolution has its special nomenclature
in theosophical literature. The period preceding the Atlantean is
called the Lemurian age, whereas that during which the Moon-

186

An Outline of Occult Science
forces had not yet fully developed is called the Hyperborean age.

This is preceded by yet another, which coincides with the earliest
period of the evolution of the physical earth. Biblical tradition
describes the period before the influence of the Lucifer-beings
came into play as the Paradise time, and the descent to earth, or
entanglement of humanity in the sense-world, as the expulsion
from Paradise.)

The Atlantean period of evolution was the real time of
separation into the Saturn, Sun, Jupiter, and Mars humanities.

Up to that time only predispositions for this separation had

[234]

been developed. The division between the state of waking and
sleeping had special consequences, which appeared particularly
in the Atlantean race. During the night the human astral body and
ego were in the sphere of the beings superior to man, as far up as
the Sons of Personality. Man could perceive the Sons of Life (the

Angels) and the Sons of Fire (the Archangels) through that part
of his etheric body which was not united with the physical body.

For he was able to remain united, during sleep, with that part of
his etheric body which was not interpenetrated by the physical
body. It is true, his perception of the Sons of Personality was
vague, owing to the Luciferian influence; but not only the Angels
and Archangels became visible to man in this condition but also
those beings who were not able to enter upon earthly existence
because they had lagged behind on the Sun or Moon, and were
therefore obliged to remain in the psycho-spiritual world. But
man, by means of the Luciferian influence, drew them into his
soul which was separated from his physical body during sleep.

Thus he came in contact with beings whose influence was highly
corrupting. They increased in his soul the propensity for error;
especially the tendency to misuse the powers of growth and
reproduction, which since the separation of the physical and
etheric bodies were now under his control.

Certain human beings of the Atlantean period however became
entangled in the sense world only to a very limited degree.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

187

Through them, the Luciferian influence became, instead of a

[235]

hindrance to human evolution, a means of further progress. It
enabled them to develop knowledge of earthly matters sooner
than would otherwise have been possible. They sought to expel
error from their imaginative life and to interpret, by means of
cosmic phenomena, the original purposes of spiritual beings.

They kept themselves free from those impulses and desires of
the astral body which were directed merely toward the sense-
world. Hence they became more and more free from the errors
of the astral body. This resulted in a condition through which
they were able to confine their perceptions to that part of the
etheric body which was separated from the physical body in the
manner described above. Under these conditions the capacity
of the physical body for perception was practically extinguished
and the physical body itself was as though dead. For through
the etheric body, these individuals were wholly united with the
kingdom of the Lords of Form, and were able to learn from them
how they were being guided and directed by that exalted Being
the “Christ,” who was the Leader at the time of the separation
of sun and earth. These people were Initiates. But since human
individuality had been brought into the sphere of the Moon-
beings, as described above, these Initiates could not as a rule
come into direct contact with the Christ-Being, they could only
see it as a reflection, shown them by the Moon-beings. Thus they
did not see the Christ-Being directly, but only the reflection of
its glory.

[236]

They became leaders of the rest of humanity, to whom they
were able to impart the mysteries they had seen. They attracted
disciples, to whom they communicated the methods for attaining
the condition which leads to Initiation. Only those could attain
knowledge of the Christ who belonged to the Sun-humanity
mentioned above. They cultivated their mystic learning, and the
occupations which promoted it, at a particular spot which, in
occult science terminology may be called the Christ oracle, or

188

An Outline of Occult Science

Sun oracle, the term “oracle” being used to denote a place where
the purposes of spiritual beings are unveiled.

Other oracles were called into being by the members of the

Saturn, Mars, and Jupiter humanities. The intuitive vision of their

Initiates was confined to seeing those beings who were revealed
to them in their etheric bodies as their respective “higher egos.”

Thus adherents of the Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars wisdom arose.

Besides these methods of Initiation, there were others for those
who had assimilated too much of the Luciferian spirit to allow
as large a part of the etheric body to be separated from the
physical body as was the case with the Sun humanity. Nor could
they be brought to the revelation of the Christ through these
conditions. Because their astral body was more influenced by the

Lucifer principle, they were obliged to undergo a more difficult
preparation, and then, in a less disembodied state than the others,

[237]

they were able to receive the revelation, not indeed of the Christ

Himself, but of other exalted beings.

There were beings who, although they had left the earth at
the separation of the sun, did not stand on such a high level
that they were able to continue taking part in the Sun evolution.

They formed an abode for themselves away from the sun, after
its separation from the earth: this was Venus. Their leader was
the being who now became a “higher ego” to these Initiates and
their adherents. A similar thing happened with the leading spirit
of Mercury for another group of people. In this way the Venus
and Mercury oracles arose. One kind of human beings, who
had most completely absorbed the Luciferian influence, could
reach only one of the higher beings who, with his associates,
had been the first to be expelled from the Sun evolution. This
being has no particular planet in cosmic space, but still lives
within the periphery of the earth, with which he was once more
united after the return from the sun. The group of people, to
whom this being was revealed as its “higher ego” may be called
the followers of the Vulcan oracle. Their attention was more

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

189
directed to earthly phenomena than that of the other Initiates.

They laid the first foundations of what afterwards became the
human arts and sciences. On the other hand, the Mercury Initiates
established the study of the more super-sensible things; and the

Venus Initiates did this to a still greater extent.

The Vulcan, Mercury, and Venus Initiates differed
from

[238]

those of Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars in the manner of receiving
their Mysteries; the latter received them more as a revelation from
above, and in a more finished state; whereas the former gained
their knowledge more in the form of their own thoughts—in the
form of ideas. The Christ Initiates occupied a middle position.

While having a direct revelation, they acquired the capacity
for clothing their Mysteries in a human form of conception.

The Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars Initiates were obliged to express
themselves more in symbols; the Christ, Venus, Mercury, and

Vulcan Initiates were able to impart their knowledge more
through ideas or concepts.

Whatever knowledge of this kind reached Atlantean humanity
came indirectly through the Initiates. But the rest of mankind
also received special faculties through the Lucifer principle; for,
through the intervention of lofty cosmic beings, what otherwise
might have wrought ruin was transformed into good. One of
these faculties was that of speech. This was brought about by
the condensation of man's physical body and by the separation
of part of his etheric from his physical body. For some time after
the separations of the moon, man felt himself connected with
his physical ancestors through the group-ego. But this common
consciousness, linking posterity with its ancestors, was gradually
lost in the course of generations. Later descendants had an inner
memory of only their more recent ancestors, no longer of their
earlier forefathers.

It was only in conditions akin to sleep,

[239]

during which mankind came in contact with the spiritual world,
that the remembrance of one ancestor or another again emerged.

Then people thought of themselves as one with that ancestor

190

An Outline of Occult Science
whom they believed to be reappearing in them. This was an
erroneous idea of reincarnation, which arose especially in the
later Atlantean period. The true doctrine of reincarnation could
be learned only in the schools of the Initiates. They could see
how the human soul passes through the disembodied state on its
way from one incarnation to another, and they alone were able
to impart the real truth of the matter to their disciples.

In the remote past which is now under consideration, man's
physical form was very different from his present form. It was
still, to a great extent, the expression of the qualities of his soul.

Man was composed of a softer and more delicate substance than
that which he has since acquired. That which is now solidified in
the limbs was then soft, flexible, and plastic. The bodily structure
of the more psychic and spiritual human beings was delicate,
supple, and expressive. These less evolved spiritually possessed
coarser, heavier, less mobile bodily structures. A high degree
of psychic maturity contracted the extremities, and the Stature
remained small; backwardness of the soul and entanglement in
sensuality were outwardly expressed by gigantic size. While
man was growing to maturity his body was being formed in

[240]

accordance with what was developing in his soul, in a way
which would appear incredible and fabulous to contemporary
ideas. Depraved passions, impulses, and instincts brought in
their train a colossal increase of matter. Man's present physical
form has come about through a contraction, thickening, and
consolidation of the Atlantean human form. And whereas man,
before the Atlantean period, had been an exact image of his soul-
nature the events of the Atlantean evolution bore within them
the causes which lead to the formation of post-Atlantean man,
whose physical form is solid and comparatively independent of
the qualities of the soul. (The forms of the animal kingdom
had solidified during far more remote Earth periods than those
of man.) The laws now governing the shaping of forms in the
kingdom of nature certainly did not prevail in the remote past.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

191

Toward the middle of the Atlantean evolution a calamity
gradually befell humanity. The Mysteries of the Initiates had
to be carefully kept secret from those who had not purified
their astral bodies from sin. Had they gained insight into that
hidden knowledge, into the laws by means of which higher
beings directed the forces of nature, they would have employed
those forces thus placed at their disposal for their own perverted
needs and passions. The danger was all the greater because
mankind was coming, as has been described, into the sphere of
lower spiritual beings, who could not take part in the regular
evolution of the earth and were therefore working against it.

These persistently influenced humanity in such a way as to

[241]

instil into it interests which were actually directed against human
welfare. But mankind still had the power to employ the forces of
growth and reproduction belonging to animal and human nature
in their own service.

Not only humanity in general, but even some of the Initiates
yielded to temptation from low spiritual beings. They were
induced to employ the supersensible forces mentioned above
for a purpose which ran counter to human evolution. And for
this purpose they sought out associates who were not initiated,
and who made use of the secrets of the supersensible forces of
nature for low ends. The result was a great corruption of human
nature. The evil spread further and further; and since the forces
of growth and generation, if torn from their original sphere and
used independently, have a mysterious connection with certain
forces working in air and water, there were thus unchained,
through human action, mighty, destructive natural forces which
led to the gradual ruin of the Atlantean territory by the agency
of air and water catastrophes. Atlantean humanity was obliged
to migrate—i. e., that portion of it which did not perish in the
storms.

In consequence of these storms the surface of the earth was
altered. On one side, Europe, Asia, and Africa gradually assumed

192

An Outline of Occult Science
their present shape; on the other, America appeared.

Great
migrations took place to these countries. Those migrations which

[242]

were directed eastward from Atlantis are especially important for
us of today. Europe, Asia, and Africa were gradually colonized
by the descendants of the Atlanteans. Various peoples fixed
their abode in these continents. They were at different stages
of development, and also at different levels of corruption. And
with them came the Initiates, guardians of the oracle-Mysteries.

They established sanctuaries in various parts, in which the cults
of Jupiter, Venus, etc., were cultivated sometimes in a good,
sometimes in an evil manner.

The betrayal of the Vulcan

Mysteries exercised an especially unfavourable influence, for
the attention of their adherents was mostly centered on earthly
matters. By this betrayal, mankind was made dependent on
spiritual beings who, as a result of their past evolution, rejected
everything emanating from the spiritual world which had been
evolved through the separation of the earth from the sun. In
accordance with the tendency they had thus developed, they
worked upon just that element in man which was formed through
his having perceptions of the sense-world, behind which the
spiritual world lies hidden. Henceforth beings acquired great
influence over many of the human inhabitants of the earth, and
indeed their influence asserted itself more and more by depriving
mankind of the feeling for spiritual things.

Since the size, form, and flexibility of the physical human
body were still largely affected by the qualities of the soul, the
consequence of the betrayal of the Mysteries also appeared in
changes of the human race in these respects. Wherever the

[243]

corruption of humanity manifested itself especially in the abuse
of supersensible powers for the satisfaction of lower inclinations,
desires and passions, unsightly human shapes, grotesque in form
and size were the result. These were not able to survive the

Atlantean period, and became extinct. Post-Atlantean humanity
was formed physically from those Atlantean ancestors in whom

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

193
such a solidification of the bodily form had taken place that it
no longer yielded to those powers of the soul which had now
become perverted.

There was a certain period in the Atlantean evolution during
which, by means of the law ruling in and around the earth,
just those conditions prevailed which tended to solidify man's
bodily form. Those human racial types which had been solidified
before this period could, it is true, reproduce themselves for a
long time, yet the souls incarnating in them gradually became so
cramped that they had to die out. It is true that some of these
race-types survived into the post-Atlantean times; those which
had remained sufficiently agile lasted even for a very long time
in modified form. Human forms which had remained flexible,
after the period just described, became bodies for such souls
as had, in a large measure, undergone the pernicious influence
of the betrayal described above. These forms were destined to
speedy extinction.

In consequence of what had thus happened, beings had brought
their influence to bear upon human evolution, since the middle
of the Atlantean period, beings whose influence tended to make
mankind live
in the physical sense world in an unspiritual

[244]

manner.

This went so far that, instead of man's seeing the
real form of that world, phantoms, hallucinations, and illusions
of every kind appeared to him.

Mankind was exposed not
merely to the Luciferian influence but to that of those other
beings mentioned above, whose leader may be called Ahriman,
according to the appellation given him later in the Persian
civilization. (He is the same as Mephistopheles.) Through this
influence man was subject, after death, to powers which made
him appear even then as a being adhering only to material earthly
conditions. He lost more and more the unobstructed vision of the
events of the spiritual world. He was forced to feel himself in

Ahriman's power, and to a certain extent shut out from intercourse
with the spiritual world.

194

An Outline of Occult Science

There was one oracle-sanctuary of special importance, which
in the universal decline had preserved the ancient cult in its purest
form. It was one of the Christ oracles, and on that account it was
able to preserve not only the Christ Mystery itself but those of the
other oracles as well. For in the manifestation of the loftiest of
the Sun-spirits, were also revealed the regents of Saturn, Jupiter,
and the other planets. In the Sun oracle the secret of producing
in some particular human being, such human etheric bodies as
had been possessed by the best of the Jupiter, Mercury, and other

Initiates was known. By means of the methods used for this

[245]

purpose, which cannot be further dealt with here, impressions
of the best etheric bodies of the ancient Initiates were preserved,
in order that they might subsequently be stamped upon suitable
individuals. The same process could be employed with the astral
bodies of the Venus, Mercury, and Vulcan Initiates.

At a certain time the Leader of the Christ Initiates found

Himself isolated with a few associates, to whom He was able to
impart, to a very limited extent only, the mysteries of the cosmos.

For those associates were individuals who were endowed with
the natural ability to permit the least possible degree of separation
between the physical and etheric bodies. They were altogether, at
that time, the best possible individuals for promoting the further
progress of humanity. Their experiences in the realm of sleep
had become rarer and rarer. The spiritual world was more and
more closed to them. Therefore they were also lacking in the
comprehension of all that had been revealed to man in ancient
times when he was not in his physical, but only in his etheric
body. Those immediately surrounding the leader of the Christ
oracle were the farthest advanced with regard to the union of
the physical body with that part of the etheric body which had
previously been separated from it. This union came about in
the human being little by little, as a result of the transformation
which had taken place in the Atlantean continent and the earth in
general.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

195

The physical and etheric bodies of man fitted more and more
into each other. Hence the memory lost its former unlimited

[246]

capacity, and the human life of thought began. That part of the
etheric which was united with the physical body transformed the
physical brain into an actual instrument of thought, and man from
this time, first really felt his “ego” within his physical body. Self-
consciousness awoke. This was at first the case with only a limited
number of the human race, pre-eminently with the associates of
the leader of the Christ oracle. The bulk of humanity, scattered
over Europe, Asia, and Africa, retained in varying degrees the
remnant of the old conditions of consciousness. Hence they had
direct experience of the supersensible world.

The associates of the Christ Initiate were people of highly
developed intelligence but of less experience in supersensible
spheres than any of their contemporaries. The Initiate journeyed
with them to a country in central Asia. He wished them to
be guarded as much as possible from contact with those of
less developed consciousness. He instructed his followers along
the lines of the mysteries which had been revealed to him
and especially did he do this with their descendants.

Thus
he gathered round him a people who had received into their
hearts the impulses corresponding to the Mysteries of the Christ

Initiation. Out of this company he chose the seven best, that
they might be endowed with the etheric and astral bodies which
bore the impress of the etheric bodies of the seven best Atlantean

Initiates. Thus he educated a successor to each of the Christ,

Saturn, Jupiter, etc., Initiates. These seven Initiates became the

[247]

teachers and leaders of the people who, in the post-Atlantean
period, had colonized the south of Asia, especially ancient India.

Since these great teachers were endowed with the etheric bodies
of their spiritual ancestors, the contents of their astral body, that
is, the science and knowledge they themselves had worked out,
was far below what was revealed to them through their etheric
body. Therefore if these revelations were to speak within them,

196

An Outline of Occult Science
they were obliged to impose silence on their own science and
knowledge. Then the exalted beings who had also spoken to
their spiritual ancestors spoke out of and through them. Except
during the times when these beings were speaking through
them, they were simple people, endowed with the measure of
intelligence and feeling which they had cultivated and worked
out for themselves.

There lived at this time in India a race of people who had
retained a particularly vivid remembrance of the ancient soul-
condition of the Atlanteans, which permitted experiences in the
spiritual world. Moreover, the heart and soul of a great number of
these people were powerfully attracted by such experiences. By a
wise decree of fate, the majority of the race had come to southern

Asia from among the best portions of the Atlantean population.

Besides this majority, other Atlanteans had migrated thither at
different times. The Christ Initiate, referred to above, appointed
his seven great disciples to be the teachers of this association
of people, to whom they imparted their wisdom and precepts.

[248]

Many of these ancient Indians needed but little preparation
for reviving within them the scarcely extinct faculties leading to
observation of the supersensible world. For longing after that
world was really a fundamental quality of the Indian soul. It was
felt that man's original home was in that world. He is transplanted
out of it into this one, which offers only outer sense-observation
and the intelligence connected with it.

The supersensible world was felt to be the real world, and the sense-world to be a deception of the human power of observation,
an illusion (Maya). By every possible means these people strove
to open up a view of the real world. They could take no interest
in the illusory sense-world, or at any rate only so far as it proved
to be a veil for the supersensible. The power going out from
the Seven Great Teachers to such people as these, was a mighty
one. What they were able to reveal entered deeply into the

Indian soul; and since the possession of the transmitted etheric

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

197
and astral bodies invested the teachers with lofty powers, they
were also able to work magically on their disciples. They did not
really teach; they worked as though by magic power from one
personality to another. Thus there arose a civilization completely
saturated with supersensible wisdom. The contents of the books
of wisdom of the Hindus, the Vedas, do not give the original
form of the lofty wisdom imparted by the great teachers of most
ancient times, only a feeble echo of it. Only the seer's eye,
looking backward is able to find unwritten primeval wisdom

[249]

behind the written words.

A particularly prominent feature of this ancient wisdom is
the harmonious accord of the various wisdom oracles of the

Atlantean time. For each of the Great Teachers was able to
unveil the wisdom of one of these oracles, and these different
aspects were in complete harmony, because behind them all was
the fundamental wisdom of the Christ Initiation. It is true the
teacher who was the successor of the Christ Initiate did not impart
to his disciples what the Christ Initiate himself was able to reveal.

The latter had remained in the background during this period of
evolution. At first he was unable to entrust his high office to
any post-Atlantean. The difference between him and the Christ

Initiate of the Seven Great Indian Teachers was that the former
was able to work his vision of the Christ Mystery completely into
the form of human ideas, whereas the Indian Christ Initiate could
only offer a reflection of the Mystery in signs and symbols; for
his humanly cultivated power of conception did not suffice for
such a Mystery. However, from the union of the Seven Teachers
there resulted a knowledge of the supersensible world, presented
in one great wisdom-panorama, of which only separate portions
could be imparted in the ancient Atlantean oracles. The great

Regents of the cosmos were revealed, and the One great Sun-
spirit, the Hidden One, ruling over those who were manifested
through the seven teachers, was delicately indicated.

[250]

What is here meant by “ancient Indians” is not the same as

198

An Outline of Occult Science
what is usually understood by that term. No outer documents exist
of the period in question. The people usually known as “Indians”

belong to a stage of historical evolution which was developed
long after the time spoken of here. We have to distinguish
a first post-Atlantean period of the earth, in which the Indian
civilization now described was the predominant one; then came a
second post-Atlantean period in which the prevailing civilization
was that which later in this work is called the “ancient Persian,”

and still later was developed the Egypto-Chaldean civilization,
also to be described. During the evolution of these second and
third post-Atlantean epochs, “ancient” India also went through
a second and third epoch, and to this third epoch belongs what
is usually related of ancient India.

What is described here
must therefore not be applied to the “ancient India” mentioned
elsewhere.

Another feature of this ancient Indian civilization is that
which afterward led to the division of the race into castes.

The inhabitants of India were descendants of Atlanteans who
belonged to the various types of Saturn and Jupiter humanities,
etc. By means of supersensible teachings it was seen that it is not
by chance that a soul is incarnated in a particular caste, but that
the soul itself has determined its lot. Such an understanding of
supersensible teachings was made much easier, because it was
possible to revive in many people the inner remembrance of their

[251]

ancestors which has been described above; this, of course, might
also easily lead to an erroneous idea of reincarnation. Just as,
in the Atlantean age, it was only through the Initiates that the
true idea of reincarnation could be realized, so in India, in most
ancient times, it was possible only through direct contact with the
great teachers. It is true that the erroneous idea of reincarnation
mentioned above found the widest acceptance imaginable among
the bands of people who were dispersed over Europe, Asia and

Africa in consequence of the Atlantean catastrophe. And because
the Initiates who had gone astray during the Atlantean evolution

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

199
had imparted the mystery of reincarnation to immature souls,
mankind began to confuse more and more the true with the
false ideas. Many of these people indeed retained a kind of dim
clairvoyance, as a heritage from the Atlantean period. Just as
the Atlanteans had entered the spiritual world during sleep, their
descendants had experience of it in abnormal states, intermediate
between sleeping and waking. Then there arose in these people
the images of the ancient times of their forefathers. They believed
themselves to be reincarnations of people who had lived in those
times. Teachings about reincarnation, which were at variance
with the true ideas of the Initiates, were widely spread over the
earth.

As a result of the long-continued migrations which had taken
place from west to east since the beginning of the Atlantean
catastrophe, a group of people settled in western Asia whose
posterity is known to history as the Persian race and the tribes

[252]

related thereto. Here we look back to a much earlier period
than the historical times of these peoples. Next after the Indian
period, we have first to do with the very early ancestors of the
later Persians, among whom arose the second great civilization
of post-Atlantean evolution. The peoples of this second era had
a different mission from that of the Indians. Their longings and
inclinations were not fixed on the supersensible world alone;
they were also directed toward the physical sense-world, and the
earth became dear to them. They valued what man is able to
acquire on it, and what he is able to win by means of its forces.

Their achievements as a warlike people, and the methods which
they discovered of acquiring the earth's treasures, are connected
with this peculiarity of their nature. There was no danger of their
turning their backs upon the “illusion” of the physical senses in
their yearning after the supersensible, but rather of their entirely
severing the connection of their souls with the supersensible
world, through their appreciation for the physical world.

The oracle-sanctuaries, which had been transferred hither

200

An Outline of Occult Science
from the ancient Atlantean territory, also reflected, in their own
way, the general character of the people. In them forces were
present which it had formerly been possible to acquire through
experiences in the supersensible world, and which could still be
controlled in certain lower forms; these forces were used in the

[253]

sanctuaries to direct the phenomena of nature in such a way as to
make them subservient to man's personal interests. This ancient
people still had a great mastery over those forces of nature which
subsequently withdrew from the influence of the human will. The
guardians of the oracles mastered certain inner forces connected
with fire and other elements. They can be called magicians.

What supersensible knowledge and force they had retained as a
heritage from ancient times was certainly slight in comparison
with man's powers in the remote past. But it nevertheless took
all kinds of forms, from the noble arts, the only object of which
was the welfare of humanity,—down to the most reprehensible
transactions.

The Luciferian influence held sway over these people in
a peculiar manner.

It had brought them into connection
with everything which diverts mankind from the purposes of
those exalted beings who alone would have guided human
evolution, had not the Luciferian influence interposed. Even
those members of this race who were still gifted with some
remnant of the old clairvoyant condition, described above as a
state intermediate between sleeping and waking, felt themselves
powerfully attracted by the lower beings of the spiritual world. In
order to counteract these characteristic qualities it was necessary
that a spiritual impulse should be given to this people.

A
leadership was established among them by the guardian of the

[254]

Mysteries of the Sun oracle, from the same source from which
the spiritual life of ancient India proceeded.

The leader of ancient Persian civilization, who was sent
by the guardian of the Sun oracle to the people now under
consideration, may be designated by the same name as the

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

201
historical Zarathustra, or Zoroaster.

Only the fact must be
emphasized that the personality indicated belongs to a much
earlier period than the historical possessor of the name. In this
connection it is not a question of outer historical research, but of
spiritual knowledge. And any one who instinctively thinks of a
later time in connection with the bearer of the name Zarathustra
may reconcile this idea with occult science on learning that the
historical character represents himself as a successor of the first
great Zarathustra, whose name he took, and in the spirit of whose
teaching he worked.

The impulse which Zarathustra had to give to his people was
to show them that the physical world of sense is not merely the
lifeless material, devoid of spirit, which it appears to a man who
gives himself up exclusively to the influence of the Luciferian
being. To this being man owes his personal independence and
sense of freedom; but it should work within him in harmony
with the opposite spiritual being. With the pre-historic Persians
it was a question of keeping alive the sense of this last-named
spiritual-being. Through their inclination toward the physical
sense world they ran the risk of complete amalgamation with the

Luciferian beings. Now Zarathustra, through the guardian of the

[255]

Sun oracle, had received an Initiation that enabled him to receive
the revelations of the great Sun-spirits. In particular states of
consciousness, brought about by his training, he was able to see
the Regent of the Sun-spirits, who, as described above, had taken
under His protection the human etheric body.

Zarathustra knew that This Spirit directs the course of human
evolution, but that He must first, at a certain time, descend to
earth out of cosmic space. For this purpose it was necessary
that He should be able to live in a human astral body, just as
in man. He had worked in the etheric body since the entrance
of the Luciferic nature. It was therefore necessary that a man
should appear who had retransformed the astral body to the same
level that it would have reached in the middle of the Atlantean

202

An Outline of Occult Science
evolution, had there been no Luciferian influence. Had Lucifer
not appeared, mankind would certainly have attained this level
before, but without personal independence or the possibility of
freedom. Now, however, in spite of those qualities he should
again arise to this height. Zarathustra, endowed with prophetic
vision, could see that in the future it would be possible, within
human evolution for a personality to exist, who would have a
suitable astral body for that purpose. But he also knew that the
great Sun-spirit could not appear on earth before that time, though

He could be perceived by a seer in the spiritual part of the Sun.

When as a seer he turned his attention to the Sun, Zarathustra

[256]

was able to see This Spirit, whom he proclaimed to his people.

He announced that the Sun-spirit was at first to be found only in
the spiritual world, but that later He would descend to earth. This
was the great Sun-spirit, or Spirit of Light (the Aura of the Sun,

Ahura-mazdao, or Ormuzd). He was revealed to Zarathustra and
his followers as the Spirit who, for the time being, was turning
the light of His countenance on man from the spiritual world,
and that it was He Who might be expected to appear in a human
body amongst men in the future. It was the Christ, before his
appearance on earth, whom Zarathustra proclaimed as the Spirit
of Light. On the other hand he represented Ahriman (Angra
mainju) as a power working injuriously on the life of the human
soul, when it engrosses that soul completely. This power is none
other than the one previously described, which had acquired
special dominion over the earth since the betrayal of the Vulcan

Mysteries. Together with the message concerning the Light God,

Zarathustra proclaimed teachings about those spiritual beings
who were revealed to the seer's purified perception as associates
of the Spirit of Light. These were in strong contrast to the
tempters who appeared to that unpurified clairvoyance which
was left over from the Atlantean period. It had to be made clear
to the ancient Persians that in man's soul, so far as it is engaged
in work and endeavor in the physical sense world, a conflict is

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

203
going on between the power of the Light God and his adversary.

It had also to be shown them how man must act so as not to

[257]

be engulfed by Ahriman, and how to turn his influence to good
through the power of the Light God.

The third era of post-Atlantean civilization began among
the peoples who finally gathered together in western Asia and
northern Africa after the migrations.

This civilization was
developed among the Chaldeans, Babylonians, and Assyrians on
the one hand, and among the Egyptians on the other. In these
peoples the taste for the physical world of sense developed in a
different form from that which it had taken among the Persians.

The former had acquired the quality of mind lying at the root of
the faculty of thought which has arisen since Atlantean times,
that is, the gift of reason. Indeed, it was the mission of post-

Atlantean humanity to develop within itself those faculties of
the soul which it was possible to acquire through the newly
awakened powers of thought and feeling. These powers cannot
be directly stimulated from the spiritual world, but result from
man's observing the sense-world, becoming familiar with it, and
working upon it. The conquest of the physical world of sense
by these human faculties must be regarded as the mission of
post-Atlantean humanity. Step by step that conquest proceeded.

It is true that even in ancient India, man, through the condition of
his soul, was already turned toward that world; but he still looked
upon it as illusion, and his spirit turned to the supersensible
world. In the Persian race, on the contrary, there sprang up
the endeavour to conquer the physical world of sense, but the

[258]

attempt was still largely made with those powers of the soul
which had been left over as an inheritance from the time when
man could still reach the spiritual world directly. Among the
peoples of the third epoch of civilization, the soul had for the
most part lost the supersensible faculties. It was obliged to seek
manifestations of the spiritual in the surrounding world of sense,
and to continue its development by discovering the means of

204

An Outline of Occult Science
civilization existing in that world. Men sought to investigate,
through the physical world, the spiritual laws underlying it,
and in this way human sciences arose. Human technical skill,
artistic work, and their tools and means came about through the
recognition and use of the forces of the physical world. To a
man of the Chaldaic-Babylonian race the sense-world was no
longer an illusion but a manifestation, in its different kingdoms,
in mountains and seas, in air and water, of the spiritual activity of
powers existing behind it, whose laws man was striving to learn.

To the Egyptian, the earth was a field of work, given to him
in a condition which he must, by his own powers of intelligence,
so transform that it should bear the impress of human power.

From Atlantis, oracle-sanctuaries, originating chiefly from the

Mercury oracle, had been transplanted to Egypt. Yet there were
others as well,—for example, Venus oracles.

In that which was fostered, in their oracle-sanctuaries, among

[259]

the Egyptian peoples, the germ of a new culture was planted.

This germ proceeded from a great leader who had received
his training in the Persian Zarathustra Mysteries, who was the
reincarnated individuality of a disciple of the great Zarathustra
himself. Let us call him “Hermes.” Through acceptance of the

Zarathustra Mysteries he was able to find the right way to guide
the Egyptian people. This people had so turned its attention to
the physical sense-world, during earthly life between birth and
death that it was able only to a limited extent to directly behold
the spiritual world behind the physical phenomena, although it
recognized the spiritual laws of the world. Thus it could not think
of the spiritual world as the one in which it could live while on
earth, but on the other hand, it could be shown how man will
live, in the disembodied state after death in the world of those
spirits who, during earthly life, appear through their impressions
upon the sense-world.

Hermes taught that man qualifies himself for union with
spiritual forces after death, in proportion as he uses his powers

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

205
on earth for furthering the purposes of those spiritual forces.

Those especially, who had worked most zealously in this way
between birth and death would be united with the lofty Sun-

God Osiris. On the Chaldaic-Babylonian side of this stream of
civilization the direction of the human mind toward the physical
sense-world was more conspicuous than on the Egyptian side.

The laws of that world were being investigated and from its
reflection in the sense-world these people
looked up to the

[260]

corresponding spiritual prototypes. Yet in many respects the
nation remained wedded to physical things. Instead of the star-
spirit, the star was put first, and instead of other spiritual beings
their earthly counterparts were made prominent. Only the leaders
attained to really deep knowledge concerning the laws of the
supersensible world and its connection with the physical. The
contrast between the knowledge of the Initiates and the perverted
beliefs of the people became more apparent in these nations than
anywhere else.

Very different conditions existed in those parts of Southern

Europe and western Asia where the fourth epoch of post-

Atlantean civilization was unfolded. In occult science, it is called
the Greco-Roman period. Descendants of peoples inhabiting
widely distant parts of the older world had met together in these
countries. Here were oracle-sanctuaries which conformed to the
various Atlantean oracles; here were people with the heritage of
ancient clairvoyance as a natural gift, and others who were able
to acquire it, with comparative ease, by training. The traditions
of the ancient Initiates were not only preserved in special places,
but worthy successors to them arose, who attracted disciples
capable of rising to lofty levels of spiritual vision. Moreover,
these races had within them the impulse to create a domain
within the sense-world which expresses the spiritual in perfect
form through the physical.

Greek art is, among other things, a result of this impulse.

It is only necessary to gaze with the eye of the spirit upon a

[261]

206

An Outline of Occult Science

Greek temple, in order to see that in this marvel of art, material
substance is so worked upon by man that it appears in every detail
as the expression of spirit. The Greek temple is the “House of the

Spirit.” One sees in its form what otherwise only The Spiritual
eye of the seer perceives. The temple of Zeus-(or Jupiter) is so
constructed as to present to the physical eye a fitting shrine for
what the guardian of the Zeus-(or Jupiter) Initiation saw with
spiritual vision. And it is the same with all Greek art. The wisdom
of the Initiates flowed in mysterious ways into poets, artists, and
thinkers. The Mysteries of the Initiates are found again, in the
form of conceptions and ideas, in the systems of thought by
which ancient Greek philosophers interpreted the universe. The
influences of the spiritual life, the Mysteries of the Asiatic and

African sanctuaries of Initiation, flowed into these nations and
to their leaders. The great Indian teachers, the associates of

Zarathustra, and the followers of Hermes had attracted disciples.

These, or their successors, thereupon founded sanctuaries for

Initiation, in which the ancient wisdom was revived in a new
form. These were the Mysteries of antiquity. Here disciples
were prepared to be brought into the condition of consciousness
through which they might attain vision of the spiritual world.23

[262]

From these sanctuaries of Initiation the Mysteries flowed forth to
those who cultivated Spiritual Mysteries in Asia Minor, Greece,
and Italy. (Important centres of Initiation were formed in the

Greek world in the Orphic and Eleusinian Mysteries. In the

Pythagorean School of wisdom, lingered the effects of the great
wisdom-teachings and methods of past ages. On his distant
travels, Pythagoras had been initiated into the secrets of the most
varied kinds of Mysteries.)

But human life between birth and death in the post-Atlantean
period had also an influence on the disembodied state after death.

23 More detailed information about these Mysteries of antiquity is to be found in my book, “Christianity as Mystical Fact.” More particulars will be given in the last chapter of the present work.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

207

The more man's interests were fixed on the physical sense-world,
the greater was the possibility of Ahriman gaining a hold upon
the soul during earthly life and retaining his power of it after
death. This danger was least among the peoples of ancient India,
for during earthly life they had felt the physical sense-world to
be an illusion, and thus had eluded the power of Ahriman after
death. The danger for the primitive Persian peoples, who between
birth and death had fixed their attention, with great interest, upon
the physical sense-world was much greater. They would have
largely fallen a prey to Ahriman's wiles had not Zarathustra
pointed out, emphatically through his teaching concerning the

Light of God, that behind the physical sense-world there exists
the world of the Spirits of Light. In proportion to the ability
of the people of this civilization to receive something into their
souls out of the world of thought thus created, were they able to
escape Ahriman's clutches during earthly life, and thereby elude

[263]

him in the life after death, during which they were to be prepared
for a new earth-life. The power of Ahriman in earthly life tends
to make the physical sense-existence appear to be the only one,
and thus to bar the way to any vista of a spiritual world. His
power in the spiritual world leads man to complete isolation, and
to the concentration of all his interest upon himself. Those who,
at the time of death, are in Ahriman's power, are born again as
egoists.

It is now possible for occult science to describe life between
death and a new birth as it is, provided the Ahrimanic influence
has, to a certain degree, been overcome. It is in this sense that it
has been described by the author in the first chapter of this book
as well as in other writings. And it must be described in this
way if that which can be experienced by man during this form
of existence is to be visualized and if he has attained to purely
spiritual perception for that which really exists. The degree to
which the individual experiences this, depends upon the extent
to which he has overcome the Ahrimanic influence.

208

An Outline of Occult Science

Man is approaching nearer and nearer to what it is possible
for him to become in the spiritual world. How this progress is
thwarted by other influences must however be clearly brought
out in our consideration of the course of human evolution.

During the Egyptian period Hermes taught the people to
prepare themselves during earth-life, for communion with the

[264]

Spirit of Light.

But because
at that time human interests,
between birth and death, were already so constituted that it was
only possible to a slight degree to see through the veil of the
physical sense-world, therefore the spiritual vision of the soul
after death was also clouded and the perception of the world of
light remained dim.

The obscuration of the spiritual world after death reached a
climax in the souls who passed into the disembodied state out
of a body belonging to the Greco-Roman civilization. During
their earthly life they had brought to perfection the cultivation of
physical sense-existence, and had thus condemned themselves to
a shadowy existence after death. Hence the Greek felt life after
death to be a shadowy existence, and it is not mere rhetoric but the
realization of truth when the hero of that time, who is given up to
the life of the senses, says, “Better a beggar on earth than a king
in the realm of shades.” All this was still more marked in those

Asiatic peoples who had fixed their attention with veneration
and worship on material images instead of on their spiritual
archetypes. A large proportion of mankind was in this condition
at the time of the Greco-Roman era of civilization. It can be seen
how man's mission in post-Atlantean times, which consisted in
the conquest of the physical sense-world, must necessarily lead
to estrangement from the spiritual world. Thus greatness in one
respect necessarily involves deterioration in another.

Man's connection with the spiritual world was kept alive in

[265]

the Mysteries. Through these the Initiates, in special states of the
soul, were able to receive revelations from that world. They were
more or less the successors of the guardians of the Atlantean

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

209
oracles. To them was revealed what had been hidden through the
influence of Lucifer and Ahriman. Lucifer concealed from man
what had flowed from the spiritual world into the human astral
body, without his co-operation, up to the middle of the Atlantean
period. Had the etheric body not been partially separated from the
physical body, man would have been able to experience within
himself this part of the spiritual world as an inner revelation
to his soul. As a result of Lucifer's encroachment, this could
be done only in special states of the soul. At those times a
spiritual world appeared to man in the guise of the astral. The
corresponding spiritual beings manifested themselves in forms
which embodied only the higher principles of the human being,
and in those principles the symbols of their particular spiritual
forces were astrally visible. Superhuman forms were manifested
in this way.

After the encroachment of Ahriman, still another kind of

Initiation was added to this one. Ahriman concealed from man
everything out of the spiritual world which would have appeared
behind physical sense-perception, had he not interfered in human
affairs from the middle of the Atlantean period onward. The

Initiates of the Mysteries owed the revelation of what he had
thus kept hidden, to the fact that they had developed within their
souls all those faculties which man had attained since that time,

[266]

beyond the degree necessary for physical sense-impressions.

Thus there were revealed to them the spiritual powers lying
behind the forces of nature. They could speak of the spiritual
beings behind nature. The creative might of those forces acting
in nature below man, was revealed to them. That which had
been active since Saturn, Sun and the old Moon and had shaped
man's physical, etheric and astral body as well as the mineral,
plant and animal kingdoms, formed the contents of a certain
kind of mystery-secrets,—namely those over which Ahriman
held his hand. That which had formed the sentient-, rational-and
consciousness-souls and which had been concealed from man by

210

An Outline of Occult Science

Lucifer, was revealed in a second kind of Mystery-secrets.

But what the Mysteries could only prophesy was, that in time
a man would appear possessing an astral body which, despite

Lucifer, could become conscious of the light-world of the Sun-
spirit through the etheric body, apart from any special condition
of the soul. And the physical body of that human being must
be of such a nature, that everything in the spiritual world would
be revealed to him, which Ahriman is able to conceal from man
up to the time of physical death. Physical death could bring no
change into the life of such a being, that is to say, could have no
power over it. The “Ego” so manifests in such a human being
that the entire spiritual life is at the same time contained in his

[267]

physical life. Such a being is the vehicle of the Spirit of Light, to
whom the Initiate ascends from two directions, being led, under
special conditions of the soul, either to the Superhuman Spirit or
to the Being of the forces of nature. When the Initiates of the

Mysteries foretold the appearance in the course of time, of such
a human being, they were prophets of the Christ.

A personality arose, as the special prophet of this coming
manifestation, within a nation which possessed through natural
inheritance the qualities of the peoples of western Asia, and
through education the learning of the Egyptians—the Hebrew
nation. This prophet was Moses. The influences of Initiation
had entered so deeply into his soul that in certain states of
consciousness the being who had undertaken in the regular
course of the earth evolution to shape human consciousness from
the Moon, was revealed to him. In thunder and lightning Moses
realized not merely physical phenomena, but manifestations of
this Spirit. At the same time the other kind of Mysteries had
influenced his soul, so that he was able to distinguish, in astral
vision, how the superhuman becomes human by means of the
ego. Thus, from two directions, He Who was to come, was
revealed to Moses as the highest form of the Ego.

And in Christ the lofty Sun-spirit appeared in human form

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

211
as the great ideal for human life on earth. At His coming, all
mystery-wisdom had in some respects to take a new form. Up
to that time this wisdom had existed exclusively for the purpose
of enabling man to put himself into such a condition of soul

[268]

in which he would be able to view the kingdom of the Sun-
spirit as something outside of earthly evolution. Henceforth it was the mission of Mystery-wisdom to make man capable of
recognizing in the incarnated Christ the Primordial Being. From
this Primordial Being man was enabled to understand the natural
and spiritual worlds.24

At the point in His life at which the astral body of Christ Jesus
contained everything which it is possible for the Luciferian
influence to conceal, He came forward as the Teacher of
humanity. From that moment, the faculty was implanted in
human earthly evolution for assimilating that wisdom whereby
the physical goal of the earth may gradually be reached. At
the moment when the Event of Golgotha was accomplished,
human nature was endowed with another faculty, that by which

Ahriman's influence may be turned into good. Henceforth man
was able to take with him through the gate of death that which
saves him from isolation in the spiritual world. What happened
in Palestine was the central point, not only of human physical
evolution but also of the other worlds to which man belongs;
and when the “Mystery of Golgotha” had been accomplished,
when the “death on the cross” had been suffered, Christ appeared
in that world where souls sojourn after death, and set limits to
the power of Ahriman. From that moment the region which the

Greeks had called the “realm of shades” was illuminated by

[269]

that flash of the Spirit indicating to its dwellers that light was
to return. What had been gained for the physical world by the

“Mystery of Golgotha” cast light also into the spiritual world.

Up to this event post-Atlantean human evolution had been a

24 What is to be said further on this subject will be given in a later chapter dealing with supersensible knowledge.

212

An Outline of Occult Science
time of ascent in the physical sense-world, but of descent as far as
the spiritual world was concerned. Everything which flowed into
the sense-world proceeded from what had been in the spiritual
world from remote ages. Since the coming of Christ, those who
attain to the Mystery of Christ are able to take with them into
the spiritual world what they have won in the physical. And
from the spiritual world it then flows back again into the earthly
sense-world, since reincarnated souls, on re-entering earth-life,
bring with them what the Christ-impulse between death and a
new birth, has bestowed.

What flowed into human evolution with the appearance of
the Christ, acted in it like a seed. Only slowly can this seed
mature. Only the smallest part of these profound new wisdom
teachings, up to the present time, has reached down into physical
existence. Christian evolution has just barely begun. During
the successive periods of time following the appearance of the

Christ, this Christian Evolution was able to reveal only so much
of its inner essential nature as the humanity, the peoples of that
time, were capable of receiving; only as much as they could grasp

[270]

with their faculties of comprehension. The first form into which
this essence of Christianity could be poured may be described
as a comprehensive ideal of life. As such it was opposed to
those forms of life which had been developed in post-Atlantean
humanity. The conditions operating in human evolution since
the repopulation of the earth in the Lemurian period have been
described above. Accordingly, humanity can be traced back to
different beings who, coming from other worlds, incarnated in
the bodily descendants of the ancient Lemurians. The various
races of man are a consequence of this, and the most diverse vital
interests appeared in these reincarnated souls, as a result of their

Karma. As long as all this was being worked out, there could
be no ideal of “universal humanity.” Human nature originated
in unity, but earthly evolution up to the present time has led
to division. In the figure of the Christ, we see an ideal which

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

213
opposes all division, for in the man who bears the name of Christ
there lives the lofty Sun-being from Whom every human ego
is descended. The Hebrew nation still felt itself to be a nation,
and each individual a member of that nation. When once the
idea was grasped that in Christ-Jesus there lives the ideal Man
who stands above all that tends to divide humanity, Christianity
became the Ideal of an all-Embracing brotherhood. Above all
individual interests and relations, the feeling arose in some that
the innermost ego of all human beings is of the same origin. (In
addition to all the earthly forefathers, the great common Father

[271]

of all humanity appears. “I and the Father are one.”)

In the fourth, fifth, and sixth centuries after Christ, the era in
which we are still living was being prepared in Europe. It was
gradually to replace the fourth, or Greco-Roman civilization. It
is the fifth post-Atlantean period. The races which, after many
wanderings and varied fortunes, became the vehicles of this
new civilization were descendants of those Atlanteans who had
remained less affected than others by what had been going on
meanwhile during the four preceding periods of civilization. They
had not penetrated into the countries in which those respective
civilizations took root. On the contrary, they had, in their way,
handed on Atlantean forms of civilization. There were many
among them who had retained in a high degree the inheritance
of the ancient dim clairvoyance, the state described above as
intermediate between sleeping and waking. Such people knew
the spiritual world from their own experience, and could reveal
to their fellow-men what takes place there. Thus there sprang
up a great number of narratives of spiritual beings and events,
and the national treasures of legends and sagas had their origin
in spiritual experiences of this kind. For the dim clairvoyance
lasted on, in many people, into times not far removed from the
present. There were other people who, although they had lost
clairvoyance, nevertheless developed the faculties they acquired
for use in the physical sense-world in accordance with feelings

214

An Outline of Occult Science

[272]

and emotions which corresponded to clairvoyant experiences.

And even the Atlantean oracles had their successors in the new
civilization.

There were everywhere Mysteries, but in them that Mystery
of Initiation was most cultivated, which leads to the unveiling of
that part of the spirit-world which Ahriman keeps hidden. The
spiritual powers existing behind the forces of nature were here
revealed. In the mythologies of European nations are contained
the remnants of what the Initiates of these Mysteries were able
to disclose to men. It is true that these mythologies also contain
the other kind of mystery, although in a more imperfect form
than that possessed by the Southern and Eastern Mysteries.

Superhuman beings were also known in Europe, but they were
seen to be in perpetual conflict with the associates of Lucifer.

And the Light-God too was proclaimed, but in such a form that
it was doubtful whether he would overcome Lucifer. On the
other hand, these Mysteries were illuminated by the figure of
the coming Christ. It was announced of Him that His kingdom
would replace that of the other Light-God.25

From such influences as these, there came about a cleavage
in the soul of the people of the fifth epoch of civilization which
still continues, and is manifest in most diverse phenomena.

The soul had not retained, from ancient times a sufficiently

[273]

strong attraction for spiritual things to enable it to hold fast
the connection between the worlds of spirit and sense. The
attraction existed only as a training of feeling and emotion, not
as direct vision of the spiritual world. On the other hand, man's
attention was more and more directed toward the world of the
senses and its conquest; and the intellectual powers which had
been awakened in the latter part of the Atlantean period, all those
human powers of which the physical brain is the instrument, were
concentrated upon the sense-world, and upon gaining knowledge

25 All sagas concerning the twilight of the gods, and similar traditions, had their origin in this knowledge of the Mysteries in Europe.

Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

215
of and mastery over it. Two worlds, so to speak, were developed
within man: the one directed toward the life of physical sense;
the other susceptible to the revelation of the spirit in such a way
as to permeate with feeling and emotion even though lacking
clairvoyant vision. The tendency to this cleavage of soul already
existed when the teaching concerning the Christ was introduced
into Europe.

This message from the spiritual world was received into men's
hearts, and permeated feeling and emotion; but it was not possible
to bridge the gulf between this state of devotion and what human
intelligence, concentrated on the sense-world, was learning in
the sphere of physical existence. What is now known as the
contradiction between external science and spiritual knowledge
is simply a consequence of this fact. The Christian mysticism (of

Eckhart, Tauler and others) is the result of Christianity becoming
permeated with feeling and emotion. Science, occupied as it
is exclusively with the world of sense and its results in life,
is the consequence of the other tendency of the soul, and all

[274]

achievements in the sphere of outer material civilization are
entirely due to this divergence of tendencies. Since those human
faculties, of which the brain is the instrument, were concentrated
exclusively on physical life, they were able to reach that pitch
of perfection which makes contemporary science, technical skill,
and other forms of mental activity possible. Such a material
civilization could originate only among the nations of Europe, for
they are those descendants of Atlantean ancestors who converted
their natural inclination toward the physical sense-world into
faculties only when it had reached a certain degree of maturity.

Previously they had allowed it to lie dormant, and had lived on
what remained in them of the Atlantean clairvoyance and on
the communications of their Initiates. While mental culture was
outwardly almost entirely given up to these influences, in them
ripened slowly the desire for the material conquest of the world.

Now, however, the dawn of the sixth post-Atlantean era of

216

An Outline of Occult Science
civilization is already at hand. What is to arise at a certain time
in human evolution has ripened slowly in the preceding age.

The first beginnings of that which can even now be developed,
is to be discovered in the thread which binds together the two
tendencies of the human breast, material civilization and life in
the spiritual world. To this end it is necessary, on the one hand,
that the results of spiritual vision should be understood; and on

[275]

the other, that in the observations and experiences of of the
sense-world the revelations of the Spirit be recognized. The sixth
civilization-epoch will bring to full development the harmony
between the two.

Herewith the studies in this book have reached a point where
we may turn from the perspectives of the past to those of the
future. But it will be better to precede the latter by a study of
the Knowledge of Higher Worlds and of Initiation. Then, after
this study and in connection with it, we shall be able to indicate
in brief the outlook for the future, in so far as that can be done
within the framework of this book.

[276]

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher

Worlds

At the present stage of evolution there are three possible
conditions of soul in which man ordinarily lives his life between
birth and death:

waking, sleeping and, between the two,
dreaming. The last-mentioned will be briefly dealt with in a
later part of this book; for the moment we shall consider life
simply as it alternates between its two main conditions—waking
and sleeping. Before he can “know” for himself in higher worlds,
man has to add to these two a third condition of soul.

During waking life the soul is given up to the impressions of
the senses, and to the thoughts and pictures that these evoke in
it. During sleep the senses cease to make any impression, and
the soul loses consciousness. The whole of the day's experience
sinks down into the sea of unconsciousness. Let us now consider
how it would be if man were able to become conscious during
sleep, notwithstanding that all impressions of the senses were
completely obliterated, as they are in deep sleep. Now would
any memory remain to him of what had happened while he was
awake. Would his soul find itself in a state of vacuity? Would

[277]

it be incapable of having any experiences? This is a question
that can only be answered if conditions like or similar to those
under discussion can actually be brought about. If the soul is
capable of experiencing anything, even when sense-activities and
recollection of such activities are lacking, then that soul would,
so far as the external world is concerned, be “asleep”; and yet
the soul would not be sleeping but awake to a world of reality.

Now such a condition of consciousness can be attained if man
makes these psychic experiences possible toward which occult

218

An Outline of Occult Science
science guides him. And everything that occult science tells us
about those worlds beyond the sensible, has been found through
such a condition of consciousness.

In the foregoing parts of this book certain communications
have been made concerning the higher worlds; and in the
following pages, as far as is possible in a book of this kind,
methods will be discussed whereby the state of consciousness
requisite for such investigations may be acquired. This state
of consciousness resembles that of sleep, in only one respect,
namely: that through it, all outward sense activity ceases, and
also all thoughts that might be aroused by the action of the senses,
are obliterated. But although the soul has no power to experience
anything consciously in sleep, yet it receives this power through
this very state of consciousness. And through it a capacity for
experiencing is awakened in the soul which in every day life can

[278]

be awakened only through sense impressions. The awakening of
the soul to this higher state of consciousness is called Initiation.

The methods of initiation lead man away from the state of
ordinary day-consciousness into such a soul activity as enables
him to use his spiritual organs of perception. Like germs these
organs lie dormant in the soul and must be developed. Now
it may be that a person, at some particular moment of his
earthly life, makes the discovery that these higher organs have
developed within his soul without previous preparation. It is a
kind of involuntary self-awakening. Such a person will become
conscious of a change affecting his entire being; his soul's
experiences will have been enriched beyond measure and he will
find that no experiences of the sense-world can bring him such
spiritual happiness, such soul satisfaction and inner warmth as
that which now opens up to him, which no physical eye can see
and no hand can touch. From the spiritual world strength and a
sense of security in all situations in life, will flow into his will.

There are instances of such self-initiation; but they should not
give rise to the idea that the only right course is to wait for the

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

219
coming of such self-initiation, and to do nothing toward bringing
about initiation through regular training. We need not here give
further space to the subject of self-initiation, since it may take
place without regard to rules of any kind whatsoever.

What we have to consider is how by training, one may develop

[279]

those organs of perception, lying dormant in the Soul. Those
who do not feel themselves especially impelled toward doing
something for their own development may easily say that man
stands under the guidance of spiritual powers, that such guidance
should therefore not be interfered with, and that the moment,
deemed by those powers to be the right one for revealing another
world to the soul, should be awaited in patience. Indeed, persons
who are of this opinion are inclined to consider it a kind of
presumption, or unjustifiable desire for any one to interfere with
the wisdom of such spiritual guidance.

Those who think in this way will only change their opinion
if some other mode of presenting the case makes a sufficiently
strong impression upon them. If they were to say to themselves,

“This wise guidance has endowed me with certain faculties, and
it has done so, not that I should let them lie idle, but rather that

I should use them. Indeed, the very wisdom of such guidance
lies in the fact of its having placed in me the rudiments of those
organs necessary for a higher state of consciousness. I can,
therefore, rightly comprehend this guidance only when I regard
it as my duty to do everything in my power that may serve to
bring such rudimentary growths to their proper development.”

Should such thoughts make a sufficiently strong impression on
the mind, scruples against training for the attainment of higher
consciousness will disappear.

There is, it is true, another scruple which may arise in the

[280]

mind with regard to such schooling. A person may say to himself:

“This development of the inner faculties of the soul means an
invasion of man's most hidden sanctuary. It involves a certain
change of the entire human being: the method for such a change

220

An Outline of Occult Science
cannot be worked out by any ordinary procedure of thought, for
the manner in which the higher worlds are attained can be known
only to those to whom the path has become visible by reason of
experience. If, therefore, I turn to such an one, I am allowing
him to exercise his influence over the innermost sanctuary of
my soul.” Any one given to this attitude of mind will hardly
find it reassuring if the methods for bringing about a higher state
of consciousness are imparted to him in book form. For it is
not a question of receiving communications either verbally or
from some person who, having the knowledge, has set the same
down in a book to which we have access. Now there are people
possessing knowledge of the rules for developing the spiritual
organs of perception who are of the opinion that these rules
ought not to be entrusted to a book. These people, for the most
part, consider the communication of certain truths relating to the
spiritual world as forbidden. But this view must be characterized
as in a certain sense out of date in view of the present stage of
human evolution. It is true that the communication of the rules
referred to can be made only up to a certain point. Yet what
is imparted leads so far that one who applies it to his soul-life

[281]

makes such progress in knowledge that he is able to go on by
himself. This way then leads onward in a manner of which a
true idea can be gained only through what has been previously
experienced. From all these facts, scruples may arise concerning
the path of spiritual knowledge.

These scruples however disappear when one clearly
understands the essential nature of that course of development
which is adapted to our age. Of this latter method of developing
we shall speak here and other methods will be only briefly
referred to.

The method of training to be here discussed furnishes to
him who has the will for a higher development, the means for
accomplishing the transformation of his soul. Any questionable
encroachment on the personality of the student would only then

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

221
be possible, should the teacher proceed to carry out the change
by methods of which the pupil was not conscious. But no true
teacher of occult science in our day would make use of any such
method, by which indeed, the pupil would be reduced to a blind
tool. The teacher gives his pupil instructions as to the rules of
conduct he is to pursue, and the pupil carries them out. At the
same time, should the case seem to demand it, the teacher does
not withhold the reasons justifying these rules of conduct.

The acceptance of the rules, and their application by a person
seeking spiritual development, need not be a matter of blind
belief. Such a belief ought to be quite out of the question in this
sphere. One who studies the nature of the human soul as far as

[282]

it can be followed by ordinary self-observation, without occult
training may, after accepting the rules recommended for spiritual
training, ask himself, “How do these rules act upon the life of
the soul?” This question may be satisfactorily answered previous
to any schooling by an unbiased use of common sense. Before
these rules are adopted, true conceptions may be gained as to
the way in which they operate. The effect can be experienced
only during training, but even then the experience will always
be accompanied by an understanding of the experience, if each
step that is to be taken is tested by sound judgment. And in this
age any true spiritual science will only suggest such rules for
training as can be vindicated by sound judgment. For him who
is willing to simply trust himself to such schooling and does not
permit prejudice to drive him into blind faith, all scruples will vanish and objections against a regular training for higher states
of consciousness will no longer disturb him.

Even such people as may have arrived at a state of inward
maturity,—which sooner or later would lead to the self-
awakening of these spiritual organs of perception—even for
these, training is by no means superfluous. On the contrary it
is especially adapted to them. For there are but few cases in
which personal initiation does not have to travel along tortuous

222

An Outline of Occult Science
and devious ways, and training spares them the traversing of
such by-paths, leading them forward in a straight line. In cases

[283]

where such self-initiation comes to a soul, the reason is that
the required degree of ripeness had already been attained in the
course of previous incarnations.

It may easily happen that such a soul possesses a certain dim
intuition of its ripeness, and by reason of this very feeling may
assume an attitude of disinclination toward training. A feeling of
this kind may produce a certain degree of pride, which refuses to
place confidence in a teacher. Now it can happen that a certain
degree of soul development may remain hidden up to a certain
age and only then reveal itself. But such schooling may be just the
very means needed to call it forth. Should the person hold aloof
from such training, it may happen that the power will remain
dormant during that particular Life, and will only reappear in a
later incarnation.

The rising to a supersensible state of consciousness can only
proceed from ordinary waking day-consciousness. It is in this
consciousness that the soul lives prior to its ascent, and schooling
will furnish the means to lead it out of this consciousness.

The first steps which the schooling here under consideration
prescribes, are such as can still be characterized as actions of the
ordinary day-consciousness. It is just those quiet acts of the soul
which are the most effective steps. This requires that the soul
should give itself up to definite perceptions and these perceptions
are such as are able by their very nature to exercise an awakening
influence upon certain hidden faculties of the inner nature of

[284]

man.

They thereby differ from those perceptions of waking day-
life, whose purpose is to portray external objects. The more
faithfully they present these things, the truer they are. It is,
indeed, in accordance with their nature that they should be true
in this sense, but this is not the mission of those perceptions
which the soul is to consider, when in pursuit of spiritual

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

223
training; and they are therefore so formed as not to present
anything external, having rather within themselves the power
to act upon the soul. The best percepts for the purpose are
the emblematic or symbolic ones. Yet other percepts may be
used. For it does not depend at all on what the percepts contain,
but solely on the fact that the soul puts forth all its powers in
order not to have anything in the consciousness except the one
percept in question. Whereas, in ordinary life, its forces are
divided among many things and perceptions change rapidly, the
important point in spiritual training is the concentration of the
whole inner life upon one single perception. And this perception
must be voluntarily brought to the centre of one's consciousness.

Symbolic perceptions are better than those which reflect outer
objects or events, because the latter are related to the outer
world, and the soul has to depend less on itself than in the case
of symbolic perceptions, formed by its own inner energy. The
chief object at which to aim is the intensity of the force to be exercised by the soul. It is not what is before the soul that
is essential, but the greatness of the effort and the length of
time spent concentrating upon one perception. Strength ascends

[285]

from unknown depths of the soul, from which it is drawn up by
concentration on one perception. Occult science contains many
such perceptions, all of which have been proven to possess the
power alluded to above.

One gains a comprehension of this immersion or sinking down
into a percept by calling the Memory-Concept before the soul.

Say, for instance, that we allow the eye to rest on a tree, and then
turn away from the object so that it is no longer presented to our
sight; we shall, nevertheless, be able to retain the image of the
tree in the soul. Now this image or perception of the tree which
we have when it is no longer in sight, is a recollection of the
tree. Then assume that this recollection is retained in the soul,
and the soul reposes, as it were, in this recollection, taking care
to exclude all other perceptions from the memory. The soul then

224

An Outline of Occult Science
dwells in that memory-concept of the tree, and we then have to
do with the immersion of the soul into a concept. Yet this concept
is the image of an actual thing perceived through the senses. If
however, of our own free will, we take such images into our
consciousness, gradually the effect desired will be attained.

One example of meditation based upon a symbolical concept
will now be placed before the reader. Such a concept must first
be built up in the soul, and this may be done in the following
manner. Let us think of a plant, calling to mind how it is rooted
in the ground, the way in which leaf after leaf shoots forth,

[286]

until finally the blossom unfolds. And then let us imagine a
human being placed beside this plant, and let us call up in our
soul the thought that he has qualities and characteristics which,
when compared with those of the plant, will be found to be more
perfect. We dwell on the fact that this being is able to move here
and there, according to his will and his desires, while the plant
remains stationary, rooted in the soil.

But now let us also consider: Yes, man is certainly more
perfect than the plant; but on the other hand, I find in him
qualities which I cannot perceive in the plant and through the
lack of which, the plant appears more perfect than man in certain
respects.

Man is filled with passions and desires and these
govern his conduct. With him we can speak of sin committed
by reason of his impulses and passions, whereas in the plant,
we see that it follows the pure laws of growth from leaf to leaf,
and that the blossom without passion opens to the chaste rays of
the Sun. So we can see that man possesses a certain perfection
beyond the plant, but that on the other hand he has paid for this
perfection by admitting into his being inclinations, desires and
passions in addition to the pure forces of the plant. And then
we call to mind the green sap flowing through the plant, and
think of it as the expression of the pure and passionless laws
of growth. And then again, we call to mind the red blood as
it courses through the veins of man, and we recognize in it an

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

225
expression of man's instincts, his passions and desires. Let a
vivid picture of all this arise in our souls. We then think of man's
faculties of development; how he can purify and cleanse his

[287]

inclinations and passions through his higher soul faculties. We
think how through this process something that is low is destroyed
in these inclinations and passions which thereby are born upon
a higher plane. Then we may be able to think of the blood as
the expression of these purified and cleansed inclinations and
passions.

Now we gaze in spirit on the rose and say to ourselves: “In the
red sap of the rose is the erstwhile green sap of the plant—now
changed to crimson—and the red rose follows the same pure,
passionless laws of growth as does the green leaf.” Thus the
red of the rose may offer us a symbol of a kind of blood which
is the expression of cleansed impulses and passions, purged of
all lower elements, and resembling in their purity the forces
working in the red rose. Let us now try not only to assimilate
such thoughts within our reason, but also let them come to life
within our feelings.

We can experience a blissful sensation
when contemplating the purity and passionless nature of the
growing plant. We can awaken the feeling within us how certain
higher perfections must be paid for through the acquisition of
passions and desires. This, then, can change the blissful sensation
previously experienced into a serious mood: and then only can it
stir within us the feeling of liberating happiness, if we abandon
ourselves to the thought of the red blood that can become the
carrier of inner pure experiences, like the red sap of the rose.

The important point is that we
should not look coldly and

[288]

without feeling upon these thoughts which serve to build up such
a symbolical concept. After dwelling for a time upon the above
mentioned thoughts and feelings, let us try to transmute them
into the following symbolical concept. Let us imagine a black
cross. Let this be the symbol for the destroyed lower element
of our desires and passions and there where the beams of the

226

An Outline of Occult Science
cross intersect, let us imagine seven red radiating roses arranged
in a circle. Let these roses be the symbol for a blood that is the
expression of cleansed and purified passions and desires.26

Now we must call up this symbolical concept before our soul
just as has been described in the case of a memory-concept. Such
a concept has an awakening power if one abandons oneself to
it in inner meditation. One must try during this meditation to
exclude all other concepts. Only the described symbol must float
before the soul as vividly as possible.

It is not without significance that this symbol has been
introduced, not merely as an awakening percept, but because
it has been constructed out of certain perceptions concerning
plants and man. For the effect of such a symbol depends upon

[289]

the fact of its being put together in this definite manner, before
employing it as an instrument for meditation. Should it be called
up without a previous process of construction such as has here
been delineated, the picture must remain cold and will be far
less effective than if it had by previous preparation gathered
force with which to give warmth to the soul. During meditation,
however, one should not call up in the soul all the preparatory
thoughts, but merely allow the life-like image to float before
one's mind and at the same time permit those feelings which
are the result of these preparatory thoughts to vibrate with it.

Thus the symbol becomes a sign, co-existent with the inner
experience. And it is the dwelling of the soul in this experience
that is the active principle. The longer one can do this, without

26 It is a matter of no moment whatever whether the above thoughts are warranted or not by any of the views held by natural science. For the object is to develop such thoughts about the plant and man as may—irrespective of all theories—be gained by means of simple and direct contemplation. Such thoughts are of importance side by side with no less significant theoretical presentments of things in the external world; and here the thoughts are not adduced in order to prove a fact scientifically, but to construct a symbol that shall prove effective, irrespective of whatever objections may be raised by this or that person against its construction.

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

227
admitting disturbing impressions, the more effective will be the
whole process.

It is well, however, in addition to the time used in meditation
itself, to repeat the building up of the image through the feelings,
as described above, so that the corresponding sensation may not
pale.

The greater the patience brought to bear in performing these
acts of repetition, the more effective becomes this image for the
soul.27

[290]

Such a symbol as has just been described represents no external
object or being evolved by nature, but for this very reason it
possesses an awakening power for certain inner faculties. It is
true, someone may raise the objection: certainly the “whole”

as a symbol, does not exist in nature; yet all its details are
borrowed from nature, the black color, the roses, etc. It can all
be observed through the senses. He who is troubled by such
objections, ought to consider that it is not the images of these
sense perceptions that awaken the higher faculties of the soul,
but that this result is produced purely by the manner in which
these details are combined. And this combination does not then
picture something that exists in the sense-world.

A symbol was chosen as an example to show the process of
effective meditation of the soul. Many symbols of this kind are
used in occult training and are built up according to varying
methods. Certain sentences, formulæ, and single words can also
be given as subjects for meditations, and in every case the means
used will have the same object, namely: to detach the soul from

27 In my explanations of “How to attain Knowledge of the Higher Worlds,”

translated under the title of The Way of Initiation and beginning at Chapter II, several other examples of methods of meditation are given, and especially efficacious will be found one which deals with the coming into being and fading away of a plant; also another may be particularly recommended, based on the dormant formative power dwelling in the seed of a plant, and others on the form and structure of crystals, and other substances. But the purpose in this book was only to show in one instance, the nature of meditation.

228

An Outline of Occult Science
sense-impressions and to stimulate it to an activity in which the
impressions of the physical senses play no longer any part and
in which the unfoldment of inner latent soul capacities becomes
the essential.

There are, however, also meditations based exclusively upon
feelings, sensations, etc., and these are especially effectual. Let
us, for instance, take the feeling of joy. In the normal course of life

[291]

the soul experiences pleasure when there exists an outer stimulus
to pleasure. If a healthily constituted soul perceives some act
performed by a person, indicative of the doer's goodness of heart,
then the soul will assuredly feel pleasure and joy at such an act.

But the soul is able to reflect upon such an act, and can say to
itself that an act done from sheer kindness of heart is one in which
the doer is following the interests of his fellow-creatures rather
than his own, and such an act may be called ethically good. But
the soul can lift itself above the perception of any particular case
in the outer world which has given it joy or pleasure, and instead
may arrive at a general concept of kindness. It can for instance,
think of kindness coming into existence through one soul making
the interests of others his own. And the soul can then experience
joy over the ethical idea of kindness. Therefore, the joy is then
not over this or that event of the sense-world, but it is the joy
over the idea as such. If the student now tries for some time to
let this joy come to life within his soul, then this is a meditation
on a feeling, on a sensation. It is then not the idea which is the
active principle in the awakening of the inner soul faculties, but
the sustained dwelling upon that feeling within the soul which
has not been caused by merely a single external impression.

Occult science being in a position to penetrate far deeper into
the being of things than can be done by ordinary perception,
the teacher will be able to indicate to the pupil feelings and

[292]

sentiments which are still more powerful as awakening agents
for the unfolding of the soul's faculties when used as subjects of
meditation. Yet, necessary as this will be for the higher degrees

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

229
of training, it should be remembered that energetic meditating
upon subjects, such as kindness of heart may carry the student
very far on his way.

Since the natures of human beings differ, special methods of
training are effective for particular individuals. As to the duration
of time to be devoted to meditation, we may remind the student
that the greater the length of time during which he can meditate
uninterruptedly, the stronger will be the effect. But every excess
in these matters should be avoided. There is, however, a certain
inner discretion, resulting from these exercises themselves which
teaches the pupil to keep within due bounds in this regard.

Those who pursue their studies in occult science under the
personal guidance of a teacher will receive from him precise
instruction and advice in these particulars. Nevertheless, it must
be emphatically understood that only experienced occultists are
in a position to impart such advice.

Such exercises in meditation will generally require practice
for some time before the student can become aware of any result.

What is essential to occult science is patience and perseverance.

He who is unable to awaken these two qualities within himself
and who cannot continually practice his exercises in quietude, so
that patience and perseverance are always the predominant note
in his soul-life, cannot attain very great progress. From what has

[293]

been said above, the reader will have gathered that meditation
is a means of acquiring knowledge of the higher worlds, but
he will also see that not just any percept whatsoever, taken at
random, is productive of this result, but only those of the kind
before-mentioned.

The path here indicated leads in the first place to what is called
imaginative knowledge, and this is the first step toward the higher
knowledge. Knowledge, dependent upon sense-perceptions and
upon the working up of such perceptions by reason, which is
sense-bound, is, to use the occult term, known as “objective
cognition.” Beyond this are higher degrees of knowledge, the

230

An Outline of Occult Science
imaginative stage being, as we have said, the first. Now the term

“imaginative” can cause confusion in the minds of some, to whom

“imagination” stands only for “imaginings”—that is concepts
that lack reality.

In occult science, however, “imaginative”

cognition must be understood to be that kind of cognition which
results from a supersensible state of consciousness of the soul.

The things perceived in this state of consciousness are spiritual
facts, and spiritual beings, to which the senses have no access,
and—since this condition of the soul is caused by meditating upon
symbols, or “imaginations”—the sphere to which this condition
of higher consciousness belongs may be termed the imaginative
world, and the knowledge relating to it, imaginative knowledge.

[294]

“Imaginative” stands, therefore, in this sense, for that which
is “actual” in a higher sense than are the facts and beings of
physical sense-perception.

A very natural objection to the use of the symbolic pictures
here characterized is that they arise from a dreamy thinking
and an arbitrary imagination, and might therefore have doubtful
consequences. But any such doubts are unjustified in regard to
the symbols given by true occult schools. For these symbols are
chosen in such a way that they can be looked at quite apart from
their connection with outer sense reality, and their value is to
be found exclusively in the power with which they work upon
the soul when it turns its attention wholly away from the outer
world, when it suppresses all sense-impressions and shuts out
every thought to which it might be stimulated from without. The
process of meditations is best demonstrated by comparison with
sleep. In one respect it is like the state of sleep; in another, the
exact opposite of it. It is a sleep which when compared to the
day-consciousness, represents a higher state of being. The point
is that by concentration on the given conception or image, the
soul is obliged to call up much stronger forces out of its own
depths than it uses in ordinary life or knowledge. Its inner activity
is thereby enhanced. It becomes detached from the body, as it

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

231
does in sleep; but instead of passing, as in the latter case, into
unconsciousness, it experiences a world it did not know before.

Although as regards detachment from the body this condition
may be compared with sleep, yet it is such that, compared with
ordinary waking consciousness, it may be characterized as a

[295]

more intense waking state. By this means the soul learns to know
itself in its true, inner, independent being. But in ordinary life,
owing to the weaker development of its forces, it is only with
the help of the body that the soul arrives at self-consciousness.

Therefore it does not experience itself but merely sees itself in
that image which—like a kind of reflection—is traced, by the
physical body (or, properly speaking, by its processes).

These symbols built up in the manner above described are
not as yet related to anything real in the spiritual world, but
they serve to detach the human soul from sense-observations and
from that instrument, the brain, to which the reason is at first
fettered. This detachment is not effected until man is able to
feel: “I am now perceiving something by means of powers for
which neither my senses nor my brain serve as the instruments”;
and the first thing man thus experiences is a liberation from
the organs of sense. He is then able to say to himself: “My
consciousness does not vanish when I cease to take cognizance
of sense-perceptions and ordinary reasoned thought; I can lift
myself out of those conditions and then feel myself as a being
alongside of that which I was before”—and this is the first purely
spiritual experience; the perception of a psycho-spiritual Ego-
being. This has arisen as a new self out of that self which is
linked to the physical senses and physical reason only.

Had this detachment from the world of the senses and from

[296]

the reason been effected without meditation, the person would
have lapsed into the nothingness of the unconscious state. This
psycho-spiritual being was our possession prior to meditation
also, but it then lacked the organs for perception of the spirit-
world; and it might, indeed, have been compared to the physical

232

An Outline of Occult Science
body without the eye to see—the ear to hear. The strength thus
employed in meditation has, in fact, been the creative means by
which these psycho-spiritual organs have been formed out of a
previously unorganized psycho-spiritual being. But this which
man thus creates for himself is also the first thing to be perceived
by him. The first experience is therefore in a certain sense, a kind
of “self-perception.” It belongs to the nature of spiritual training
that the soul, through the self training which it gives itself at
this point of its development, becomes fully conscious that the
first thing it perceives in the world of imaginative forms, which
appear as a result of the exercises described, is itself. It is true
that these images make their appearance as a new world, but
the soul must recognize that they are, however, at first nothing
but the reflection of its own being, which has been strengthened
by exercises. And it must not only recognize this by correct
reasoning, but must have arrived at such a cultivation of the will
that it is able at any time to put away and obliterate the images
from the consciousness.

The soul must be able to act with complete independence

[297]

within these images. This is part of true spiritual training at
this stage. If it could not do this, it would be in the same
position, in the sphere of spiritual experiences, as a soul in the
physical world which, on looking at an object, has its attention
so arrested by it that it cannot look away. An exception to
this possibility of obliteration is formed by a group of inner
imaginative experiences which should not be extinguished at this stage of spiritual training. They correspond to the inmost kernel
of the soul's being, and the occult student recognizes in those
images that which forms the very essence of his being which
passes through the various repeated earth lives. At this point the
knowledge of repeated earth lives becomes an actual experience.

In relation to everything else the before-mentioned independence
of experience must prevail. And only after acquiring the faculty
of obliterating experiences, is the spiritual outer world really

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

233
approached. What is obliterated returns in another form, and
is experienced as a spiritual outer reality. One feels that out
of something indefinite one grows psychically into something
definite. From this self-perception, one must then proceed to the
observation of a psycho-spiritual outer world. This comes to pass
when we can order our inner experience after the manner to be
indicated in the following pages.

At first, the soul of the occult student is feeble in all that
appertains to a perception of the psycho-spiritual world; and he
will therefore need all the inner energy he can summon in order,
while meditating, to hold firm the symbols or other concepts
which he has built up from the impulses of the sense-world.

[298]

Should he, however, desire to attain to an actual observation of
the higher world, he will not alone have to maintain his hold on
these, he must also, after having done this, be able to remain in
a condition in which not only no influences of the outer sense-
world can affect the soul, but in which also the images above
characterized shall have been effaced from his consciousness.

Only now can that which has been previously formed by means
of meditation enter the plane of his consciousness. The important
point is that there should be at this stage sufficient soul force
to spiritually perceive that which has thus been formed through
meditation, so that it may not elude the observer's attention,
as is always the case if this inner energy is still insufficiently
developed.

That which is here evolved as a psycho-spiritual organism
and which should be comprehended through self-perception, is
delicate and subtle. The disturbing influences of the outer sense-
world, however one may try to exclude them, are nevertheless
great. It is not merely a question of those disturbances to which
we are able to pay heed, but far more of those which in ordinary
life are ever eluding our notice. But it is just through the very
nature of man that a transitory condition in this respect becomes
possible. What the soul, in its waking state, was powerless to

234

An Outline of Occult Science
effect, owing to the disturbances of the physical world, it is

[299]

capable of achieving during sleep. One who gives himself up
to serious meditation will, with the proper attention, become
aware of a certain change in his sleep. He will feel that while
sleeping, he is yet not quite asleep, but that his soul has times
when, although asleep, still it is, in a certain way, active. During
these conditions, nature wards off the influences of the outer
world which the waking soul is not yet able to keep away of
its own strength.

When, however, the meditation exercises
have taken effect, the soul, during sleep, detaches itself from
unconsciousness, and becomes aware of the psycho-spiritual
world. This can happen in two ways: the person may, while
asleep, become aware that is is in another world, or he may, after
awakening, remember that he has been in another world. But the
former of these two feelings requires the greater degree of inner
energy, for which reason the second is the more common among
beginners in occult training. But it may gradually come to pass
that the student will become aware of having been during the
entire time of sleep in this other world, only emerging therefrom
when he awakes. And his memory of beings and facts connected
with this other world will become ever more and more distinct,
thus showing that in one form or another he has now entered upon
what one may call continuity of consciousness. (The continuation
of consciousness during sleep.)

Still, for this to be so, it is not necessary that man's
consciousness should always continue during sleep. Much will
already have been attained in the matter of the continuity of

[300]

consciousness should the person, whose sleep is in general like
that of the ordinary individual, have certain periods during his
sleeping hours when he is aware of being in the psycho-spiritual
world; or if, on awakening, he is able to remember such a
condition of consciousness. It should, however, be borne in mind
that what is here described is to be understood only as a transition
state. It is well to pass through this state as a part of training; yet it

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

235
should not be imagined that any conclusive views concerning the
psycho-spiritual world may be gained from this transition state,
for in this condition the soul is uncertain, and unable as yet to rely upon its own perceptions. But through such experiences the soul
gathers ever more strength enabling it also during waking hours
to ward off the disturbing influences of the physical outer and
inner world and thus to attain psycho-spiritual observation. Then
impressions through the senses no longer reach the soul; brain-
fettered reason is silent and even the image of the meditation,
through which one has only prepared oneself for spiritual vision,
has been dropped from consciousness. Whatever is given out
through occult science in this or that form should never originate
in any psycho-spiritual observation other than that which is made
with fully waking consciousness. The first experience is one
in which the student can say to himself: Even should I now
disregard everything that can come to me through impressions
from the outer physical world, still I look upon my inner being
not as upon one in which all activity has ceased, but I look upon
a being which is self-conscious in a world of which I know

[301]

nothing as long as I permit myself to be governed only by the
impressions of ordinary reason and of the senses. The soul at this
moment has the sensation that, in the manner described above, it
has given birth to a new being as its own essential soul-kernel.

And the being possesses totally different qualities from those
which were previously present in the soul.

The second experience of the soul is one in which man has
his former being, like a second independent one, alongside of
himself. That which had up to this time been imprisoned, evolves
now into something we are able to confront; we feel, in fact,
at certain times outside of what we have been accustomed to
regard as our own being, as our own ego. It is as though one
now lived in two egos,—one, which we have hitherto known; the
other, a newly born being, superior to the first,—and we become
aware that the former ego acquires a certain independence in its

236

An Outline of Occult Science
relationship to the second, just as the physical body has a certain
measure of freedom in its relation to that first ego.

This is an event of great importance, for through it man comes
to know what it means to live in that world which he has been
endeavoring to reach by means of training. It is this second, this
new-born, ego which can be led to cognizance of the spiritual
world, and in it can be developed that which has as much
significance for the spiritual world as our sense organs have for

[302]

the physical world of the senses. Should this development have
attained to the requisite degree, the student will not only be aware
of himself as a new-born ego, but he will recognize the spiritual
facts and entities around him, just as he perceives the physical
world through the action of his physical senses; and this is a third
important experience.

To meet properly this stage of spiritual training one must take
into account that with the strengthening of the forces of the soul
a degree of self-love and egoism appears with such intensity as
is quite unknown in the ordinary life of the soul. It would be
a mistake for anyone to think that it is only a case of ordinary
self-love at this point. Self-love becomes so strong at this stage
of development that it acquires the strength of a nature-force
within the soul, and a vigorous training of the will is necessary in
order to conquer this powerful egoism. This training of the will
must go hand in hand with the rest of the spiritual training. A
strong inclination exists to feel absolutely happy in a world which
we have gradually created for ourselves. And we must be able
to obliterate, in the manner above described, that to which we
have previously devoted ourselves with all our powers. We must
efface ourselves in the imaginative world we have reached. But this effacement is opposed by the strongest impulses of egoism.

The idea might easily arise that the exercises in spiritual
training are something merely external which have no connection

[303]

with the moral development of the soul. In this connection it must
be said that the moral force necessary for the conquest of egoism,

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

237
as described, cannot be gained unless the moral condition of the
soul is brought to a corresponding stage. Progress in spiritual
training is unthinkable unless moral progress takes place at the
same time. The conquest of egoism is impossible without moral
force. All talk of spiritual training not being at the same time
moral training is certainly contrary to fact.

Only he who passes through such an experience might advance
the following objections: how can one be sure to be dealing with
actualities, and not with mere fancies, visions or hallucinations,
when he thinks he is having spiritual perceptions? Now the matter
lies thus: every person, who has been systematically trained and
who has arrived at the stage already characterized, will be in a
position to note the difference between his own percept and a
spiritual reality, just as well as a man endowed with sound sense
knows the difference between the percept of a bar of hot iron
and the actual presence of such a bar that he touches with his
hand. The difference is determined by experience and by nothing
else; and in the spiritual world, too, life is the touchstone. Just
as we know that in the world of the senses an imagined bar
of iron, however hot, will burn no one's fingers, so does the
trained occultist know whether he is passing through a spiritual
experience merely in his imagination or whether his awakened
spiritual organs of perceptions are impressed by actual facts or

[304]

beings. The precautions to be taken during schooling, in order
that the student may not fall a victim to such delusions will be
dealt with in the following pages.

It is of the greatest importance that the student should have
attained to a certain very definite condition of the soul when the
consciousness of the new-born ego commences. For through his
ego, man is the ruler of his sensations, feelings, and conceptions,
his impulses, desires, and passions. Observations and percepts
cannot be left in the soul to follow their own devices; they must
be regulated according to the laws of thought. And it is the ego,
as it were, that controls these thought-laws, and by means of

238

An Outline of Occult Science
them brings order into the life of perception and thought.

It is similar with regard to desires and passions, inclinations
and impulses. The fundamental ethical laws become the guides
of these forces of the soul, and by reason of the moral judgment,
the ego becomes the soul's guide within this domain. Now if a
person detaches a higher ego from his ordinary ego, the latter
becomes to a certain extent independent. That much life-power
is now taken away from it as is needed for the use of that higher
ego. But let us consider the case of a person who has not, as
yet, developed certain ability and firmness in exercising the laws
of thought and in the power of judgment, but who nevertheless
desires to bring about the birth of his higher ego. He will be able

[305]

to leave to his ordinary ego only as much thought capacity as he
has previously developed. If the amount of well-ordered thinking
is insufficient, then the ordinary ego which has now become
independent, will certainly fall victim to confused, disordered,
fantastic thoughts and judgment, and moreover, since in such
a case the new-born ego must inevitably be weak also, the
disordered lower ego will gain the upper hand, and the person
will lose his ability for balanced judgment. Had he developed
sufficient capability and firmness in logical thinking, he might
have calmly left his ordinary ego to go its own way.

In the ethical sphere it is precisely the same.

Should a
person not have attained firmness in the matter of his moral
judgment, should he not have become sufficiently master over
his inclinations, impulses, and passions, he will then render his
ordinary ego independent while in a condition in which it will
be overwhelmed by all these soul forces. It may then happen
that the person will become worse through the birth of his higher
ego than he was before. Had he waited to bring about this birth
until he had sufficiently developed his ordinary self, attaining
firmness in the matter of ethical judgment, stability of character,
and depth of conscience, he would then have been in a position
to have all these virtues left within that first ego when the birth

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

239
of the second came about. Neglecting to do so, however, lays
him open to the danger of losing his moral balance, which under
the right course of training cannot happen.

Two things must here be borne in mind. First, that the facts

[306]

above related should be taken as seriously as possible; secondly,
that, on the other hand, they should in no way deter one from
entering upon such training.

Anyone who has the firm intention of doing all in his power
that may give confidence to the first ego in the execution of what
it has to fulfil, need never be dismayed when the second ego
becomes detached as the result of such spiritual training. Yet he
must remember that the power of self-delusion in man is very
great with regard to the belief that he has now reached the stage
of “ripeness” for any special thing.

During the spiritual training here described the student
develops his thought-life to such an extent that he is not exposed
to dangers which are often thought to be connected with training.

This cultivation of thought brings about all the inner experiences
that are necessary, but causes them to be so enacted that the
soul lives through them without any injurious shocks. Without
an adequate development of thought, these experiences may
produce a feeling of great uncertainty in the soul. The method
here emphasized calls forth experiences in such a way that they
may produce all their effect and yet not cause serious shocks.

By developing the life of thought the student becomes more
of a spectator of the experiences of his inner life, whereas
without such thought-development he is in the very midst of the
experience and is shaken by all the shocks incidental to it.

[307]

Systematic training points out certain qualities which the
student must acquire by means of exercises, in order to find
the way to the higher worlds and especial stress is laid on the
following,—control of the soul over its thoughts, its will, and its
feelings. The manner in which this control is acquired through
exercise has a dual aim. On the one hand, the soul by this practice

240

An Outline of Occult Science
acquires a firmness, reliance, and balance, which will not forsake
it even after the birth of the second ego; and on the other hand,
this latter ego is provided with strength and inner fortitude for its
journey.

What is required is that man's thinking power shall in all
domains conform to facts. In the physical world of the senses,
life is the great teacher of the human ego with regard to reality.

Were the soul to allow its thoughts to roam aimlessly hither and
thither, it would soon be corrected by life, unless it were willing
to enter into combat with it; the soul must conform its thoughts to
the facts of life. Now, when man leads his thoughts away from the
world of the physical senses, he misses the corrective influence
of this latter. If his thought is not able to be its own mentor, it will be as unsteady as a will-o'-the-wisp. Consequently, the student's
thought must be exercised in such a way that its course and object
are self-determined. Inner firmness and a capacity to concentrate
strictly on one object: this is what such thinking must of itself
engender. And for this reason the thought exercises should not

[308]

be concerned with complicated objects or those foreign to life,
but should, on the contrary, deal with those that are simple and
familiar. Any one who succeeds in fixing his mind, over a period
of several months and for a space of at least five minutes a day,
on such ordinary objects as a pin or a lead pencil, excluding for
the time being all other thoughts not concerned with the object
under contemplation, will have accomplished much in the right
direction. (A new article may be chosen each day, or the same
one adhered to for the space of several days.)

Even those who feel themselves to be “thinkers” need not
despise this method of preparing themselves for occult training,
because by fixing the attention for a time upon a really familiar
object one may be sure that he will be thinking in accordance
with facts, and one who asks himself the questions: “What
are the constituent parts of a pencil?” “How are these materials
prepared?” “How are they afterwards put together?” “When were

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

241
pencils invented, etc.?” will surely be adapting his perceptions
to realities more than he who meditates on the descent of man,
or asks himself what life is.

Simple thought exercises prepare us better for an adequate
concept of the world in its Saturn, Sun, and Moon stages of
development than those based on learned and complicated ideas.

For the important thing is not at all just to think, but to think in
conformity with facts by means of an inner force. Once one has
been trained to accuracy by means of an obvious, physical sense
process, the desire to think in conformity with facts will have
become habitual, even if thought does not feel itself under the

[309]

control of the physical sense-world and its laws; we then lose the
tendency to let our thoughts drift about aimlessly.

And as in the world of thought, so in the realm of the will,
the soul must become the ruler. In the physical sense-world it is
life that rules. It urges upon man this or that as a necessity, and
the will feels itself constrained to satisfy these same wants. In
following higher training, man must accustom himself to obey
his own commands strictly, and those who acquire this habit will
feel less and less inclined to desire what is of no moment. All
that is unsatisfying and unstable in the life of the will comes
from the desire for things of the possession of which we have
formed no distinct concept. Discontent such as this may, when
the higher ego is desirous of emerging from the soul, throw that
person's whole inner life into disorder; and it is a good exercise
to give oneself for the space of several months some command to
be carried out at a specified time of day: “To-day, at this or that
particular hour, you will do this or that thing.” Thus we gradually
become able to command the time at which a thing is to be done
and the manner in which it is to be performed, so as to admit
of its being accomplished with utmost exactitude. Thus we lift
ourselves above the bad habit of saying, “I should like this,” and

“I want the other,” while exercising no thought of the possibility
of its accomplishment.

[310]

242

An Outline of Occult Science

In the second part of Faust, Goethe puts the following words
into the mouth of a seeress: “Him I love who craves the
impossible,” and Goethe himself, in his “Prose Proverbs,” says:

“To live in the idea means treating the impossible as though 't
were possible.”

Such sentiments must not be put forward as objections against
what has here been stated, for the demands made by Goethe and
his seeress (Manto) can be fulfilled only by those who have first
educated themselves through desire for that which is possible,
and have in so doing, arrived at being able, by means of their
strong “will,” to treat the “impossible” in such a manner that
through their willing it becomes transformed into the possible.

A certain equanimity should pervade the soul of the occult
student concerning the world of feeling.

And to attain this
result, it is necessary that the soul should have mastery over the
expressions of joy and sorrow, pleasure and pain. But it is just
concerning the acquisition of this faculty that some prejudice
might arise: one might be afraid of becoming dull and indifferent
if he does not “rejoice with them that do rejoice, and weep
with them that weep.” Yet this is not what is meant. What is
pleasurable should rejoice the soul, and sorrow should give it pain, but what the soul is to learn to achieve is control over the
expression of joy and sorrow. If that is his aim, the student will
become aware that, far from becoming “dull and unsympathetic,”

[311]

he will be growing all the more receptive to the joy and sorrow
around him. But it is true that the student will here find that he
needs to watch himself carefully for a considerable time to be
able to acquire the faculty indicated. He must be careful to see
that he partakes of pain and pleasure to the full, yet without so
giving himself up to either that he gives involuntary expression
to it. It is not justified sorrow that should be suppressed, but the
involuntary weeping; not the revulsion against a mean act, but
the blind raging in anger; not the precaution against danger, but
the senseless “being afraid,” etc.

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

243

It is only by means of such exercises that the occult student
can gain the inner calmness of soul necessary in order that, at
the birth of the higher ego, the soul may not find itself as a
kind of double, leading a second and unhealthy life alongside of
the higher self. It is especially in these matters that we should
not yield to self-deception. Some people may be of the opinion
that they already possess in everyday life a certain degree of
equanimity, and that they therefore stand in no need of such
exercises; yet it is especially those who doubly need them. For
it is quite possible to remain equable when surveying the things
of this life, and then when ascending into the higher world to
show evidences of a want of equanimity all the greater because
it had only been held in check. For it should be emphatically
understood that in the matter of occult training it is not so much
a question of what we may already seem to possess, but of
carefully and regularly practicing what we need. Contradictory

[312]

as this phrase may appear, it is nevertheless true that though life
may have trained us to this or to that, the qualities to serve us
in occult training are those that we have acquired for ourselves.

Should life have rendered us excitable, we must train ourselves to
conquering this trait; yet if life has engendered in us equanimity,
we should so rouse ourselves by our own efforts that the soul
may be capable of responding to the impressions it receives. The
man who cannot laugh at anything, has just as little control over
his laughter as one who is perpetually giving way to uncontrolled
laughter.

Thought and feeling may be cultivated by yet another means,
namely, by the acquirement of the characteristic known as
positiveness. There is a beautiful legend in which it is related
of Christ Jesus, that He, with others, passed the dead body of a
dog. The others turned aside from the hideous sight, but Christ

Jesus spoke admiringly of the creature's beautiful teeth. One can,
through practice, attain to the condition of mind in regard to the
world, which is indicated in this legend. Error, vice, and ugliness

244

An Outline of Occult Science
should not deter the soul from seeing truth, goodness, and beauty,
wherever they are to be found. Nor is this positiveness to be
mistaken for want of judgment, or for deliberately closing the
eyes to what is bad, false, and inferior. He who can admire the
beautiful teeth of a decaying animal can also see that decaying
corpse—yet the corpse does not hinder his observing the beauty
of the teeth. Thus, though what is bad cannot be deemed good,

[313]

nor error acclaimed as truth, we can yet train ourselves so that
what is bad need not prevent us from recognizing what is good,
nor need errors render us insensible to that which is true.

Thought, combined with will, attains to a certain maturity
if we strive never to allow what we have already experienced
or learned to rob us of our unbiased receptiveness for new
experiences. Such a thought as: “I have never heard that before;

I don't believe it!” should lose all significance where the occult
student is concerned; indeed, he should endeavour, for a fixed
period of time, to allow every thing and every creature to convey
something new to his mind. Every breath of air, every leaf on
the tree, the prattling of a child,—each and all will teach him
something, provided he be willing to bring a different point of
view to bear upon it from the one he has hitherto held.

It may, of course, be possible to go too far in this particular,
and we must not at any time lose sight of the experiences we have
previously had. Indeed, what we experience in the present should
be judged in accordance with the sum of our past experiences.

These must be laid on one side of the scale, while on the other
the occult student should place an inclination for ever gathering
new knowledge. Above all, a belief in the possibility that new
experiences may contradict the old.

Thus we have enumerated those five qualities of the soul which
the occult student in regular training, should acquire; control of

[314]

the trend of his thoughts; control of the impulses of his will;
equanimity in sorrow and joy; positiveness in his judgment of
the world; and impartiality in his view of life. After giving

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

245
consecutive periods of time to the acquiring of these qualities
through continued practice, the student must go still further, and
bring all these qualities into a harmonious whole within the soul,
to achieve which, he will have to practice the exercises in twos
and twos together, or three and one, simultaneously, so as to
bring about the harmony desired.

The exercises indicated above are thus given out by occult
teaching because if faithfully carried out, they not only produce
in the occult student what we have called above direct results, but
they lead indirectly to much else that is needed on the path to the
higher worlds. He who practices these exercises sufficiently will,
while doing so, become aware of many a lack and many a failing
in his own soul-life, and he will at the same time find in them
the very means necessary to give strength and security to the
intellect, to the emotional tendencies and to the character as well.

He will assuredly need many additional exercises, according to
his capacities, temperament, and character; these, however, will
present themselves if the above be frequently carried out. Indeed,
one will notice that the already indicated exercises, indirectly,
gradually yield that which at first does not seem to be in them.

A person endowed with but little self-confidence, for instance,
finds in the course of time, that by persistent practice the needed

[315]

confidence in himself has come about. And it is the same with
many other soul qualities.28

It is a matter of significance that the occult student is capable
of raising these capabilities to ever higher degrees; and he must
succeed in so controlling his thoughts and feelings that the soul
will have power to maintain complete inner quietude for certain
periods of time—periods during which he can keep out of his
mind and heart all those things that in any way concern the
outer everyday life, its joys and sorrows, its pleasures and cares,
even its tasks and demands. At such a time nothing should be

28 Special exercises going into greater detail on this subject may be found in my book entitled The Way of Initiation.

246

An Outline of Occult Science
allowed entrance into the soul except what the soul itself admits.

An abjection may easily be made to this. One might imagine
that alienation must result if the student withdraws in heart and
spirit from life and its duties for a certain part of the day. Yet
in reality, this is by no means the case. For those who, in the
above manner, give themselves up to periods of inner quietude
and peace will find that out of these there grows such a fund of
energy for fulfilling the outer duties of life that they are not only
not less efficiently performed, but assuredly more so.

It is of great benefit at such times to detach oneself entirely
from thoughts of personal affairs, and to be able to raise oneself
to that which affects not oneself alone, but all mankind. If he is

[316]

then able to fill his soul with messages from a higher spiritual
world, and if they have the power of enthralling his soul to as
intense a degree as any personal concern or care, then indeed
will his soul have gathered fruit of especial value.

Those who thus exert themselves to regulate their soul-life
will arrive at the possibility of a degree of self-observation that
will permit them to review their personal affairs with the same
tranquillity as those of others. Seeing one's own experiences and
one's own joys and sorrows in the light in which those of another
appear, is a good preparation for occult training. We bring this
exercise gradually to the necessary stage, if, after the day's work
is over, we allow the pictures of the day's occurrences to pass
before the mind's eye. We would then see ourselves within our
own experiences as in a picture; in other words, we would look
at ourselves in our daily life, as an outside observer.

A certain practice in self-observation having been gained by
concentrating the attention upon short divisions of the day's
experience, the student will become more and more expert in this
kind of retrospect, continued practice enabling him to review the
events of the whole day completely and quickly. It will become
ever more and more the ideal of the occult student to assume
such an attitude with regard to the events of life which confront

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

247
him that he will be able to await their approach with absolute
calm and inner confidence, no longer judging them by the state
of his own soul but according to their own inner meaning and

[317]

inner worth. And it is by looking to this ideal that he will create
a condition of soul that will enable him to meditate profoundly,
as described above, upon symbolical and other thoughts and
feelings.

The conditions here described must be fulfilled, because
supersensible experience is built upon the foundation on which
the student stands in his ordinary soul-life, before he enters
the supersensible world. In a two-fold way, all supersensible
experience is dependent upon the soul's point of departure before
entering that world. One who is not intent, from the outset, on
making sound powers of judgment the foundation of his spiritual
training will develop supersensible capacities which perceive the
spiritual world inaccurately and incorrectly. To a certain extent
his spiritual organs of perception will develop in the wrong
way. And just as a man with a defective or diseased eye cannot
see correctly in the sense-world, so it is not possible to have
true perceptions with spiritual organs which are not built upon
the foundation of sound powers of judgment. One who starts
from an immoral state of soul rises into the spiritual worlds
with his spiritual vision stupified and clouded. In regard to
supersensible worlds he is like a person in the sense-world who
makes observations in a state of lethargy. The latter, however,
will not be able to make any statements of consequence, whereas
the spiritual observer, even in his stupefaction, is more awake
than a person in the ordinary state of consciousness, and the

[318]

results of his observations will therefore be erroneous in regard
to the spiritual world.

The highest possibilities of imaginative cognition can be
realized by supporting the aforesaid meditations by that which
one might call “sense-free” thinking. Now when we formulate

248

An Outline of Occult Science
an idea based upon observations made in the physical sense-
world, our thought is not free from sense-impressions. Yet it
is not as though man could formulate only such ideas: human
thought need not become void and meaningless simply because
it is not filled with observations derived through the channels of
the senses. The most direct and the safest way for the occult
student to acquire this “sense-free” thinking, is to make the facts
of the higher worlds presented by occult science, the subject
of his thoughts. These facts cannot be observed by means of
the physical senses; nevertheless, the student will find that he
will be able to grasp them—if only he has enough patience and
perseverance. No one can explore higher worlds, or make his
own observations therein, without having been trained. But it is
quite possible without training to understand everything which
investigators communicate about those regions. Should anyone
ask, “How can I accept on trust what the occultist tells me, being
myself as yet unable to see it?”—such an objection would be
groundless, for it is perfectly possible to arrive through mere
reflective thinking at the sure conviction that the matters thus

[319]

communicated are true.

If a man is unable, through reflecting, to arrive at such a
conviction, the reason is not that he cannot possibly “believe”

something he cannot see, but simply because he has not as
yet applied his powers of reflective thinking in a sufficiently
unbiased, comprehensive and profound manner.

In order to be clear on this point, it must be borne in mind
that human thought, if it arouses itself to energetic activity,
can understand more than it usually imagines possible. For in
thought there is an inner essence which is in connection with
the supersensible world. The soul is not usually conscious of
this connection, because it is wont to train its faculty of thought
only through the world of sense.

On this account it thinks
incomprehensible what is imparted to it from the supersensible
world.

What is thus communicated is, however, not only

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

249
intelligible to thought which has been spiritually trained, but to
any thinking which is fully conscious of its power and is willing
to make use of it.

By the persevering assimilation of what occult teachers are
able to impart to us we habituate ourselves to a line of thought that
is not derived from sense-observation, and we learn to recognize
how, within the soul, one thought is allied to another, and how
one thought calls forth another, even when the connection of
ideas is not occasioned by any power of sense-observation. The
essential point is that by this method we become aware of the
fact that the world of thought possesses an inner life, and that
while we are engaged in thought we are, indeed, in the realm

[320]

of a supersensible living power. Thus we may say to ourselves:

“There is something within me that develops an organism of
thought; nevertheless, I am one with this something.” And thus
in yielding to this sense-free thinking, we experience something
like a being, which flows into our inner life, just as the qualities
of the things of the senses flow into us through our physical
organs when used for sense-observation.

“Out there in space,” says the observer of the sense-world, “is a
rose: it is not unfamiliar to me, for both scent and colour proclaim
its presence.” And in like manner, when sense-free thought is
working within us, we need only be sufficiently unbiased in
order to be able to say: “Something real proclaims its presence
to me, linking thought to thought and constituting a thought-
organism”—only there is a difference to be noted between the
communication coming to the observer from the outer world
of the senses, and that which actually reaches the sense-free
thinker. The former feels that he is standing without—in front
of the rose—whereas he who has given himself up to thinking
which is untrammelled by the senses will feel within himself
whatever thus proclaims its presence to him; he will feel himself
one with it.

Those who, more or less, unconsciously consider as beings

250

An Outline of Occult Science
only that which they can perceive as external objects, will, it
is true, be unable to entertain the feeling that whatever has the
nature of a being, can also manifest itself within man by his

[321]

becoming one with it. In order to judge correctly one must be
able to have the following inner experiences: one must learn to
distinguish between the thought combinations created through
one's own volition, and those experienced without any voluntary
exercise of the will. In the latter case, we may then say: I remain
quite still within myself; I produce no trains of thought; I yield
to that which “thinks within me.” Then we are fully justified in
saying: Within me a being is acting, just as we are justified in
saying that the rose acts upon us when we see a certain red, when
we perceive a certain odor.

Nor is there any contradiction in having derived the contents
of our ideas from communications made by the occult seer. The
ideas are, it is true already there when we devote ourselves to
them; yet they cannot be “thought”, without in each case being
created anew within the soul. The important point is that the
occult teacher seeks to awaken in his hearers and readers the
kind of thoughts which they must first call forth from within
themselves, whereas he who describes some physical object
indicates something that the listener or reader may observe
within the sense-world.

(The path which leads to sense-free thinking by means of the
communications made by occult science is thoroughly safe. But
there is also another method even safer and above all things more
exact, yet for this very reason more difficult for the majority.

This method is set forth in my two books, “Goethe's Conception

[322]

of the World” and “The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity.” These writings set forth what human thought can achieve for itself,
if the thinking is not under the influence of the physical sense
impressions but relies merely upon itself. Then pure thinking
works within man like a living being. At the same time nothing in
the above-mentioned writings is derived from communications

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

251
due to occult science itself, and yet it is shown that pure, self-
reliant thinking can obtain information about the world, life and
man.

These writings therefore occupy a very important intermediate
position between the actual cognition of the sense-world and that
of the spiritual world. They present that which thinking can gain
when it raises itself above sense-observation and yet does not
enter into occult research. Anyone who allows these books to
work upon his whole soul, already stands within the spiritual
world, but it appears to him as a world of thought. Those who
are in a position to allow this intermediate condition to act upon
them, will be following a safe and sane path and can thus win for
themselves a feeling concerning the higher worlds, which will
for all future time ensure for them most abundant results.)

The object of meditating upon the above described symbolical
concepts and feelings is, strictly speaking, the development of
the higher organs of cognition within man's astral body. They are
in the first place created from the substance of the astral body.

These new organs of observation establish a connection with a

[323]

new world wherein man learns to know himself as a new ego.

These new organs of perception are first of all to be
distinguished from those of the physical sense-world by being
active organs. Whereas the eye and ear are passive, allowing
light and sound to work upon them, it may be said of these
perceptive organs of the soul and spirit that, while functioning
they are in a perpetual state of activity, and that they seize hold
of their objects and facts, as it were, in full consciousness. This
gives rise to the feeling that psycho-spiritual cognition is a union
with,—a “dwelling within,”—the corresponding facts.

These separately evolving psycho-spiritual organs may be
compared to “lotus flowers” corresponding to the appearance
which they present to the clairvoyant consciousness, as they are

252

An Outline of Occult Science
formed from the substance of the astral body.29

Very definite kinds of meditation act upon the astral body
in such manner that certain psycho-spiritual organs, the so-
called “lotus flowers,” are developed. Any proper meditation
undertaken with the view of attaining to imaginative cognition
has its effect upon one or another of these organs.30

A regular course of training arranges and orders the separate
exercises to be practised by the occult student, so that these

[324]

organs may either simultaneously or consecutively attain their
suitable development, and on this process the student will have
to bring much patience and perseverance to bear. Those, indeed,
who are possessed of no more than the average amount of
patience with which man, under ordinary conditions of life is
endowed, will not reach very far. For it takes a long—often a
very long time indeed—before these organs have reached a point
at which the occult student is able to use them for observing
things in the higher worlds. At this point comes what is known
as “illumination,” in contradistinction to the “preparation,” or

“purification,” which consists in the practices undertaken for
the formation of these organs. (The term “purification” is used
because in order to reach certain phases of inner life, the pupil
cleanses himself through the corresponding exercises, of that
which belongs to the world of sense observation.)

It is, however, quite possible that before actual illumination,
the student may get repeated “flashes of light” from a higher
world. These he should receive gratefully. Even these can make
him a witness of the spiritual realms. Yet he must not falter
should this never be vouchsafed him during his entire period of

29 It must of course be clearly understood that such an appellation as “lotus flower” has no more bearing on the matter than has the expression “wing,” if applied to the lobe of a lung.

30 In my books, entitled “The Way of Initiation” and “Initiation and Its Results,” some of these methods of meditation and exercises for acting upon these different organs are set forth.

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

253
preparation, and should its consequent duration seem all too long
to him. Indeed, those who yield to impatience “because they
can as yet see nothing,” have not yet acquired the right attitude
toward the higher worlds. Those alone will be in a position
to grasp this who can view the exercises they undertake as an
object in themselves. For this practice is in truth a working on

[325]

something psycho-spiritual, namely, on their own astral body;
even though they do not “see,” they can “feel” that they are
working on the psycho-spiritual plane. Only when we have
a preconceived idea of what we “wish to see,” are we unable
to experience this feeling. In that case we may consider as
nothing what is, in reality, of immeasurable importance. But one
should observe minutely everything which one experiences while
practicing,—experiences which are so fundamentally different
from those of the sense-world. We shall then become aware that
we cannot work upon our astral body as though it were some
indifferent substance; but that in it there lives a totally different
world of which the life of our senses does not inform us.

Higher entities act upon the astral body in the same way in
which the world of the physical senses acts upon the physical
body, and we “come upon” that higher life in our own astral
body, provided only we do not shut ourselves out from it. If
we are perpetually saying: “I am aware of nothing,” then it is
generally the case that we imagined that these experiences should
appear thus and so; and because we do not see what we imagined
we should see, we say, “I can see nothing.”

However, he who is able to acquire the right attitude of mind
with regard to his practice during training, will find more and
more that he has something which he loves for its own sake and
which, as an immeasurably important vital function, he can no

[326]

longer do without. He will then know that through these very
practices he is standing in the psycho-spiritual world and will
await with patience and resignation what may further transpire.

This attitude of mind of the student may best be expressed in

254

An Outline of Occult Science
such words as these: “I will do all the exercises which have been assigned to me; for I know that in the fullness of time as much
will come to me as I should receive; I do not ask for it impatiently,
but I prepare myself to receive it.” On the other hand one should
not raise the objection: The occult student, then, is expected
perhaps for a long time to feel around in the dark, because he
cannot know that he is on the right path with his exercises, before
he obtains results. It is not true, however, that he must wait
until the results prove to him the correctness of the exercises.

If the attitude of the student is right, then the satisfaction which
he experiences in the practice of these exercises, in itself carries
the conviction that he is doing the right thing, and he does not
need to wait for results to prove it. The correct practice of
exercises in occult training brings with it a satisfaction that is
not merely satisfaction, but conviction—the conviction that I am
doing something which shows me that it is leading me forward in
the right direction. Every occult student may have this conviction
at any moment if he pays careful attention to his experiences.

Should he not exercise such attention, he will simply pass by
these experiences just as a wayfarer in profound thought does not

[327]

notice the trees alongside of the road, though he would surely
see them if he would but direct his attention to them.

It is by no means desirable that results, other than those which
are always due to such practice, should in any way be hastened.

For such results might easily be only an infinitesimal part of
what should really take place. Indeed, in the matter of occult
development, partial results are, more often than not, the cause
of considerable delay in complete development. Contact with
such forms of spiritual life corresponding to partial development,
tends to dull the perceptive faculties to the influences of those
powers which would lead on to higher stages of development;
while the benefit derived from such a “glimpse” of the spiritual
world, is after all only a seeming one, because this glimpse
cannot divulge the truth, but only deceptive illusions.

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

255

The psycho-spiritual organs, the “lotus flowers,” shape
themselves in such a manner that to clairvoyant consciousness
they appear in the vicinity of particular physical organs of the
body of the person undergoing training. From among these
psycho-spiritual organs the following should be enumerated: that
which is to be perceived between the eye-brows is the so-called
two-petalled lotus flower; that in the region of the larynx is
the sixteen-petalled lotus; in the region of the heart is to be
found the twelve-petalled lotus flower and the fourth is near the

[328]

navel. Others appear in close conjunction with other parts of the
physical body.31

The lotus flowers are formed in the astral body, and by the
time one or the other has developed, we become conscious of
them. We then feel that we can make use of them, and that
by doing so we really enter a higher world. The impressions
received of that world still resemble in many respects those of
the physical senses; and one with imaginative cognition will
be able to designate the new higher world as impressions of
heat or cold, perceptions of sound or words, effects of light or
color—because it is in this way that he perceives them. He is,
however, conscious of the fact that these perceptions express
something different in the imaginative world from what they do
in the actual sense-world; and he recognizes that behind them lie
causes which are not physical, but psycho-spiritual ones.

Should he receive an impression of heat he will not, for
instance, attribute this to a piece of hot iron, but will regard it
as the emanation of some soul-process, which he has hitherto
experienced only with his soul's inner life.

He knows that
behind imaginative experiences exist psycho-spiritual things and

31 The appellation “two-petalled” or “sixteen-petalled,” and so on, is used because the organs in question may be likened to flowers having a corresponding number of petals.

256

An Outline of Occult Science
processes just as behind physical perceptions we have physical
entities and material facts.

And yet this similarity, apparent between the world of

[329]

imagination and the physical world, is modified by one important
difference. There is something present in the physical world
which, when met in the imaginative world, bears quite another
appearance. In the former we are aware of a perpetual ebb
and flow, an alternation between birth and death. But in the
imaginative world there appears, in place of this phenomenon,
a continual metamorphosis of the one into the other. In the
physical world we see, for instance, how a plant fades away,
but in the imaginative world there emerges, in proportion as the
plant fades, another form, not physically discernible, into which
the withering plant is gradually transformed. When once the
plant has faded away completely, this form will have become
fully developed in its place. Birth and death are conceptions
which lose their value in the imaginative world, making way for
a comprehension of the transmutation of the one into the other.

This being the case, those truths concerning which we have
already made certain communications in an earlier chapter of this
book (see Chapter II, “The Nature of Man”) become accessible
to the imaginative perception. Physical sense-perception is able
to perceive only what takes place in the physical body, processes
which are enacted within the “domain of birth and death.” The
other principles of man's being, namely, the etheric or vital
body, the sentient body, and the ego, are subject to the law
of transmutation, and the perception of them is unlocked by
imaginative cognition. Any one who has advanced this far will

[330]

observe that that which lives on under other conditions of being
after death, detaches itself from the physical body.

But development does not come to a standstill within the
imaginative world. Anyone who would like to remain stationary
in it, would, it is true, be able to note the entities in process of
transmutation, but he would be unable to interpret the meaning of

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

257
these processes of change. He would not be in a position to find
his way about in this newly attained world. For the imaginative
world is a realm of unrest—there is naught in it but movement
and change; nowhere are there stationary points. Such points
of rest are reached only by the person who, having transcended
the stage of imaginative knowledge, has attained to that grade of
development known to occult science as “understanding through
inspiration.”

It is not necessary for one seeking knowledge of the
supersensible world to develop his capacities so that the
imaginative cognition should have been acquired in full measure,
before moving on to the stage of “inspiration.” His exercises
may, indeed, be so regulated that two processes may go on
simultaneously, one leading to imagination and the other to
inspiration. The student will then in due time enter a higher
world, in which he not only perceives, but where he can also find
his way about, as it were, and which he becomes able to interpret.

Progress, as a rule, consists in the occult student perceiving some
apparitions of the imaginative world and becoming conscious,

[331]

after a while, that he is beginning to get his bearings.

Yet the world of inspiration is something quite new compared
with the purely imaginative realm. By means of the latter we learn
to know the transformation of one process into another; while
through the former we come to recognize the inner qualities of
ever changing beings. Imagination shows us the soul-expression
of such beings; through inspiration we penetrate into their
spiritual core. Above all, we become aware of a multiplicity
of spiritual beings and of their relation to one another. In the
physical sense-world we have also, of course, to do with a
multiplicity of different beings, yet in the world of inspiration
this multiplicity is of a different character. In that world each
being sustains quite definite relations to all the other beings, not,
however, as in the physical world through outer influence upon
them, but through their essential inner nature.

258

An Outline of Occult Science

When we become aware of a being in the world of inspiration,
no external impression made upon another is apparent, such as
might be compared with the influence of one physical being
upon another; a relation nevertheless exists which is purely
the result of the inner constitution of the two beings.

This
relationship may be compared with that in which the separate
sounds or letters of a word stand to one another in the physical
world. If we take the word “man,” the impression made is
due to a consonance of the letters, m-a-n. There is no impact

[332]

nor other outer influence passing from the “m” to the “a,” but
both letters sound together within “a whole,” owing to their
very nature. This is why observations made in the world of
inspirations can only be compared to reading and the observer
sees the beings of this world like written characters which he must
learn and whose inner relations must reveal themselves to him
like a supersensible writing. Therefore occult science can call
cognition through inspiration, figuratively, the “reading of the
secret script.” How one may read by this “secret script” and how
one can communicate what has thus been read will now be made
clear by reference to previous chapters in this book. Man's being
was first described as composed of different principles. It was
then further shown how the cosmos in which man is developing,
passes through various conditions; those of Saturn, Sun, Moon,
and Earth. The perception by means of which we are able on
the one hand to discern the principles of the human being, and,
on the other, the successive states of the Earth and its previous
transformations, is revealed to the imaginative cognition. But it
is now further necessary that the relations existing between the

Saturn state and man's physical body; between the Sun state and
the etheric body, etc., be understood. It must be shown that even
during the Saturn state the germ of man's physical body came
into existence, and that it has then further developed to its present
form during the Sun, Moon, and Earth periods.

It had to be shown for example, what changes took place

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

259
in the human being owing to the separation of the sun from

[333]

the earth, and also that something similar again took place in
connection with the moon. We had, moreover, to make plain what
contributed to the bringing about of such changes in mankind
as those which took place in the Atlantean era, how they were
manifested in the successive Indian, ancient Persian, Egyptian,
and other periods. The description of this sequence of events
is not the result of imaginative perception, but of inspirational
cognition derived from the reading of the secret script. For such
reading, the imaginative perceptions are like letters, or sounds,
although such reading is not alone necessary for interpretations
like the above. It would be impossible to comprehend the whole
life-process of man by means of imaginative cognition alone.

One might possibly be in a position to note how, in the process
of dying, the psycho-spiritual principles detach themselves from
what remains in the physical world, but it would be impossible
to understand the connection between what happens to man after
death and the preceding and following stages, were we unable to
find our way through the facts obtained by imaginative cognition.

Without inspirational knowledge the entire imaginative world
would remain mere writing, at which we gaze but which we are
unable to read.

As the student proceeds from imagination to inspiration he
will soon see how wrong it would be to neglect this understanding
of the facts of the universe and limit himself only to those facts
which, so to speak, touch his close personal interests. Indeed,

[334]

those who are not initiated into these matters may be inclined to
say: “The only thing that seems of any importance to me is that I
should ascertain the fate of the human soul after death. If anyone
can give me information upon that subject, it will suffice; but
of what use is it for occult science to present to me such remote
subjects as the Saturn and Sun states, or the separation of the
moon and the sun, etc.?”

Those, however, who have been properly instructed in these

260

An Outline of Occult Science
things will recognize that a true understanding of what they
desire to learn could not be obtained without knowledge of these
matters, which appear so unnecessary to them. A delineation of
man's states after death would remain utterly incomprehensible
and valueless to one who is unable to connect it with ideas
derived from those very far-off events. Even the most elementary
observations of a clairvoyant necessitate his acquaintance with
such things.

When, for example, a plant passes from the blossom to a
state of fruition, the clairvoyant observes a change in the astral
being, which, while the plant is in blossom, has covered and
surrounded the blossoming plant from above like a cloud. Had
fructification not taken place, this astral being would have been
changed into quite a different form from the one it now assumes
in consequence of this fertilization. Now we understand the
entire process thus clairvoyantly observed, if we have learned

[335]

to comprehend our own nature through a knowledge of that
great cosmic process, in which the earth and all its inhabitants
were involved at the time of the separation from the sun. Before
fertilization, the plant is in the same condition as was the whole
earth before the sun separated from it. After the fertilization of
the blossom, however, the condition of the plant is that of the
earth after the separation of the Sun had taken place, while the
moon-forces were still active in it.

Those who have thoroughly assimilated the idea to be gained
by a comprehension of this separation of the sun, will now
be able to interpret correctly the significance of the process of
plant fertilization, when it is said that “the plant previous to
fructification is in a ‘sun state,’ and afterward in the ‘moon
state.’ ” Indeed, it may be said of even the smallest occurrence
in the world that it can be fully understood only when the
reflection of great cosmic events is recognized in it. Otherwise
its inner nature remains just as unintelligible as Raphael's Sistine

Madonna would be for one who could see only a small blue

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

261
speck, while the rest of it remained covered.

Everything that happens to man is a reflection of all those
great cosmic events that have to do with his existence. Those
who wish to understand the observations made by clairvoyant
consciousness of the phenomena taking place between birth and
death, and again between death and a new birth, will be able to
do so if they first acquire the faculty of interpreting imaginative
observations by means of conceptions gained by reflecting upon

[336]

great cosmic events. These contemplations, indeed, furnish the
key to a comprehension of human life. Therefore the study of

Saturn, Sun, and Moon are, from the standpoint of occult science,
at the same time a study of man.

Through inspiration one arrives at a knowledge of the
relationships between the beings of the higher world, and a
further stage of cognition makes it then possible to recognize
the inner essential nature of these beings themselves.

This
stage of cognition is known to occult science as that of intuitive
cognition.32

Cognition of a sense-being implies standing outside of it, and
judging it according to outer impressions. Intuitive cognition of
a spiritual being implies being at one with it; uniting oneself with
the inner nature of that being. Step by step, the occult student
ascends toward such cognition. Imagination leads him no longer
to consider phenomena as the external qualities of beings, but to
recognize them as psycho-spiritual emanations; inspiration leads
him further into the inner nature of these beings. Here we can
again illustrate by means of the foregoing chapters what is the
meaning of intuition. In those earlier chapters it has not only been

[337]

32 Intuition is in everyday life a much-abused word, which is made to stand for a vague and uncertain view of a matter; for some sort of “notion,” which, while it may possibly “hit” the truth, can nevertheless give no immediate proof of it. It is needless to say that this kind of intuition is not meant here. Intuition, in this case, stands for knowledge of the highest and most luminous clearness, of the justification of which the possessor is, in the fullest sense, conscious.

262

An Outline of Occult Science
stated how the progress of the Saturn, Sun and Moon evolutions
proceeded; but also that beings took part, in widely different
ways, in that progress, and mention was made of the Thrones
or Spirits of Will, the Spirits of Wisdom, the Spirits of Motion,
and so on. In connection with the earth's development, reference
was made to the Luciferian spirits and spirits of Ahriman. The
structure of the world was traced back to those beings who took
part in it. All knowledge pertaining to these beings is derived
from intuitive cognition, which is also necessary, if we wish to
understand man's life.

That which is released from the human physical body at
death passes on through various states in the future.

The
more immediate conditions after death might, to some extent,
be described by referring to imaginative cognition, but that
which takes place when man has proceeded farther into that
time lying between death and a new birth would be entirely
incomprehensible to the imagination, did not inspiration come to
its aid. For inspiration alone can disclose what can be revealed
about man's life after its purification in the “land of spirits.” We
come to a point where inspiration is no longer adequate—where
it reaches the limit of its possibilities. For there is a period in
human development, between death and a new birth, in which
the human being is accessible only to intuition.

Yet this part of the human being is always within man, and
if we wish to understand it in its true inner nature we must

[338]

also seek it, between birth and death, by means of intuition.

Anyone attempting to fathom man by means of imagination
and inspiration alone would miss the very innermost being,
that which continues from incarnation to incarnation.

It is
therefore by intuitive cognition alone that adequate research
concerning reincarnation and Karma becomes possible, and all
genuine knowledge of these processes is derived from research
undertaken by means of intuition. If a man wishes to know his
own inner self, he can only do so by intuition; by its aid he

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

263
becomes aware of what it is that moves onward within him from
incarnation to incarnation; and should it fall to anyone's lot to
know something about his earlier incarnations, this can only take
place through intuitive cognition.

Cognition through inspiration and intuition is attainable only
by means of psycho-spiritual exercises, and they resemble those
meditations practiced for the attainment of imagination which
have already been described.

While, however, in exercises
for the development of the imagination, a connection is set up
with impressions belonging to the world of the physical senses,
such connections gradually cease in the case of exercises for
inspiration. In order to understand more clearly what must be
done, let us recall once more the symbol of the “rosy cross.”

When we meditate on this we have before us a picture, of which
the component parts have been taken from the world of the
senses: there is the black colour of the cross, the roses, etc., and

[339]

yet the combination of those various parts into the “rosy cross”

is not derived from the world of the senses. If the student now
endeavours to banish from his consciousness both the black cross
and the red roses, as pictures of sense-realities, only retaining
in his soul that spiritual activity which has been used in putting
these parts together, he will then have a means for a meditation
that will gradually lead him on to inspiration. He should put the
question to himself somewhat in the following manner: “What
have I done inwardly to construct that symbol from cross and
rose? What I did (an act of my own soul), I will retain within my
hold; but the picture itself I will allow to fade away out of my
consciousness. I shall then be able to feel within me all that my
soul did in order to produce the picture, though I no longer recall
the picture itself. I will now live wholly within my own activity
that created the picture. I will not meditate upon a picture, but
upon the powers of my own soul which are capable of creating
pictures.”

264

An Outline of Occult Science

Such meditations must now be practised with various other
symbols. This leads then to cognition through inspiration. Here
is another example, that of meditating upon the growth and
subsequent withering of a plant. Let the picture of a slowly
growing plant arise in the soul, as it sprouts from the seed,
unfolds leaf after leaf, then blossoms and fruits; then again as
it begins to wither on to its complete dissolution. By the help
of meditations on such a symbol as this, the student gradually

[340]

attains a feeling concerning growth and decay of which the plant
is but a symbol. If the exercises be persevered in continuously,
the image of the transformation which underlies physical growth
and decay can be evolved from this feeling.

But if one wishes to attain the corresponding stage of
inspiration, this exercise must be practised quite differently.

Here one's own activity of soul must be called to mind,—that
which had obtained the conception of growth and decay from
the image of the plant.

The plant must now be allowed to
vanish altogether from the consciousness, and the attention be
concentrated entirely upon the student's own inner activity. It is
only such exercises as these that help us to rise to inspiration.

At first the occult student will find it difficult to fully grasp how
to set about such an exercise. This is because man is used to
permitting his inner life to be governed by outward impressions,
and thus falls immediately into uncertainty and wavering when
now he must unfold in addition a soul life which has freed itself
from all connections with outward impressions.

Here the student must clearly understand that he should only
undertake these exercises if along with them he cultivates
everything that may lead to firmness and stability in his
judgment, emotional life, and character; these precautions are
even more necessary than when seeking to acquire the faculty of
imagination. Should he take these precautions, he will be doubly
successful, for, in the first place, he will not risk losing the

[341]

balance of his personality through the exercises; and secondly,

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

265
he will acquire the capacity of being really able to carry out what
is demanded in these exercises. They will be deemed difficult
only as long as one has not yet attained a particular attitude
of soul, and certain feelings and sentiments. He who patiently
and perseveringly cultivates within his soul such qualities as are
favourable to the growth of supersensible cognition, will not be
long in acquiring both the understanding and the faculty for these
practices.

Any one who can acquire the habit of frequently entering into
the quiet of his own soul, and who, instead of brooding over
himself, transforms and orders those experiences he has had in
life, will gain much. For he will perceive that his thoughts
and feelings become richer, if through memory he establishes a
relationship between the different experiences of life. He will
become aware that he gains stores of new knowledge not only
through new impressions and new experiences, but also by letting
the old ones be active within him.

He who allows his experiences and his opinions free play,
keeping himself with his sympathies and antipathies, personal
interests and feelings entirely in the background, will prepare an
especially fertile soil for supersensible cognition. He will in very
truth be developing what may be called a rich inner life. But
what is of primary importance is the balance and equilibrium of
the qualities of the soul. People are very apt to become one-sided
when indulging in certain activities of the soul. Thus, when a

[342]

person has come to know the advantages of contemplation, and
of dwelling upon pictures derived from his own thought-world,
he is apt to develop a tendency to withdraw himself from the
impressions of the outer world. Yet such a step only leads to
parching and withering the inner life; and he will go farthest who
manages to retain an unchecked receptivity for all impressions of
the outer world, while possessing the power to withdraw within
his own inner self. It is by no means necessary to think only of
the so-called important events of life: every one, in every sphere

266

An Outline of Occult Science
of life, be his four walls ever so humble, will be possessed of
experience enough, provided only his mind is truly receptive.

Experiences need not be sought—they abound on every hand.

Of particular importance is the way in which experience may
be utilized by the human soul. For instance, one may make the
discovery that someone whom he or another greatly reveres, has
some quality that must be regarded as a flaw in his character. An
experience of this kind may lead the person to whom it comes to
thoughts which will tend toward one of two different directions.

He may simply feel that he can never again regard the person
in question with the same degree of veneration; or on the other
hand, he may say to himself: “How has it been possible for
this revered person to be burdened with such a failing? How
can I present the matter to my mind so as to see in this failing
not merely a fault, but something that is the outcome of his life,

[343]

possibly even caused by his noble qualities?” Whoever can place
the question thus before his own mind may, perhaps, arrive at
the conclusion that his veneration for his friend need not suffer
the least diminution, in spite of the failing that has come to light.

Experiences of this nature will, each time they are met with,
add something to our understanding of life. Yet it would certainly
be a bad thing for one to allow himself to be tempted through
this generous view of life, to excuse everything in those whom
he happens to like, or to drop into the habit of ignoring every
blamable action, in order thereby to seek some benefit to his
own inner development. Blaming or excusing the mistakes of
others merely as a result of an inner impulse, does not further our
development. This can only happen if our action is governed by
the particular case itself, regardless of what we may thereby gain
or lose. It is absolutely true that we cannot learn by condemning
a fault, but only by understanding it; but, at the same time, if,
owing to understanding it, we exclude all disapproval of it, we
likewise would not progress very far.

Here, again, the important thing is to avoid one-sidedness,

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

267
either in one direction or the other, and to establish harmony
and balance of all qualities in the soul; and this is especially to
be kept in mind in regard to one quality which is pre-eminently
important to man's development: the feeling of devotion. Those
who can cultivate this feeling, or on whom nature herself has
bestowed so inestimable a gift, have a good foundation for

[344]

the powers of supersensible cognition. Those who in childhood
and youth have been able to look up to certain persons with
feelings of devoted admiration, beholding in them some high
ideal, will already possess in the depths of their souls the soil
in which supersensible cognition may flourish abundantly. And
those who, possessed of the maturer judgment of later life,
can direct their gaze upon the starry heavens and surrender
themselves unreservedly to admiration of the revelations of the

Higher Powers, are in a like manner ripening their senses for
the acquisition of knowledge with regard to the supersensible
worlds. So is it also with those who can admire the powers ruling
over human life itself. It is by no means of small importance for
a fully matured man to be able to feel veneration to the highest
degree for other people whose worth he senses or recognizes.

For it is only where veneration such as this is present that a vista
of the higher worlds can be revealed. Those who possess no
sense of reverence will never go very far in their attainment of
cognition; for from those who decline to appreciate anything in
this world, the essence of all things will assuredly be withheld.

Nevertheless, any one who permits his feelings of reverence
and devotion to kill his healthy self-consciousness and self-
confidence, is guilty of sinning against the laws of balance and
equilibrium. The occult student must work constantly in order to
mature his own nature; then indeed he may well have confidence

[345]

in his own personality, and believe that its powers are increasing
more and more. Any one arriving at the right feeling in this
respect will say to himself: “There are within me hidden powers,
and I am able to call them forth from within. If, therefore, I

268

An Outline of Occult Science
see something which fills me with reverence because it is above
me, I need no longer merely venerate it, but I may confidently
assume that, if I develop all that is in me, I may raise myself to
the level of the object of my veneration.”

The more capable a man is of fixing his attention upon these
events of life with which he is not directly familiar, the greater
will be the possibility of providing himself with a foundation for
development in higher worlds. The following example will make
this evident. Let us assume that some one is placed in a position
in which it rests with him either to do, or leave undone, a certain
thing. His judgment bids him “Do this,” while at the same time
there may be a certain indefinite something in his feelings which
deters him from the deed. It may so happen that the person in
question will pay no heed to this inexplicable something, carrying
out the action in accordance with his judgment. But it may also
be that the person so placed will yield to this inner impulse and
not perform the act. Now, pursuing the matter further, he may
find that mischief would have resulted from his following the
dictates of his reason, and that a blessing awaited him through
the omission of the act. An experience of this nature may lead a

[346]

man's thoughts into quite a definite channel, and then he will put
the matter to himself in this way: “There is something within me
that is a surer guide than that measure of judgment of which I am
at present possessed: I must therefore retain an open mind toward
this inner something, to the height of which my own capacity for
judgment has not yet attained.”

The soul derives much benefit when it directs its attention to
occurrences in life such as these, for they demonstrate that man's
healthy premonitions bear something in them which is of greater
moment than he, with his present degree of judgment, is able to
perceive. Attention in this direction has the effect of enlarging
the life of the soul. Yet here again certain peculiarities may arise
which are of themselves dangerous. One who accustoms himself
to a perpetual disregarding of his judgment, owing to this or

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

269
that “premonition,” would easily become a shuttle-cock tossed
at the mercy of every kind of undefined impulse; indeed, it is
not a far cry from such habitual indecision to a state of absolute
superstition.

[347]

Every superstition is disastrous to the student of occult science.

The possibility of gaining admission, by legitimate means, to the
realms of the spiritual life must depend upon a careful exclusion
of all superstition, phantasy, and dreaming. One who is pleased
at having had a certain experience which cannot be grasped by
human reason will not approach the spiritual world in the right
manner. No partiality for the “inexplicable” will ever make one
qualified for discipleship of the Spirit. Indeed the pupil should
utterly discard the notion that a true mystic is one who is always
ready to surmise the presence of what cannot be explained or
explored. The right way is to be prepared to recognize on all
hands hidden forces and hidden beings, yet at the same time
to assume that what is “unexplored” today will be able to be
explored when the requisite ability has been developed.

There is a certain mood of soul which it is important for
the pupil to maintain at every stage of his development. He
should not let his urge for higher knowledge lead him to keep on
aiming to get answers to particular questions. Rather should he
continually be asking: How am I to develop the needed faculties
within myself? For when by dint of patient inner work some
faculty develops in him, he will receive the answer to some of his
questions. Genuine pupils of the Spirit will always take pains to

[348]

cultivate this attitude of soul. They will thereby be encouraged
to work upon themselves, that they may become ever more and
more mature in spirit, and they will abjure the desire to extort
answers to particular questions. They will wait until such time as the answers come.

Here again, however, there is the possibility of a one-
sidedness, which may prevent the pupil from going forward
in the way he should. For at some moment he may quite rightly

270

An Outline of Occult Science
feel that according to the measure of his powers he can answer for himself even questions of the highest order. Thus at every
turn moderation and balance play an essential part in the life of
the soul.

Many more qualities of soul could be cited that may with
advantage be fostered and developed, if the pupil is seriously
wanting to work through a training for Inspiration; and in
connection with every one of them we should find that emphasis
is laid on the supreme importance of moderation and balance.

These attributes of soul help the pupil to understand the exercises
that are given for the attainment of Inspiration, and also make
him capable of carrying them out.

The exercises for Intuition demand from the pupil that he let
disappear from consciousness not only the pictures to which he
gave himself up in contemplation in order to arrive at Imaginative
cognition, but also that meditating upon his own activity of soul,
which he practiced for the attainment of Inspiration. This means
that he is now to have in his soul literally nothing of what he has
experienced hitherto, whether outwardly or inwardly. If, after
discarding all outward and inward experience, nothing whatever
is left in his consciousness that is to say, if consciousness simply slips away from him and he sinks into unconsciousness then that will tell him that he is not yet ripe to undertake the exercises for

Intuition and must continue working with those for Imagination

[349]

and Inspiration. A time will come however when an effect
will linger in the consciousness which can just as well be made
the object of meditation, as were before those outer and inner
impressions.

This something is, however, of a very special
nature, and in comparison with all previous experiences, it is
something absolutely new. When it occurs, we recognize it as
something we have never known before. It is a perception, just
as an actual sound is a perception, that strikes upon the ear; yet
it can enter the consciousness only through intuition, just as the
sound can only enter the consciousness by way of the ear. Thus

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

271
with intuition, the last remnants of the physical and sentient are
stripped from man's impressions, while the spiritual world begins
to expand before the understanding in a form that has nothing
in common with the characteristics of the world of the physical
senses.

Imaginative cognition is attained by developing the lotus
flowers within the astral body.

Through those exercises
undertaken for the attainment of inspiration and intuition,
particular movements, formations and currents which were
previously absent, now appear in the human etheric or vital
body. These are the very organs which enable man to “read
the secret script,” and bring that which lies beyond it within his
reach. For to the clairvoyant, the changes which occur in the
etheric body of a person attaining to inspiration and intuition
appear in the following manner. Near the physical heart a new
center is forming in the etheric body, which develops into an

[350]

etheric organ. From this organ, movements and currents flow
toward different parts of the human body, in the most varied
manner. The most important of these currents approach the lotus
flowers, pass through them and their separate petals, and thence
direct their course outward, pouring themselves into outer space
in the form of rays. The more developed a person is, the greater
will be the circumference around him in which these rays become
discernible. This centre near the heart is not, however, formed
at the very beginning, under correct training. It is first prepared.

A temporary center is first formed in the head: this then moves
down to the region of the larynx and is finally transferred into the
region of the heart. Under an irregular course of development it
would be possible for the organ in question to develop near the
heart at the outset. In that case the student, instead of arriving in
due course at adequate, tranquil clairvoyance by regular means,
would run the risk of turning into a visionary and dreamer.

Subsequent development enables the occult student to

272

An Outline of Occult Science
render these currents and organized parts of this etheric body
independent of his physical body and to use them independently.

The lotus flowers then serve him as instruments by which to
move his etheric body. Yet, before this can take place, certain
currents and radiations must come into action around his entire
etheric body, surrounding this, as it were, with a fine network,
thus encasing it as though it were a separate entity. When this

[351]

has taken place, the movements and currents of the etheric body
can without hindrance touch the outer psycho-spiritual world
and unite with it so that outer psycho-spiritual occurrences and
inner ones (those within the human etheric body) blend into one
another. When this comes to pass, the moment has arrived when
man can consciously experience the world of inspiration. This
cognition takes place in a manner different from cognition of
the physical sense-world. In this latter, we become aware of the
world by means of our senses and form our ideas and concepts
from these perceptions. But in the case of cognition through
inspiration, this is not so.

What is thus perceived is instantaneous; there is no thinking
after the perception has taken place. That which in the case
of physical sense-cognition is only afterward gained through
the concept, is, in the case of inspiration, simultaneous with
the perception. One would therefore become merged with the
surrounding psycho-spiritual world, and be unable to differentiate
oneself from it had not the fine network above alluded to been
previously formed in the etheric body.

When exercises for intuition are practiced, they not only affect
the etheric body but extend their influence to the supersensible
forces of the physical body. But it must not, of course, be
imagined that effects are brought about in the physical body
which are discernible to ordinary sense-observation, for these
effects the clairvoyant alone is able to judge, and they have

[352]

nothing to do with external powers
of perception.

They
come as the result of a ripened consciousness, when this

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

273
latter is able to have intuitional experiences, even though it
has divested itself of all previous inner and outer experiences.

The experiences of intuition are, however, subtle, delicate and
intimate, in comparison with which the physical body, at its
present stage of development, is coarse. For this reason, it offers
a positive hindrance to the success of any exercises for attaining
intuition. Nevertheless, should these be pursued with energy
and perseverance, and with the requisite inner calm, they will
ultimately overcome those powerful hindrances of the physical
body. The occult student will become aware of this when he
notices how, by degrees, particular actions of his physical body
which hitherto had taken place without his own volition, now
come under his control. He will also become aware that for a
brief time he will feel the need, for instance, of so regulating
his breathing (or some similar act) as to bring it into a kind of
harmonious accord with whatever is being enacted within his
soul, be it exercises or other forms of inner concentration.

The ideal development would be that no exercises should be
done by means of the physical body but that everything which
has to take place within it should result only as a consequence
of exercises for intuition.

As, however, the physical body
offers such powerful impediments, the training may permit of
some alleviations. These consist in exercises which affect the
physical body; yet everything in this domain that has not been

[353]

directly imparted by the teacher, or those having knowledge
and experience of these things, is fraught with danger. Such
exercises, for instance, include a certain regulated process of
breathing to be carried out for a very short space of time. These
regulations of the breathing correspond in quite a definite way
to particular laws of the psycho-spiritual world. Breathing is a
physical process, and when this act is so carried out as to be the
expression of a psycho-spiritual law, physical existence receives
the direct stamp, as it were, of spirituality, and the physical
matter is transformed.

274

An Outline of Occult Science

For this reason occult science is able to call the change due
to such direct spiritual influence, a transmutation of the physical
body, and this process represents what is called “working with
the philosopher's stone” by him who has a knowledge of these
matters. He who knows these things, frees himself indeed from
those concepts which have been limited by superstition, humbug
and charlatanry. The significance of the phenomena does not
become less to him who knows, just because, as a spiritual
investigator, all superstition is foreign to him. When he has
acquired a concept of a significant fact, he may be allowed to call
it by its correct name although that name has been fixed upon it as a result of misunderstanding, error and nonsense.

Every true intuition is in fact a “working with the philosopher's
stone,” because each genuine intuition calls directly upon those

[354]

powers which act from out the supersensible world, into the
world of the senses.

As the occult student climbs the path leading to cognition of
the higher worlds, he becomes aware at a particular point that
the cohesion of the powers of his own personality is assuming
a different form from that which it possesses in the world of
the physical senses. In the latter the ego brings about a uniform
co-operation of the powers of the soul—primarily of thought,
feeling and will. These three soul powers are actually, under
normal conditions of human life, in perpetual relation one with
another. For instance, we see a particular object in the external
world, and it is pleasing or is displeasing to the soul; that is to
say, the perception of the thing will be followed by a sense of
either pleasure or displeasure. Possibly we may desire the object,
or may have the impulse to alter it in some way or other; that
is to say, desire and will associate themselves with perception
and feeling. Now this association is due to the fact that the ego
co-ordinates presentment (thinking), feeling, and willing, and in
this way introduces order among the forces of the personality.

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

275

This healthy arrangement would be interrupted should the ego
prove itself powerless in this respect: if, for instance, the will
went a different way from the feeling or thinking. No man would
be in a healthy condition of mind who, while thinking this or that
to be right, nevertheless wished to do something which he did
not consider right.

[355]

The same would hold good if a person desired, not the thing
that pleased him, but that which displeased him. Now the person
progressing toward higher cognition becomes aware that feeling,
thinking, and willing do actually assume a certain independence;
that, for example, a particular thought no longer urges him, as
though of itself, to a certain condition of feeling and willing.

The matter resolves itself thus: We may comprehend something
correctly by means of thinking, but in order to arrive at a feeling or impulse of the will on the subject, we need a further independent
impetus, coming from within ourselves. Thinking, feeling and
willing no longer remain three forces, radiating from the ego
as their common centre, but become, as it were, independent
entities, just as though they were three separate personalities. For
this reason, therefore, a person's own ego must be strengthened,
for not only must it introduce order among three powers, but the
leadership and guidance of three entities have devolved upon it.

And this is what is known to occult science as the cleavage
of the personality. Here is once more clearly revealed how
important it is to add to the exercises for higher training others
for giving fixity and firmness to the judgment, and to the life of
feeling and will. For if certainty and firmness are not brought
into the higher world, it will at once be seen how weak the ego
proves to be, and how it can be no fitting ruler over the powers
of thought, feeling and will. In the presence of this weakness,
the soul would be dragged by three different personalities in

[356]

as many directions, and its inner individual separateness would
cease. But should the development of the occult student proceed
on the right lines, this multiplication of himself, so to speak, will

276

An Outline of Occult Science
prove to be a real step forward, and he will nevertheless continue,
as a new ego, to be the strong ruler over the independent entities
which now make up his soul.

In the subsequent course of development this division
or cleavage is carried further;
thought, now functioning
independently, arouses the activities of a fourth distinct psycho-
spiritual being; one that may be described as a direct influx into
the individual, of currents which bear a resemblance to thoughts.

The entire world then appears as thought-structure, confronting
man just like the plant and animal worlds in the realm of the
physical senses. In the same manner feeling and will, which have
become independent, stimulate two other powers within the soul
to work in it as separate entities. And yet a seventh power and
entity must be added, which resembles the ego itself. Thus man,
on reaching a particular stage of development, finds himself to
be composed of seven entities, all of which he has to guide and
control.

The whole of this experience becomes associated with a further
one. Before entering the supersensible world, thinking, feeling,
and willing were known to man merely as inner soul-experiences.

[357]

But as soon as he enters the supersensible world he becomes
aware of things which do not express physical sense realities,
but psycho-spiritual realities. Behind the characteristics of the
new world of which he has become aware, he now perceives
spiritual beings. These now present themselves to him as an
external world, just as stones, plants and animals in the physical
sense world, have impressed his senses. Now the occult student
is able to observe an important difference between the spiritual
world unfolding itself before him and the world he has hitherto
been accustomed to recognize by means of his physical senses.

A plant of the sense-world remains what it is, whatever man's
soul may think or feel about it. This is not the case, however,
with the images of the psycho-spiritual world, for these change
according to man's own thoughts and feelings. Man stamps upon

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

277
them an impression which is the result of his own being.

Let us imagine a particular picture presenting itself to man
in the imaginative world. As long as he maintains indifference
toward it, it will continue to show a particular form. As soon,
however, as he is moved by feelings of like or dislike with regard
to it, its form will change. Pictures, therefore, at first present not only something independent and external to man, but they reflect
also what man himself is. These pictures are permeated through
and through with man's own being. This falls like a veil over
the other beings. In this case man, even if confronted by a real
being, does not see this, but sees what he himself has created.

Thus he may have something true before him, and yet see what

[358]

is false. Indeed, this is not only the case in respect to what man
has observed concerning his own being, but everything that is in
him impresses itself upon the spiritual world.

If, for example, a person has secret inclinations, which
owing to education and character are precluded from revealing
themselves in life, those inclinations will, nevertheless, take
effect in the psycho-spiritual world, which is thus colored in a
peculiar way, due to that person's being, quite irrespective of
how much he may or may not know of his own being. And in
order to be able to advance beyond this stage of development, it
becomes necessary that man should learn to distinguish between
himself and the spiritual world around him. It is necessary that
he should learn to eliminate all the effects produced by his own
nature upon the surrounding psycho-spiritual world. This can be
done only by acquiring a knowledge of what we ourselves take
with us into this new world. It is therefore primarily a question
of self-knowledge, in order that we may become able to perceive
clearly the surrounding psycho-spiritual world. It is true that
certain facts of human development entail such self-knowledge
as must naturally be acquired when one enters higher worlds.

In the ordinary world of the physical senses man develops his
ego, his self-consciousness, and this ego then acts as a point of

278

An Outline of Occult Science
attraction for all that appertains to man. All personal propensities,

[359]

sympathies, antipathies, passions, opinions, etc., possessed by
a person, group themselves, as it were, around this ego, and it
is this ego likewise to which human Karma is attached. Were
we able to see this ego unveiled, it would also be possible to
see just what blows of fate it must yet endure in this and future
incarnations, as a result of its life in previous incarnations and the qualities acquired. Encumbered as it is with all this, the ego must
be the first picture that presents itself to the human soul, when
ascending into the psycho-spiritual world. This double of the
human being, in accordance with a law of the spiritual world, is
bound to be his first impression in that world. It is easy to explain
this fundamental law to ourselves, if we consider the following.

In the life of the physical senses man is cognizant of himself
only so far as he is inwardly conscious of himself in his thinking,
feeling, and willing. This cognition is an inner one; it does not
present itself to him externally, as do stones, plants and animals;
but even through inner experiences, man learns to know himself
only partially, for he has within him something that prevents deep
self-knowledge, namely, the impulse to immediately transform
this quality, when through self-cognition he is forced to admit
its presence and concerning which he is unwilling to deceive
himself.

If he did not yield to this impulse, but simply turned his
attention away from himself—remaining as he is—he would
naturally deprive himself of even the possibility of knowing
himself in regard to that particular matter.

Yet should he

[360]

“explore”

himself, facing his characteristics without self-
deception, he would either be able to improve them, or in
his present condition of life he would be unable to do so. In the
latter case a feeling would steal over his soul which we must
designate a feeling of shame. Indeed, this is the way in which
man's sound nature acts; it experiences through self-knowledge
various feelings of shame. Even in ordinary life this feeling has

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

279
a certain definite effect. A healthy-minded person will take care
that that which fills him with this feeling does not express itself
outwardly or manifest itself in deeds. Thus the sense of shame
is a force urging man to conceal something within himself, not
allowing it to be outwardly apparent.

If we consider this well, we shall find it possible to understand
why occult science should ascribe more far-reaching effects to
another inner experience of the soul, very closely allied to this
feeling of shame. Occult science finds that within the hidden
depths of the soul a kind of secret feeling of shame exists, of
which man in his life of the physical senses is unaware. Yet this
secret feeling acts much in the same way as the conscious feeling
of shame of ordinary life to which we have alluded; it prevents
man's inmost being from confronting him in a recognizable
image, or double. Were this feeling not present, man would see
himself as he is in very truth; not only would he experience his
thoughts, ideas, feelings and decisions inwardly, but he would
perceive these as he now perceives stones, animals and plants.

[361]

This feeling, therefore, is that which veils man from himself,
and at the same time hides from him the entire spiritual world. For
owing to this veiling of man's inner self, he becomes unable to
perceive those things by means of which he is to develop organs
for penetrating into the psycho-spiritual world; he becomes
unable to so transform his own being as to render it capable of
obtaining spiritual organs of perception.

If man aims however to form these organs of perception
through correct training, that which he himself really is appears
before him as the first impression. He perceives his double. This
self-recognition is inseparable from perception of the rest of the
psycho-spiritual world. In the everyday life of the physical world
the feeling of shame here described acts in such a manner as to be
perpetually closing the door which leads into the psycho-spiritual
world. If man would take but a single step in order to penetrate
into that world, this instantly appearing but unconscious feeling

280

An Outline of Occult Science
of shame, conceals that portion of the psycho-spiritual world
which would reveal itself. The exercises here described do,
however, unlock this world: and it so happens that the above-
mentioned hidden feeling acts as a great benefactor to man,
for all that we may have gained, apart from occult training, in
the matter of judgment, feeling and character, is insufficient to
support us when confronted by our own being in its true form; its
apparition would rob us of all feeling of selfhood, self-reliance

[362]

and self-consciousness. And that this may not happen, provision
must be made for cultivating sound judgment, good feeling and
character, along with the exercises given for the attainment of
higher knowledge.

A correct method of tuition teaches the student as much of
occult science as will, in combination with the many means
provided for self-knowledge and self-observation, enable him
to meet his double with assured strength. It will then appear
to the student that he sees, in another form, a picture of the
imaginative world with which he has already become acquainted
in the physical world. Anyone who has first learned in the
physical world, by means of his understanding, to apprehend
rightly the law of Karma, is not likely to be greatly frightened
when he sees his fate traced upon the image of his double.

Anyone who, by means of his own powers of judgment, has
made himself acquainted with the evolution of the universe, and
the development of the human race, and who is aware that at
a particular epoch of this development the powers of Lucifer
penetrated into the human soul, will have little difficulty in
enduring the sight of the image of his own individuality when
he knows that it includes those Luciferian powers and all their
accumulated effects.

This will suffice to show how necessary it is that no one
should demand admission into the spiritual world before having
learned to understand certain truths concerning it; learning them

[363]

by means of his own judgment, as developed in this world of the

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

281
physical senses. All that has been said in this book previous to
the chapter concerning “Perception of the higher worlds,” should
have been assimilated by the student in the course of his regular
development, by means of his ordinary judgment, before he has
any desire to seek entrance himself into the supersensible worlds.

Where the training has been such as to pay little heed to
firmness and surety of judgment, and to the life of feeling and
character, it may happen that the student will approach the higher
world before being possessed of the necessary inner capacities.

The meeting with his double would in this case overwhelm
him. But what might also happen is that the person introduced
into the supersensible world then would be totally unable to
recognize this world in its true form, for it would be impossible
for him to differentiate between what he sees in the things, and
what they really are. For this distinction becomes possible only
when a person himself has beheld the image of his own being
and becomes able to separate from his surroundings everything
which proceeds from his inner being.

In respect to life in the world of physical sense, man's double
becomes at once visible through the already mentioned feeling
of shame when man nears the psycho-spiritual world, and in
so doing, it also conceals the whole of that world. The double
stands before the entrance as a “guardian,” denying admission to
all who are as yet unfit, and it is therefore designated in occult
science as the “guardian of the threshold of the psycho-spiritual

[364]

world.” However, we may call it the “lesser guardian,” for there
is another, of whom we shall speak later.

And besides this meeting with his double on entering the
supersensible world as here described, man encounters the

Guardian of the Threshold when he passes the portals of physical
death, and it gradually reveals itself during that psycho-spiritual
development which takes place between death and a new birth.

However, the encounter can in no wise crush us, for we then
know of other worlds of which we are ignorant during the life

282

An Outline of Occult Science
between birth and death. A person entering the psycho-spiritual
world without having encountered the Guardian of the Threshold
would be liable to fall a prey to one delusion after another.

For he would never be able to distinguish between that which
he himself brings into that world and what really belongs to
it. But correct training should lead the student into the domain
of truth, not of error, and with such training the meeting must,
at one time or another, inevitably take place, for it is the one
indispensable precaution against the possibilities of deception
and phantasm in the observation of supersensible worlds. It
is one of the most indispensable precautions to be taken by
every occult student, to work carefully upon himself in order
not to become a visionary, subject to every possible deception
and self-deception, suggestion and auto-suggestion. Wherever

[365]

correct occult training is followed, the causes of such deceptions
are destroyed at their source. It would of course be impossible
to speak here exhaustively of the many details to be included
in such precautions, and we can only indicate in general the
underlying principles. The illusions to be taken into account
arise from two sources. In part they proceed from the fact that
our own soul-being colors reality. In the ordinary life of the
physical sense-world, the danger arising from this source of
deception is comparatively small, because here the outer world
always obtrudes itself upon the observer in its own sharp outline,
no matter how much the observer is inclined to color it according
to his wishes and interests. As soon, however, as we enter the
imaginative world, the images are changed by such wishes and
interests, and we then have actually before us that which we
ourselves have formed or, at any rate, helped to form. Now,
since through this meeting with the Guardian of the Threshold
the occult student becomes aware of everything within him, of
that which he can take with him into the psycho-spiritual world,
this source of delusion is removed, and the preparation which
the occult student undergoes prior to his entering that world is

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

283
in itself calculated to accustom him to exclude himself—even
in matters appertaining to the physical world—when making
his observations, thus allowing things and occurrences to speak
for themselves. Any one who has sufficiently practiced these
preparatory exercises may await this meeting with the Guardian
of the Threshold in all tranquillity; by this meeting he will be

[366]

definitely tested whether he is now really capable of putting aside
his own being even when confronting the psycho-spiritual world.

In addition to this there is another source of delusion. This
becomes apparent when we place the wrong interpretation upon
an impression we receive. We may illustrate it by means of a
very simple example taken from the world of the physical senses.

It is the delusion we may encounter when sitting in a railway
carriage; we think the trees are moving in the reverse direction to the train, whereas in fact we ourselves are moving with the train.

Although there are many cases in which such illusions occurring
in the physical world are more difficult to correct than the simple
one we have mentioned, yet it is easy to see that, even within that
world, means may be found for getting rid of those delusions if
a person of sound judgment brings everything to bear upon the
matter which may help to clear it up.

But as soon as we penetrate into the psycho-spiritual world
such elucidations become less easy. In the world of sense, facts
are not altered by human delusions about them; it is therefore
possible to correct a delusion by unprejudiced observation of
facts. But in the supersensible world this is not immediately
possible. If we desire to study a supersensible occurrence and
approach it with the wrong judgment, we then carry that wrong
judgment over into the thing itself, and it becomes so interwoven
with the thing, that the two cannot be easily distinguished. The
error then is not in the person and the correct fact external

[367]

to him, but the error will have become a component part of
the external fact. It cannot therefore be cleared up simply by
unprejudiced observation of the fact. This is enough to indicate

284

An Outline of Occult Science
an extremely fertile source of illusion and deception for one
who would venture to approach the supersensible world without
adequate preparation.

As the occult student has now acquired the faculty to exclude
those illusions originating from the coloring of the supersensible
world-phenomena with his own being, so must he now acquire
the faculty of making ineffective the second source of illusions
mentioned above.

Only after the meeting with his double, can he eliminate what
comes from himself and thus he will be able to remove the second
source of delusion when he has acquired the faculty for judging
by the very nature of a fact seen in the supersensible world,
whether it is a reality or an illusion. Now if the illusions were
of precisely the same appearance as the realities, differentiation
would be impossible. But this is not the case. Illusions of
the supersensible world have in themselves qualities which
distinguish them definitely from the realities, and the important
thing is for the occult student to know by what qualities he may
be able to recognize those realities.

Nothing seems more natural than that those ignorant of occult
training should say: “How, then, is it at all possible to guard

[368]

against delusions, since their sources are so numerous?” And
further: “Can an occult student ever be safe from the possibility
that all his so-called higher experiences may not turn out to
be based on mere deception and self-deception (suggestion and
auto-suggestion)?” Any one advancing these objections ignores
the fact that all true occult training proceeds in such a manner
as to remove those sources of delusion.

In the first place,
the occult student during his preparation, will have become
possessed of enough knowledge about all that which may lead to
delusion and self-delusion, that he will be in a position to protect
himself against them. He has, in this respect, an opportunity,
like that of no other human being, to render himself sober and
capable of sound judgment for the journey of life. Everything

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

285
he learns teaches him not to rely upon vague presentiments and
premonitions. Training makes him as cautious as possible, and,
in addition to this, all true training leads in the first place to
concepts of the great cosmic events, to matters, therefore, which
necessitate the exertion of the judgment, a process by which this
faculty is at the same time rendered keener and more refined.

But those who decline to occupy themselves with these remote
subjects, and prefer keeping the revelations nearer at hand, might
miss the strengthening of that sound power of judgment which
gives certainty in distinguishing between illusion and reality.

Yet even this is not the most important thing, but the exercises
themselves, carried out through a systematic course of occult

[369]

training. These must be so arranged that the consciousness of
the student is enabled during meditation to scan minutely all that
passes within his soul. In order to bring about imagination, the
first thing to be done is to form a symbol. In this there are
still elements taken from external observation; it is not only man
who participates in their content, he himself does not produce
them. Therefore he may deceive himself concerning them and
assign their origin to wrong sources.

But when the occult
student proceeds to the exercises for inspiration, he drops this
content from his consciousness and immerses himself only in the
soul-activity which formed the symbol. Even here error is still
possible: education and study etc., have induced a particular kind
of soul-activity in man. He is unable to know everything about
the origin of this activity. Now, however, the occult student
removes this, his own soul-activity, from his consciousness; if
then something remains, nothing adheres to it that cannot easily
be reviewed; nothing can intrude itself in respect to its entire
content that cannot easily be judged.

In his intuition, therefore, the occult student possesses
something which shows him the pure, clear reality of the psycho-
spiritual world. And if he applies this recognized test to all that
meets his observation in the realm of psycho-spiritual realities,

286

An Outline of Occult Science
he will be well able to distinguish appearance from reality. He
may also feel sure that the application of this law provides just
as effectually against delusions in the spiritual world as does

[370]

the knowledge in the physical world that an imaginary piece of red-hot iron cannot burn him.

It is obvious that this test applies only to our own experiences
in the supersensible world, and not to communications made
to us which we have to apprehend by means of our physical
understanding and our healthy sense of truth. The occult student
should exert himself to draw a distinct line of demarcation
between the knowledge he acquires by the one means, and
by the other. He should be ready on one the hand to accept
communications made to him regarding the higher worlds, and
should seek to understand them by using his powers of judgment.

When, however, he is confronted by an “experience,” which he
may so name because it is due to personal observation, he will
first carefully test the same to ascertain whether it possesses
exactly those characteristics which he has learned to recognize
by means of infallible intuition.

The meeting with the Guardian of the Threshold being over,
the occult student will have to face other new experiences, and
the first thing that he will become aware of is the inner connection
which exists between this Guardian of the Threshold and that
soul-power we have already characterized, when describing the
cleavage of personality, as being the seventh power to resolve
itself into an independent entity. This seventh entity is, indeed,
in certain respects no other than the double, or Guardian of the

[371]

Threshold itself, and it lays a particular task upon the student.

Namely, that which he is in his lower self and which now appears
to him in the image, he must guide and lead by means of the
new-born higher self. This will result in a sort of battle with this
double, which will continually strive for the upper hand. Now
to establish the right relationship to it, to allow it to do nothing

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

287
except what takes place under the influence of the new-born ego,
this is what strengthens and fortifies man's forces.

This matter of self-cognition is, in certain respects, different in
the higher worlds from what it is in the physical sense-world. For
whereas in the latter, self-cognition is only an inner experience,
the newly born self immediately presents itself as an outward
psycho-spiritual apparition. We see our new-born self before
us like another being, yet we cannot perceive it in its entirety,
for, whatever the stage to which we may have climbed on our
journey to the supersensible worlds, there will always be still
higher stages which will enable us to perceive more and more of
our “higher self.” It can therefore only partially reveal itself to
the student at any particular stage. Having once caught a glimpse
of this higher self, man feels a tremendous temptation to look
upon it in the same manner in which he is accustomed to regard
the things of the physical sense-world. And yet this temptation
is salutary; it is indeed necessary, if man's development is to
proceed in the right manner. The student must here note what it
is that appears as his double, as the Guardian of the Threshold,
and place it by the side of the higher self, in order that he may

[372]

rightly observe the disparity between what he is and what he is
to become. But while thus engaged in observation he will find
that the Guardian of the Threshold will assume quite a different
aspect, for it will now reveal itself as a picture of all the obstacles which oppose the development of the higher ego, and he then
becomes aware of what a load he drags about with him in his
ordinary ego. And should the student's preparation not have
rendered him strong enough to be able to say: “I will not remain
at this point, but will persistently work my way upward toward
the higher ego,” he will grow weak and will shrink back dismayed
before the labor that lies before him. He has plunged into the
psycho-spiritual world, but gives up working his way farther,
and becomes a captive to that image which, as Guardian of the

Threshold, now confronts the soul. And the remarkable thing

288

An Outline of Occult Science
here is that the person so situated will have no feeling of being a
captive. He will, on the contrary, think he is going through quite
a different experience, for the image called forth by the Guardian
of the Threshold may be such as to awaken in the soul of the
observer the impression that in the pictures which appear at this
stage of development he has before him the whole universe in its
entirety—the impression of having attained to the summit of all
knowledge, and of there being, therefore, nothing left to strive
after. Therefore, instead of feeling himself a captive, the student
would believe himself rich beyond all measure, and in possession

[373]

of all the secrets of the universe. Nor need this experience fill
one with surprise, though it be the reverse of the facts, for we
must remember that by the time these experiences are felt, we
are already standing within the psycho-spiritual world, and that
the special peculiarity of this world is that it reverses events—a
fact which has already been alluded to in our consideration of
life after death.

The image seen by the occult student at this stage of
development shows him a different aspect from that in which the

Guardian of the Threshold first revealed itself. In the double first
mentioned, were to be seen all those qualities which, as the result
of the influence of Lucifer, are possessed by man's ordinary ego.

But in the course of human development, another power has,
in consequence of Lucifer's influence, also been drawn into the
human soul; this is known as the force of Ahriman. It is this force
that, during his physical existence, prevents man from becoming
aware of those psycho-spiritual beings which lie behind the
surface of the external world. All that man's soul has become
under the influence of this force, may be discerned in the image
revealing itself during the experience just described. Those who
have been sufficiently prepared for this experience will, when
thus confronted, be able to assign to it its true meaning, and then
another form will soon become visible—one we may describe
as the “greater Guardian of the Threshold.” This one will tell

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

289
the student not to rest content with the stage to which he has
attained, but to work on energetically. It will call forth in him

[374]

the consciousness that the world he has conquered will only
become a truth, and not an illusion, if the work thus begun be
continued in a corresponding manner. Those, however, who have
gone through incorrect occult training and would approach this
meeting unprepared, would then experience something in their
souls when they come to the “greater Guardian of the Threshold,”

which can only be described as a “feeling of inexpressible fright”,
of “boundless fear.”

Just as the meeting with the “lesser Guardian” gives the occult
student the opportunity of judging whether or not he is proof
against delusions such as might arise through interweaving his
own personality with the supersensible world, so too must he
be able to prove from the experiences which finally lead to
the “greater Guardian,” whether he is able to withstand those
illusions which are to be traced to the second source mentioned
farther back in this chapter. Should he be proof against the
powerful illusion by which the world of images to which he has
attained, is falsely displayed to him as a rich possession, when
actually he is only a captive, then he is guarded also against
the danger of mistaking appearance for reality during the further
course of his development.

To a certain degree the Guardian of the Threshold will assume
a different form in the case of each individual. The meeting
with him corresponds exactly to the way in which the personal
element in supersensible observations is overcome, and therefore

[375]

the possibility exists of entering a realm of experience which is
free from any tinge of personality and is open to every human
being.

When the occult student has passed through the above
experiences, he will be capable of distinguishing in the psycho-
spiritual world between what he himself is and what is outside

290

An Outline of Occult Science
of him, and he will then recognize why an understanding of the
cosmic occurrences narrated in this book, is necessary to man's
understanding of humanity itself and its life process. In fact, we
can understand the physical body only when we recognize the
manner in which it has been built up through the developments
undergone in the Saturn, Sun, Moon, and Earth periods, and
we understand the etheric body when we follow its evolution
through the Sun, Moon, and Earth stages of evolution. We further
comprehend what is bound up with our earth-development at
present, if we can grasp how all things proceed by the process
of gradual evolution. Occult training places us in a position to
recognize the connection between everything that is within man
and the corresponding facts and beings existing in the world
external to him. For it is a fact that each principle of man stands
in some connection with the rest of the world. The outlines of
these subjects could only be briefly sketched in this book. It
must however be borne in mind that the physical body had, at
the time of the Saturn development, for instance, no more than

[376]

its rudimentary beginnings. Its organs—such as the heart, lungs,
and brain—developed later during the Sun, Moon, and Earth
periods, for which reason heart, lungs and brain are related to the
evolutionary process of Sun, Moon and Earth.

It is the same with the members of the etheric body, the
sentient body, and the sentient soul. Man is the outcome of the
entire world surrounding him, and every part of his constitution
corresponds to some event, to some being in the external world.

At a certain stage of his development the occult student comes
to a realization of this relation of his own being to the great
cosmos, and this stage of development may in the occult sense be
termed a becoming aware of the relationship of the little world,
the microcosm—that is, man himself—to the great world, the
macrocosm. And when the occult student has struggled through
to such cognition, he may then go through a new experience;
he begins to feel himself united, as it were, with the entire

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

291
cosmic structure, although he remains fully conscious of his
own independence. This sensation is a merging into the whole
world, a becoming “at one” with it, yet without losing one's
own individual identity. Occult science describes this stage as
the “becoming one with the macrocosm.” It is important that
this union should not be imagined as one in which separate
consciousness ceases and in which the human being flowers
forth into the universe, for such a thought would only be the
expression of an opinion resulting from untutored reasoning.

[377]

Following this stage of development something takes place
that in occult science is described as “beatitude.” It is neither
possible nor necessary that this stage be more closely described,
for no human words have the power to picture this experience
and it may rightly be said that any conception of this state could
be acquired only by means of such thought-power as would no
longer be dependent upon the instrument of the human brain. The
separate stages of higher knowledge, according to the methods
of initiation that have been here described, may be enumerated
as follows:

1. The study of occult science, in the course of which we first
of all make use of the reasoning powers we have acquired in the
world of the physical senses.

2. Attainment of imaginative cognition.

3. Reading the secret script (which corresponds to inspiration).

4. Working with the philosopher's stone (corresponding to
intuition).

5. Cognition of the relationship between the microcosm and
the macrocosm.

6. Being one with the macrocosm.

7. Beatitude.

These stages however need not necessarily be thought of
as following one another consecutively, for in the course of
training, the occult student, according to his individuality, may
have attained a preceding stage only to a certain degree when

292

An Outline of Occult Science

[378]

he has already begun to practice exercises, corresponding to the
next higher stage. For instance, it may be that when he has gained
only a few reliable imaginative pictures, he will already be doing
exercises which lead him on to draw inspiration, intuition, or
cognition of the relationship between microcosm and macrocosm
into the sphere of his own experiences.

When the occult student has experienced intuition he comes
to know not only the forms of the psycho-spiritual world, not
only can he recognize their inter-relationship through the “secret
script,” but he attains a cognition of these beings themselves
through whose co-operation the world, to which he belongs,
comes into being. Thus he learns to know himself in the true
form which he possesses as a spiritual being in the psycho-
spiritual world. He has struggled through to the higher ego,
and has learned how he must continue the work in order that
he may master his double, the Guardian of the Threshold. But
he has also met the “greater guardian of the Threshold” who
stands before him perpetually urging him to further labors. It
is this greater Guardian of the Threshold who now becomes
the ideal he must strive to resemble, and when the student has
acquired this feeling he will have risen to that important stage of
development in which he will be in a position to recognize who
it is that is really standing before him as that “greater Guardian.”

For henceforth, in the student's consciousness, the Guardian is
gradually transformed into the figure of the Christ, whose Being

[379]

and intervention in the evolution of the earth have been dealt
with in a foregoing chapter.

Thus the student, through his intuition, will have become
initiated into that sublime Mystery which is linked with the name
of Christ. The Christ reveals himself to him as the “Great Ideal
of humanity on earth.”

When in this manner through intuition, the Christ has been
recognized in the spiritual world, then we can also understand

Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

293
those events that took place historically upon earth during the
fourth post-Atlantean period (the Greco-Roman time), and how
at that time the great Sun-Spirit, the Christ-Being, intervened in
the world's development, and how He still continues to guide
its evolution. These are matters the student will then know by
personal experience. Therefore it is through intuition that the
meaning and significance of the earth's evolution are disclosed
to the occult student.

The path leading to cognition of the supersensible worlds as
above indicated, is one which all men may travel, whatever their
position under the present conditions of life may be. And in
speaking of such a path it must be borne in mind that, while
the goal of cognition and truth is the same at all times of the
earth's development, yet the starting-point for man has varied
considerably at different periods. For instance, the man of the
present day who wishes to find his way into supersensible worlds,
cannot start from the same point as the Egyptian candidate for
initiation of old.

This is why it is impossible
for modern

[380]

humanity to apply, without modification, the exercises given to
the candidate for initiation in ancient Egypt. For since those times
men's souls have passed through different incarnations, and this
passing onward from incarnation to incarnation is not without
significance and importance. The capacities and qualities of
souls change from one incarnation to another. Those who have
studied human history only superficially can note that since the
twelfth and thirteenth centuries all life conditions have changed
and that opinions, feelings and even human capabilities have
become different from what they were before that time. The path
here described for the acquirement of higher knowledge is one
which is suitable for souls incarnating in the immediate present.

It fixes the starting-point of spiritual development just where the
man of the present day stands, in whatever conditions of life he
may be placed.

From epoch to epoch, progressive evolution leads humanity,

294

An Outline of Occult Science
in respect to the path of higher cognition, to ever changing modes,
just as outer life likewise changes its form. For at all times it
is necessary that perfect harmony should reign between external
life and initiation. It will be pointed out in the next chapter of
this book what changes initiation, which in the ancient mysteries
lead into the higher worlds, must undergo, in order to become
modern “initiation” for the attainment of supersensible cognition
in its present form.

[381]

Chapter VI. The Present and Future

Evolution of the World and of

Humanity

It is impossible to know anything in the occult sense of the present
and future of human or planetary evolution without understanding
that evolution in the past. For, that which presents itself to the
occult student's observation when he watches the hidden events
of the past, contains at the same time everything that he can learn
of the present and future. In this book we have spoken of the

Saturn, Sun, Moon and Earth evolutions. We cannot follow the
evolution of the earth, as the occultist understands it, unless we
observe the events of preceding evolutionary periods. For what
meets us today, within the bounds of our earthly globe, comprises
in a certain sense the facts of the evolution of the Moon, Sun and

Saturn. The beings and things that took part in the evolution of
the Moon have gone on developing, and all that now belongs to
the earth, is the outcome of that development.

But not all that has evolved from the Moon to the Earth is
perceptible to physical sense-consciousness. A part of what came
over to us from the Moon evolution is revealed only at a certain
stage of clairvoyant consciousness, at which knowledge of

[382]

supersensible worlds is reached. When this knowledge is gained,
the fact that our earthly planet is united to a supersensible world
is recognized. The latter includes that part of lunar existence
which is not sufficiently densified to be observed by the physical
senses. In the first place it does not include it as it was at the
time of the evolution of the original Moon. If this clairvoyant
consciousness occupies itself with the perception of these things,

296

An Outline of Occult Science
which it can have at present, this latter gradually separates into
two images. One presents the shape borne by the earth during
the lunar evolution, the other shows itself in such a way, that we
recognize as its content a form as yet in the germinal stage which
will become a reality—in the sense in which the earth is now a
reality—but only in the future.

On further observation it is seen that the results, in a certain
sense, of that which is taking place on the earth are continually
streaming into that future form, so that in it we have before us that
which our earth will ultimately become. The effects of earthly
existence will unite with the events in the world described, and
out of this the new cosmos will arise, into which the Earth will
be transformed as the Moon was transformed into the Earth. This
future form is called in occult science the Jupiter condition. The
clairvoyant observer of this Jupiter state sees the revelation of
certain events which must take place in the future. The reason for this is that in the supersensible part of the Earth which had

[383]

its origin in the Moon, beings and things are present which will
assume definite form when certain events have actually happened
in the physical world. Therefore there will be something in the

Jupiter condition which was already predetermined by the Moon
evolution and it will contain new factors, which can come into
the whole evolution only in consequence of terrestrial events. In
this way clairvoyant consciousness is able to learn something of
what will happen during the Jupiter state.

The beings and facts observed in this field of consciousness
have not the nature of sense-images;
they do not even
appear as fine air-structures from which effects might proceed
which resemble sense-impressions. They give purely spiritual
impressions of sound, light and heat. These are not expressed through any material embodiments. They can be apprehended
only by clairvoyant consciousness. One may say, however, that
these beings which at present manifest on the psycho-spiritual
plane, possess a “body.” This body, however, appears like a sum

297
of condensed memories which they carry within their souls.

One can distinguish within their being what they are now
experiencing and what they have experienced and now remember.

This last is contained within them like a bodily element. They
are conscious of it in the same way that an earthly human being
is conscious of his body.

At a stage of clairvoyant development higher than that just
described as necessary for a knowledge of the Moon and Jupiter,
the student is able to perceive supersensible beings and things

[384]

which are, in fact, the more highly developed forms of those
present during the Sun condition, but which have now reached
stages of existence so lofty as to be quite imperceptible to
a consciousness capable of observing the Moon forms only.

During meditation the picture of this world also divides in two.

The one leads to a knowledge of the Sun state of the past; the
other represents a future form of the earth existence—namely,
that into which the earth will have been transformed when the
fruits of all that takes place on it and Jupiter have merged into
the forms of that future world. What can thus be observed of this
future world may be characterized in occult phraseology as the

Venus condition.

In a similar manner, to a still more highly evolved clairvoyant
consciousness, a future state of evolution is revealed, which we
may call the Vulcan state. It stands in the same relationship to the

Saturn state as the Venus condition does to that of the Sun, or the

Jupiter state to the evolution of the Moon. Therefore, when we
contemplate the past, present, and future of the earth's evolution,
we may speak of the Saturn, Sun, Moon, Earth, Jupiter, Venus,
and Vulcan evolutions.

Just as these far-reaching conditions of the evolution of our
earth lie disclosed to clairvoyant vision, the same vision is also
able to cover the nearer future. There is a picture of the future
corresponding to every picture of the past. In speaking of such
things, however, one fact must be emphasized which should

[385]

298

An Outline of Occult Science
be taken into strict account: that in order to recognize facts of
this kind, one must absolutely do away with the idea that they
can be fathomed through mere philosophical reflection. These
things cannot, and never should be investigated by that kind
of thinking. Anyone would be labouring under a prodigious
delusion who, after becoming acquainted with the teachings of
occult science regarding the Moon state, thinks that he could
discover the future conditions of Jupiter by comparing those of
the Moon and Earth. These conditions must be investigated only
when the requisite clairvoyant consciousness has been attained;
but once communicated to others after such investigation, they
can be understood without clairvoyant consciousness.

Now the occultist finds himself in quite a different position,
with regard to observations concerning the future, from that in
which he stands with regard to those of the past. It is impossible
at first for man to contemplate future events as impartially as
he does those of the past. Future events excite human will and
feeling; while the past affects us in quite a different way. He
who observes life knows how true this is of everyday existence;
but how enormously this truth is enhanced, and what an intimate
bearing it has upon the hidden facts of life, can only be realized
by one who has some knowledge of the supersensible world.

That is the reason why those who know such things are very
definitely limited as to what they are allowed to give out. Certain

[386]

things bearing on the future can, in fact, be imparted only to
those who have themselves determined to follow the path leading
to the supersensible worlds. Such people by their mental attitude
have acquired something which gives them the disinterestedness
necessary for the reception of these teachings. For this reason
certain secret facts, even of the past and present, can be spoken
of only to those who are prepared for them in this way. These are
facts so closely connected with future evolution, that their effect
on the human soul is similar to that produced by communications
regarding the future itself.

299

This explains, also, why the information in this book
concerning the present and the future is given in the merest
outline as compared with the more detailed descriptions of the
evolution of the world and of humanity in the past. What is
said here is not intended to appeal to the love of sensation in
the smallest degree; not even to awaken it. We shall only state
where the answer can be found to vital questions which naturally
present themselves to one who holds a certain definite attitude of
mind.

Just as the great cosmic evolution can be portrayed in the
successive states, from the Saturn to the Vulcan period, so also
is this possible for shorter periods of time; for example, for
those of the evolution of the earth. Since that mighty upheaval
which terminated the ancient Atlantean life, successive periods
of human evolution have followed one another which have been
called in this work the ancient Indian, the ancient Persian, the

Egypto-Chaldean, and the Greco-Roman. The fifth period is that
in which humanity finds itself to-day,—it is the present time.

[387]

This period gradually took its rise in the eleventh, twelfth, and
thirteen centuries A.D., after a period of preparation commencing
in the fourth and fifth centuries.

The Greco-Roman period
preceding it began about the eighth century B.C. When one-third
of this period had elapsed, the Christ-event took place.

During the transition from the Egypto-Chaldean to the Greco-

Roman period, the attitude of the human mind and, indeed,
all human faculties, underwent a change.

In the first of
these two periods what we now know as logical thinking, as
a mere intellectual concept of the world, was still wanting. The
knowledge which a man now acquires through his intelligence,
he then gained in a manner suited to that time,—directly through
an inner, in a certain sense, clairvoyant cognition. He perceived
the things around him, and while perceiving them there arose
within his soul the percept, the image that was needed. Whenever
knowledge is gained in this way, not only pictures of the physical

300

An Outline of Occult Science
sense-world come to light, but from the depths of consciousness
a certain knowledge of facts and beings arises which are not
of the physical world.

This was a remnant of the ancient
dim clairvoyance, once the common property of the whole of
humanity.

During the Greco-Roman period an ever-increasing number
of individuals appeared without these capacities.

Intelligent
reflection concerning things took their place. Mankind was more

[388]

and more shut off from the immediate perception of the psycho-
spiritual world, and was more and more restricted to forming
a picture of it through intelligence and feeling. This condition
lasted more or less during the whole of the fourth division of the
post-Atlantean period. Only those individuals who had preserved
the old mental state as an inheritance could still become directly
conscious of the spiritual world. But these were stragglers from
an earlier time. Their manner of gaining knowledge was no
longer suitable for later conditions. For, as a consequence of
the laws of evolution, old faculties of the soul lose something of
their former significance when new faculties appear. Human life
then adapts itself to these new faculties, and can no longer use
the old ones properly.

There were individuals,
however,
who began in full
consciousness to add to the powers of intelligence and feeling
already gained, the development of other and higher powers,
which made it possible for them once more to penetrate into the
psycho-spiritual world. To this end they were obliged to set to
work in a different way from that in which the pupils of the old

Initiates had been trained. The latter had not been obliged to take
into account those faculties of the soul which were developed
only in the fourth period. The method of occult training which
has been described in this work as that of the present age, began
in its first rudiments in the fourth period. But it was then only
in its beginning, it could not attain real maturity until the fifth

[389]

period (from the twelfth and thirteenth centuries onward). Those

301
who sought to rise into supersensible worlds in this manner
could learn something of the higher regions of existence through
the exercise of their own imagination, inspiration, and intuition.

Those who went no further than the development of the faculties
of reason and feeling could learn only through tradition what had
been known to ancient clairvoyance. This was handed on, either
by word of mouth or in writing, from generation to generation.

Neither could those born later know anything of the real nature
of the Christ-event save by such traditions, if they did not rise to
the level of the supersensible worlds. Certainly there were such

Initiates who still possessed the natural faculties of supersensible
perception and yet who, through their development, had ascended
into the higher worlds, in spite of their disregard of the new
powers of intelligence and feeling. Through them a transition
was effected from the old method of Initiation to the new. Such
persons lived in later times as well. The essential characteristic
of the fourth period is that, by the exclusion of the soul from
direct communion with the psycho-spiritual world, the human
faculties of intelligence and feeling were thereby strengthened
and invigorated. The souls whose powers of intelligence and
feeling had at that time developed to a great extent as the result
of former incarnations, carried over with them the fruits of this
development into their incarnations during the fifth period. As a

[390]

compensation for this exclusion from the higher worlds, mighty
traditions of Ancient Wisdom then existed, especially those of
the Christ-event, which by the power of their content gave men
confident knowledge of the higher worlds.

But there were still certain human beings existing who had
evolved the higher powers of cognition in addition to the faculties
of reason and feeling. It devolved upon them to learn the facts of
the higher worlds, and especially of the Mystery of the Christ-
event, by direct supersensible perception. From these individuals
there always flowed into the souls of other men as much as was
intelligible and good for them.

302

An Outline of Occult Science

The first spreading of Christianity was to take place just at
a time when the capacities for supersensible cognition were
undeveloped in a great part of humanity.

And this is why
tradition at that time possessed such mighty power. The strongest
possible force was necessary to lead mankind to a faith in a
supersensible world which they themselves could not perceive.

How Christianity worked during that period has been shown in
previous pages. There were always those, however, who were
able to rise into higher worlds through imagination, inspiration,
and intuition. These men were the post-Christian successors of
the old Initiates, the teachers and members of the Mysteries. Their
task was to recognize again, through their own faculties, what
man had been able to perceive through ancient clairvoyance, and

[391]

through the methods of ascent into higher worlds taught in the
old Initiations; and in addition to this, to acquire the knowledge
of the real nature of the Christ-event.

Thus there arose, among these “New Initiates,” a knowledge
embracing everything contained in the old form of Initiation;
but the central point of this teaching was the higher knowledge
concerning the Mysteries of the coming of the Christ. Such
teaching could only filter through into the general life of the
world in scanty measure while the human souls of the fourth
period were further developing the faculties of intellect and
feeling; therefore, while this lasted, the doctrine was in truth
secret. Then began the dawn of the new period designated as
the fifth. Its essential characteristic lay in the progress made
in the evolution of the intellectual faculties, which were then
developed to a very high degree, and will unfold still further
in the future. This process has been slowly going on from the
twelfth and thirteenth centuries, becoming ever more rapid from
the sixteenth century up to the present time.

Under these influences the evolution of the fifth period became
an ever-increasing endeavour to foster the powers of intellect,
while, on the contrary, the knowledge by faith of former times,

303
and traditional wisdom, gradually lost its hold over the human
soul. On the other hand, however, from the twelfth and thirteenth
centuries on, there developed that which may be called an
ever increasing flow of cognition born of modern clairvoyant
consciousness. This “hidden knowledge” flows even though
at first quite imperceptibly, into the human concepts of that

[392]

period. It is only natural that even up to the present time the
purely intellectual forces should have maintained an antagonistic
attitude toward this knowledge. But that which must come to
pass will do so in spite of all temporary antagonism. That “hidden
knowledge” which is taking possession of humanity more and
more may be called symbolically, the “wisdom of the Holy

Grail.”

For he who learns to understand this symbol in its deeper
meaning, as it is told in story and legend, will find that it
symbolizes the nature of what has been called above, the
knowledge of the new Initiation, with the Christ Mystery as
its central point. Modern Initiates may therefore be called “the

Initiates of the Grail.” The preliminary stages of the path to
the supersensible worlds described in this book, leads to the

“Wisdom of the Grail.” It is a peculiarity of this wisdom that
its facts can be investigated only when the necessary means, as
described in this book, have been acquired. Once investigated,
however, these facts can be understood by means of those very
soul-forces which are the result of the evolution of the fifth
period. Indeed, it will become more and more evident that to
an ever increasing extent those forces find satisfaction through
this knowledge. We are now living at a time in which this
knowledge must be absorbed by human consciousness in general
to a much fuller extent than was formerly the case. And it
is from this point of view that the teachings contained in this

Christ-event will grow ever more powerful in proportion as

[393]

human evolution assimilates the Wisdom of the Grail. The inner
side of the development of Christianity will more and more keep

304

An Outline of Occult Science
pace with the exoteric side. That which may be learned through
imagination, inspiration and intuition, concerning the higher
worlds, in connection with the Christ Mystery, will penetrate
ever more and more human thinking, feeling, and willing. The

“hidden wisdom of the Grail” will be revealed, and as an inner
force will more and more permeate the manifestations of human
life.

Through the whole of the fifth period, knowledge concerning
the supersensible world will flow into human consciousness; and
when the sixth period begins, humanity will be able to regain on
a higher level that clairvoyance which it possessed at an earlier
epoch in a dim and indistinct manner. Yet the new acquisition
will take a form quite different from the old. What the soul knew
of higher worlds in ancient times, was not permeated by its own
forces of intellect and feeling. Its knowledge was instinctive. In
the future it will not only have instincts, but it will understand them, and feel them to be the essence of its own nature. When
the soul learns a fact concerning some other being or thing,
its intellect will find this fact verified through its own nature.

Or when some fact regarding an ethical law or human conduct
presents itself, the soul will say to itself: “My feeling is only
justified when I carry out what is implied in this knowledge.”

[394]

Such a condition of soul will have to be developed by a large
part of humanity in the sixth period.

In a certain manner, that which human evolution accomplished
during the third period—the Egypto-Chaldean—is repeated in the
fifth. At that time the soul could still perceive certain facts of the supersensible worlds, but this perception was disappearing. For
the intellectual faculties were at that time beginning to develop
and it was their mission to at first exclude man from the higher
worlds. In the fifth period supersensible facts which in the third
period were perceived in hazy clairvoyance, are again becoming
manifest; but they are now interpenetrated by the intellectual and
emotional life of the individual man. They are also imbued with

305
what may be imparted to the soul by a knowledge of the Christ

Mystery; therefore they assume a form totally different from that
which they had previously.

Whereas in ancient times impressions from the higher worlds
were felt as forces acting from out a spiritual world to which
man did not properly belong, through development in later times
these impressions are felt as those of a world into which man
is growing, of which he more and more forms a part. Let no
one suppose that a repetition of the Egypto-Chaldean civilization
can take place in such a way that the soul would merely regain
what then existed, and which has been handed on from that time.

The Christ-impulse, rightly understood, impels the human soul
which has experienced it, to feel and conduct itself as a member
of a spiritual world, now recognizing it as a world to which it

[395]

belongs, outside of which it previously existed.

In the same way that the third reappears in the fifth period,
in order to become penetrated with those new qualities which
the human soul gained during the fourth, so similarly the second
period will revive within the sixth and the first, the ancient Indian, during the seventh. All the marvelous wisdom of ancient India
which the great teachers of that day were able to proclaim, will
reappear in the seventh period, as living truth in human souls.

Now the changes in the earthly environment of man take
place in a manner which bears a certain relationship to his own
evolution. When the seventh period has run its course, the earth
will experience an upheaval which may be compared with the
one which separated Atlantean from post-Atlantean times. And
the transformed earth will again continue its evolution in seven
divisions of time. The human souls which will then incarnate
will experience, on a more exalted level, the kinship with the
higher worlds which was possessed by the Atlanteans at a lower
stage. But only those individuals will be able to cope with the
new conditions of the earth who have built into their souls the
qualities made possible by the influences of the Greco-Roman

306

An Outline of Occult Science
age, and of the periods following it,—the fifth, sixth, and seventh
of the post-Atlantean evolution.

The inner nature of such souls will correspond to that which the
earth has become by that time. All other souls must then remain

[396]

behind, although up to that point they had been able to choose
whether or not they would create for themselves the conditions
necessary to advance with the others. Those souls alone will be
ripe for the conditions arising after the next great catastrophe, who
at the point of transition from the fifth to the sixth post-Atlantean
period have attained the capacity for penetrating supersensible
cognition with the forces of intelligence and feeling. The fifth
and sixth are in a way the decisive periods. Those souls which
have attained the goal of the sixth period will continue to develop
accordingly in the seventh; but the others will, under the altered
conditions of their surroundings, find but little opportunity to
proceed with their neglected task. Only in a distant future will
conditions again appear which will permit of this being done.

Thus evolution proceeds from period to period. Clairvoyance
observes not only those changes in the future in which the earth
alone takes part, but those also which take place in conjunction
with the heavenly bodies in its environment. A time will come
in which the terrestrial and human evolution will be advanced so
far that those forces and beings which were compelled to detach
themselves from the earth during the Lemurian period, so as to
afford to earth-beings the possibility of further progress, will be
able once more to unite with the earth. Then the moon will again
be united with the earth. This will happen because a sufficiently
large number of human souls will then possess the inner powers

[397]

which will enable them to render the Moon forces fruitful for
further development. And this will occur at a time when, side
by side with the high development of a certain number of human
souls, another development, that of those who have chosen the
path of evil, will parallel it. These straggler-souls will have
accumulated in their Karma so much sin, ugliness and evil, that

307
at first they will form a separate community, a perverse and
erring section of humanity, keenly opposing what we understand
as “good.” The “good” humanity will acquire little by little the
power of using the Moon forces, and will thereby so transform
the evil section as to enable it to keep pace with the advance of
evolution as a separate earth kingdom. Through these labours
of the good part of humanity, the earth, then reunited with the
moon, will be able, after a certain period of development, to
again unite with the sun and also with the other planets.

After an intermediate state, which will be a sojourn in a higher
world, the earth will be transformed into the Jupiter condition.

That which we now call the mineral kingdom will not exist on

Jupiter; the forces of this mineral kingdom will be transformed
into plant forces and the plant kingdom, which will have quite a
new form compared with its present one, will appear in the Jupiter
state as the lowest of the kingdoms, while above it, we find the
animal kingdom, likewise transformed. Next comes a human
kingdom—the descendants of the evil earth humanity. And then
will appear the descendants of the good earth humanity, as a

[398]

human kingdom on a higher level. A great part of the work of
this last human kingdom consists in ennobling the souls which
have sunk into the evil community, so that they may still gain
admittance into the true human kingdom.

The Venus condition will be of such a nature that the plant
kingdom will have disappeared also; the lowest kingdom will be
the animal kingdom once more transformed, and above that there
will be three successive human kingdoms of different degrees of
perfection. The earth will remain united with the sun during the

Venus period; while during that of Jupiter it will have happened
that, at a certain point, the sun separates from Jupiter, the latter
receiving its influence from outside.

Then there is again a
union between the sun and Jupiter, the transformation gradually
passing into the Venus state. During that state another planet
detaches itself from Venus, containing all kinds of beings which

308

An Outline of Occult Science
have opposed evolution, an “irredeemable moon,” as it were,
following a path of evolution which is of a character impossible
to describe, because it is too unlike anything which man can
experience on earth. But evolved humanity will pass on in a
fully spiritualized state of existence to the Vulcan evolution, a
description of which lies beyond the scope of this work.

We see that from the fruits of the “Wisdom of the Grail”

springs the highest ideal of human evolution conceivable for
man: spiritualization attained by him through his own efforts.

[399]

For in the end this spiritualization appears as a product of the
harmony which he wrought out in the fifth and sixth periods of the
present evolution, between the faculties of reason and emotion
which he had then attained and cognition of supersensible worlds.

That which he thus achieves within his soul will finally become
in itself the outer world. The human spirit rises to the mighty
impressions of its outer world and at first divines, later recognizes
spiritual beings behind these impressions; the human heart senses
the unspeakable exaltedness of the Spirit. Man can, however,
also recognize that his inner experiences of intellect, feeling and
character are but the germs of a nascent spirit world.

He who thinks that human liberty is not compatible with a
foreknowledge and predestination of future conditions, ought
to consider that man's freedom of action in the future depends
just as little on the arrangement of predestined things as does
his liberty of action with regard to inhabiting a house a year
hence, on the plans for which he is now settling. He will be
as free as his innermost being will permit, within the house he
has built; and he will be as free on Jupiter and on Venus as his
inner life permits, even under the conditions which will arise
there. Freedom will not depend on what has been predetermined
by antecedent conditions, but on what the soul has made out of
itself.

In the earth condition is contained that which has developed

309
within the preceding Saturn, Sun and

Moon states.

Earth-

[400]

man finds “wisdom” in the processes going on around him.

This wisdom is there as the fruit of what has happened in the
past. The Earth is the descendant of the “old Moon”; and the
latter developed with all that belonged to it, into the “Cosmos
of Wisdom.” The Earth is now at the commencement of an
evolution, which will introduce a new force into this wisdom.

It will cause man to feel himself an independent member of a
spiritual world. This will come to pass because his ego will have
been formed within him during the Earth period by the Lords of

Form, as was his physical body on Saturn by the Lords of Will,
his vital body on the Sun by the Lords of Wisdom, and his astral
body on the Moon by the Lords of Motion.

By means of the co-operation of the Lords of Will, Wisdom
and Motion, that which manifests as wisdom is brought forth.

Through the labours of these three classes of spirits, the beings
and processes of earth can harmonize in wisdom with the other
beings of their world. It is the Lords of Form who bestowed on
man his independent ego. In the future this ego will harmonize
with the beings of Earth, Jupiter, Venus, and of Vulcan, by means
of the force added to the existing wisdom during the Earth period.

It is the force of love. This force must begin to arise within earth-
humanity and the Cosmos of Wisdom develop into a Cosmos of

Love. Everything which the ego is able to unfold within itself must give birth to love. The all-embracing archetype of love is
set forth in the revelation of that lofty Sun-spirit indicated in the

[401]

description of the Christ Mystery. Through Him the germ of love
is planted in the innermost core of the human being; and from
this starting-point it must flow through the whole of evolution.

Just as the wisdom previously formed manifests in the forces of
the earthly sense-world, in the “elementary forces” of to-day, so
love itself will manifest in the future, in all phenomena, as the
new “elementary force.”

The secret of all future development is a recognition that

310

An Outline of Occult Science
everything achieved by man from a right comprehension of
evolution is a sowing of seed which must ripen into love. And
the greater the amount of love-force, so much the greater will
be the creative force available for the future. In that which
will grow from love, will lie the mighty forces leading to that
culminating point of spiritualization described above. The greater
the amount of spiritual knowledge that flows into human and
terrestrial evolution, so much more living and fruitful seed will
be stored up for the future. Spiritual knowledge is transmuted
through its own nature into love. The whole process which
has been described, beginning with the Greco-Roman period
and extending throughout the present time, shows how this
transformation, for which the beginning has now been made for
future times, is to take place and to what end. That which has
been prepared as wisdom on Saturn, Sun and Moon, is active
in the physical, etheric and astral bodies of man; it shows itself

[402]

there as the “Wisdom of the World”, but within the “ego” it
becomes intensified. The wisdom of the outer world becomes
inner wisdom in man from the Earth period onward and when it
is concentrated in him, it becomes the germ of love. Wisdom is
the necessary preliminary condition for love; love is the fruit of
wisdom, reborn in the ego.

[403]

Chapter VII. Details from the

Domain of Occult Science Man's

Etheric Body

When the higher principles of man are observed with clairvoyant
vision, the mode of perception is never precisely the same as that
which comes from the outer senses. If we touch an object, and
experience a sensation of warmth, we must distinguish between
that which comes from the object, that which, as it were, streams
out from it, and our own psychic experience. The inner psychic
experience of perceiving warmth is something distinct from the
heat which streams from the object. Now let us imagine this
psychic experience quite by itself without the outer object. Let us
call up the experience of a sensation of heat in our soul, without
the presence of any external physical object to cause it. If such a
sensation simply existed without cause, it would be mere fancy.

The student of occult science experiences such inner perceptions
without any physical cause. But at a certain stage of development
they present themselves in such a manner that he knows (it has
been shown that by the very nature of the experience he can
know) that the inner perception is not fancy, but is caused by a
psycho-spiritual being belonging to a supersensible world, just

[404]

as the ordinary sensation of heat, for example, is caused by an
external physical-sense object.

It is the same with the perception of colour in the supersensible
world. Here we must distinguish between the colour associated
with the outer object, and the inner colour-sensation in the soul.

Let us call up the soul's inner sensation when it perceives a red
object in the physical, outer world of the senses. Let us imagine

312

An Outline of Occult Science
that we retain a very vivid recollection of the impression, but
that we are looking away from the object.

Let us imagine
what we still retain as a memory-picture of the colour, to be an
inner experience. We shall then distinguish between that which
is an inner experience of the colour, and the external colour
itself. These inner experiences differ entirely in their content
from impressions of the outer senses. They bear much more the
impress of what is felt as joy and sorrow than that of normal
physical sensation. Now let us imagine an inner experience of
this kind arising in the soul, without any suggestion from an
outer sense object. A clairvoyant may have an experience of
this kind, and may know too, in that case, that it is no fancy,
but the expression of a psycho-spiritual being.

Now if this
psycho-spiritual being excites the same impression as does a red
object of the physical-sense world, then that being is red. There
will, however, always be the external impression first, and then
the inner experience of colour, in the case of the physical-sense

[405]

object; in that of the genuine clairvoyance of a man of to-day,
it must be the contrary,—first the inner experience, shadowy, like a mere recollection of colour, and then a picture, growing
more and more vivid. The less heed we pay to this necessary
sequence of events the less we are able to distinguish between
actual, spiritual perception and the delusions of fancy (illusion,
hallucination, etc.).

The vividness of the picture in a psycho-spiritual perception of
this kind, whether it remains quite shadowy, like a dim concept,
or whether it impresses us as intensively as an outer object,
depends altogether upon the clairvoyant's stage of development.

Now, the general impression obtained by the clairvoyant of the
etheric body, may be thus described. When the clairvoyant has
strengthened his will power to such a degree that, in spite of the
fact that an individual stands before him in a physical body, he
can abstract his attention from what the physical eye sees,—he
is then able to see clairvoyantly into the space occupied by the

313
man's physical body. Of course, a great increase of will power
is necessary, in order to withdraw the attention not only from
something in the mind, but from something standing before one,
in such a way that the physical impression is quite extinguished.

But this increase of will is possible, and is brought about by
exercises for the attainment of supersensible cognition. The
clairvoyant can then first have a general impression of the etheric
body. Within his soul there arises the same inner sensation which
he has, let us say, at the sight of a peach blossom; then this

[406]

becomes vivid, so that he is able to say that the etheric body has
the colour of peach blossoms. He next perceives the separate
organs and currents of the etheric body. A further description of
the etheric body may be given by relating the psychic experiences
which correspond to sensations of heat or of sound-impressions,
etc., for this etheric body is not merely a colour phenomenon.

The astral body and the other principles of the human being,
may also be described in like manner. He who takes this into
consideration will understand just how descriptions should be
taken which are given by occult science.

The Astral World

As long as we observe the physical world only, the earth,
as man's dwelling place, appears like a separate cosmic body.

But when supersensible cognition rises to higher spheres, this
separation ceases. Thus one can say that the imagination, when
beholding the earth, at the same time also perceives the Moon
condition as it has developed up to the present time.

Now that world which is entered in this way is one to which
not only the supersensible part of the Earth belongs, but is one
in which also other cosmic bodies are imbedded, which in a
physical sense are entirely separate from the earth. Therefore,
the observer of supersensible worlds thus beholds not only the
supersensible part of the earth, but also the supersensible part
of other cosmic beings. If one should be impelled to ask why
clairvoyants do not describe the appearance of Mars, etc., he

[407]

314

An Outline of Occult Science
should bear in mind that it is primarily a question of observing
supersensible conditions of other planetary bodies, whereas the
questioner is thinking of physical sense conditions. Therefore
in this work it was possible to speak of certain relations of the
earth's evolution to the simultaneous evolution on Saturn, Jupiter,

Mars, etc. Now when the human astral body has been drawn
away by sleep, it belongs not only to the earth, but to worlds
of which still other regions of the universe (stellar worlds) are a
part. Indeed, these worlds extend their influence to man's astral
body even when he is awake. For this reason the name “astral
body” appears to be justified.

Of Man's Life After Death

Mention has been made, in the course of this book, of the
time during which the astral body still remains joined to the
etheric body of man after death. During this time there exists
a slowly paleing recollection of the whole earth life just ended.

The duration of this time varies in different individuals.

It
depends upon the strength with which the astral body clings to
the etheric body, on the power which the former has over the
latter. Supersensible cognition can gain an idea of this power
by observing a person who, judging from his degree of fatigue,
must of necessity fall asleep, but, by sheer inner force, keeps
awake. It then appears that different people can keep awake for
different lengths of time without being overpowered by sleep.

[408]

The memory of the past life, in other words the connection with
the etheric body, lasts about as long after death as the length of
time a man can keep awake when, in the most extreme case, he
is compelled to.

When the etheric body is detached from the individual after
death, something of it nevertheless remains for man's whole
subsequent development; this may be described as an extract,
or the essence of it. This extract contains the result of the past
life, and is the vehicle of all that which, during man's spiritual

315
development between death and a new birth, unfolds like a germ
for the following life.

The duration of time between death and a new birth is
determined by the fact that the ego, as a rule, returns to
the physical sense-world only when that world has been so
transformed that the ego can experience something new. During
its sojourn in spiritual regions, its dwelling place on earth
undergoes a change. But this change is connected with the great
changes in the universe, with changes in the constellation of
the earth, sun and so forth. These are changes in which certain
repetitions take place, in connection with new conditions. They
find an external expression in the fact, for example, that the point
in the vault of heaven at which the sun rises at the beginning of
spring makes a complete circuit in the course of about twenty-six
thousand years. Hence this vernal point, in the course of the
period mentioned, moves from one region of the heavens to

[409]

another. In the course of the twelfth part of that time, that is
to say, in about twenty-one hundred years, conditions on the
earth have changed sufficiently for the human soul to experience
something new upon it since its previous incarnation. However,
since the experiences of an individual vary according to whether
he is incarnated as a woman or as a man, there are, as a rule, two
incarnations within the time stated, one as a man and one as a
woman. But these things are also dependent upon the nature of
the forces which man carries with him from his earthly existence
through death. Therefore all the statements given here are to be
taken only in a general sense, but can be subject to the greatest
variations in special cases.

The Course Of Human Life

Man's life, as it manifests itself in the sequence of events
between birth and death, can be fully understood only by taking
into account both the physical body with its senses and the
changes undergone by man's supersensible principles. Occult

316

An Outline of Occult Science
science views those changes in the following manner. Physical
birth is seen to be the detachment of the human being from its
maternal covering. Forces which before birth the embryo shared
in common with its mother's body, are present independently in
the child after birth. But in later life supersensible events, similar to those of the sense-world at physical birth, become perceptible
to supersensible observation. That is, the etheric body of the

[410]

human being up to the change of teeth (the sixth or seventh
year) is still enveloped in an etheric sheath. The etheric sheath
falls away at that period, and then the “birth” of the etheric body
occurs. But man is still surrounded by an astral sheath, which
falls away between its twelfth and sixteenth year (at the time of
puberty). This is the “birth” of the astral body; and at a still later period the real ego is born.33

Now after the birth of the ego, man lives in such a way that
he adapts himself to the conditions of the world and of life, and
occupies himself within them, in accordance with the principles
active through his ego,—the sentient,- the intellectual- and the
consciousness-soul. Then there comes a time in which the etheric
body retraces the process of its development from the seventh
year onward, in reverse order. At first the astral body has so
developed itself that it unfolds that which was present within it
at birth as a germ. After the birth of the ego, this astral body
enriches itself by experiencing the outer world. Finally, at a
definite time, it begins to nourish itself spiritually by consuming
its own etheric body; it actually lives upon the etheric body. The
decay of the physical body in old age is a consequence of this.

The course of human life therefore falls into three divisions:

[411]

a time of unfoldment for the physical and etheric bodies, then
one in which the astral body and the ego develop, and lastly

33 The suggestive points of view for the conduct of education resulting from a knowledge of these supersensible facts are presented in my little book, The Education of Children from the Standpoint of Spiritual Science, in which will be found fuller details of what can here only be hinted at.

317
that in which the etheric and physical bodies are changed back
again. But the astral body plays a part in all the events that
take place between birth and death. Since it is really born in a
spiritual sense only between the twelfth and sixteenth years and
must, during man's declining years, draw upon the forces of the
etheric and physical bodies, that which it is able to perform by its
own powers will develop more slowly than if it were not within
a physical and an etheric body. After death, when the physical
and etheric bodies have fallen away, evolution, during the time
of purification, proceeds in such a manner that it occupies about
one-third of the duration of life between birth and death.

The Higher Regions Of The Spiritual World

By imagination, inspiration, and intuition, supersensible
cognition gradually ascends into those regions of the spiritual
world within which it can reach the beings who have to do with
human and cosmic evolution. And thus it also becomes possible
to trace human evolution between death and a new birth in such
a way that it becomes comprehensible. Now there are still higher
regions of existence, which can only be briefly indicated here.

When supersensible cognition has risen to intuition, it lives in
a world of spiritual beings.

These too, are evolving.

That
which concerns humanity of the present day extends upward, in a
certain sense, as far as the world of intuition. True, man receives

[412]

impulses from yet higher worlds in the course of his evolution
between death and re-birth. But he does not experience these
impulses directly; they are brought to him by beings belonging
to the spiritual world. And if these are considered, everything
that happens reveals itself to man. But the special conditions
of these beings, that which they themselves require in order to
guide human evolution, can only be observed by means of a
cognition that transcends intuition. We thus have a glimpse of
worlds which we must so picture that within them the most highly
spiritual features of the earth are there among the lowest. Logical
decisions, for example, count among the highest things within

318

An Outline of Occult Science
the earthly sphere; while the activities of the mineral kingdom
are among the lowest. Now in those higher spheres, logical
decisions correspond to about what the mineral activities are on
earth. Above the domain of intuition, lies the region in which the
cosmic plan is woven out of spiritual causes.

The Principles Of Man

When it is said that the ego works on the human principles,
on the physical, etheric, and astral bodies, and transforms them
in reverse order into Spirit-Self, Life-Spirit, and Spirit-Man, this
statement relates to the work of the ego on the human being by
means of the highest faculties, the development of which was
begun only under earthly conditions. But this transformation is

[413]

preceded at a lower level by another change, giving rise to the
sentient-, the intellectual- or rational-, and the consciousness-
soul. For while, in the course of human evolution, the sentient-
soul is being formed, changes are taking place in the astral
body; the growth of the intellectual-soul expresses itself in
transformations in the etheric body; and that of the consciousness-
soul in similar transformations in the physical body.

Fuller
information on this subject has been given in this book in
the accounts of the evolution of the earth. Thus in a certain
sense we may say that the sentient-soul itself is the result of
a transformed astral body, the intellectual- or rational-soul of
a transformed etheric body, and the consciousness-soul of a
transformed physical body. But we may also say that these three
divisions of the soul are parts of the astral body; for example, the
consciousness-soul is only possible because it is an astral entity
existing in a physical body suited to it. It lives an astral life
within a physical body fashioned to be its dwelling place.

The Dream State

A description of the dream state has been given in another
chapter of this book. On the one hand it is to be regarded as
a relic of the old picture-consciousness peculiar to man during
the Moon evolution, and also during a great part of the evolution

319
of the Earth. Evolution goes forward in such a way that earlier
conditions resolve themselves into later ones. And so, in the
dream state, there now appears in man a relic of what was once

[414]

his normal condition. But at the same time this condition from
another aspect is different from the old picture-consciousness.

For since its development, the ego also has taken part in those
activities of the astral body which are carried on during sleep in
the dream life. Thus through the presence of the ego there arises
in dreams a transformed picture-consciousness. But since the ego
does not consciously exercise its authority over the astral body
during dream life, nothing belonging to the sphere of that life can
be regarded as being really able to lead to a knowledge of higher
worlds in an occult sense. Something similar holds good with
regard to what is often called vision, premonition, or “second
sight.” These arise through silencing the ego and the consequent
appearance of remnants of the old condition of consciousness. In
spiritual science these are of no value. What may be observed in
them cannot in any real sense be regarded as a result of it.

The Attainment Of Supersensible Knowledge

The path to the attainment of knowledge of the higher worlds,
which has been more fully described in this book, may also
be called the “direct path of knowledge.” In addition to this
path there is another, which we may designate as the “path of
feeling.” It would be quite a mistake, however, to believe that
the former had nothing to do with the development of feeling.

On the contrary, it leads to the greatest possible deepening of
the life of feeling. But the “path of feeling” addresses itself

[415]

directly and solely to the feelings, and seeks from this point
to rise to knowledge. It rests on the fact that when the soul
entirely surrenders itself to a feeling for a certain length of
time, the latter is transformed into knowledge, into imaginative
perception. When, for example, the soul is filled for weeks or
months, or even longer, with the feeling of humility, the content
of the feeling becomes transformed into a perception. Now a

320

An Outline of Occult Science
path leading to supersensible regions may be found by devoting
oneself to such feelings one by one; but for the man of today,
bound by the ordinary circumstances of life, this is not easily
carried out. Solitude, retirement from the life of the present
day, is almost indispensable. For the impressions of everyday
life disturb the soul especially at the beginning of development,
through absorption in certain feelings. On the other hand, the
path of knowledge described in this book can be pursued in every
situation of present-day life.

Observation Of Special Events And Beings In The Spiritual

World

The question may be asked whether inner concentration and
the other means described for the attainment of supersensible
cognition permit us to observe only in a general way what
happens between death and a new birth or other spiritual events;
or whether they furnish the possibility of observing quite definite
events and beings, as, for example, any given deceased person.

To this we must answer that one who has acquired the ability

[416]

to see in the spiritual world by the methods explained, can
also perceive particular events which occur there; he acquires
the power of putting himself in communication with individuals
living in the spiritual world between death and a new birth.

It must be observed, however, that in an occult sense this
ought to take place only after the proper training required for
supersensible cognition has been undergone. For not until then is
it possible to distinguish between illusion and reality, in regard to
certain events and beings. A man who tries to observe particular
cases without due instruction, may fall a victim to innumerable
deceptions. The training which leads to the observation in higher
worlds of what has been described in this book, also leads to the
ability to trace the post-mortem life of any special individual, and
no less does it lead to the observation and comprehension of all
psycho-spiritual beings who, from the hidden worlds, work upon
the visible ones. Correct observation of individual cases is only

321
possible, however, on the basis of a knowledge of the universal
great facts of the spiritual world,—facts regarding the world and
humanity which concern every human being. The desire for the
one without the other, leads one into error.

Footnotes

***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AN

OUTLINE OF OCCULT SCIENCE***

Credits

December 20, 2009

Project Gutenberg TEI edition 1

Produced by Juliet Sutherland, David King, and
the

Online

Distributed

Proofreading

Team
at

<http://www.pgdp.net/>.

A Word from Project Gutenberg

This file should be named 30718-pdf.pdf or 30718-pdf.zip.

This and all associated files of various formats will be found
in:

http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/0/7/1/30718/

Updated editions will replace the previous one — the old
editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means
that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the

Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United

States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.

Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this
license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™
electronic works to protect the Project Gutenberg™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may
not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies
of this eBook, complying with the rules is very easy.

You
may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of
derivative works, reports, performances and research. They may
be modified and printed and given away — you may do practically
anything with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

The Full Project Gutenberg License

Please read this before you distribute or use this work.

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the
free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this
work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase

“Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of
the Full Project Gutenberg™ License (available with this file or online at http://www.gutenberg.org/license).

Section 1.

General Terms of Use & Redistributing Project

Gutenberg™ electronic works

1.A.

By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand,
agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual
property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree
to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using
and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do
not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may
obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the
fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

The Full Project Gutenberg License

331

1.B.

“Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by
people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.

There are a few things that you can do with most Project

Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the
full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve
free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See
paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the

Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all
the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in
the United States. If an individual work is in the public domain
in the United States and you are located in the United States, we
do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing,
performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the
work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed.

Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely
sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms
of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name
associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms
of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with
its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it
without charge with others.

332

An Outline of Occult Science

1.D.

The copyright laws of the place where you are located also
govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most
countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside
the United States, check the laws of your country in addition
to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying,
displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works
based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The

Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright
status of any work in any country outside the United States.

1.E.

Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.

The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work

(any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears,
or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is
accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost
and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy
it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project

Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
http://www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.

The Full Project Gutenberg License

333

If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that
it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can
be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing
access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated
with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3.

If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and
distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder.

Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™

License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright
holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.

Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™

License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of
this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5.

Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1

334

An Outline of Occult Science
with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the

Project Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6.

You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form,
including any word processing or hypertext form. However,
if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project

Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII”

or other format used in the official version posted on the official

Project Gutenberg™ web site (http://www.gutenberg.org), you
must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide
a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining
a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla

ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full

Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.

Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™
works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.

You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
provided that

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive
from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using
the method you already use to calculate your applicable
taxes.

The fee is owed to the owner of the Project

The Full Project Gutenberg License

335

Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation.

Royalty payments must
be paid within 60 days following each date on which
you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your
periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary

Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section

4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user
who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days
of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full

Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user
to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a
physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access
to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy,
if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported
to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9.

If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and

Michael Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark.

Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

336

An Outline of Occult Science

1.F.

1.F.1.

Project

Gutenberg
volunteers
and
employees
expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on,
transcribe and proofread public domain works in creating the

Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project

Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they
may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited
to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a
copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective
or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer
codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2.

LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES —

Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described
in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark,
and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability
to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.

YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES

FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF

WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT

THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.

YOU AGREE

THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER,

AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT

WILL

NOT

BE

LIABLE

TO

YOU

FOR

ACTUAL,

DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR

The Full Project Gutenberg License

337

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3.

LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND — If
you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days
of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)

you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person
you received the work from. If you received the work on a
physical medium, you must return the medium with your written
explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu
of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.

If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund
in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.

Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set
forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS

FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.

Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties
or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.

If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement

338

An Outline of Occult Science
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer
or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not
void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.

INDEMNITY — You agree to indemnify and hold the

Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of
the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless
from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you
do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project

Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or
deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect
you cause.

Section 2.

Information about the Mission of Project

Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution
of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety
of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new
computers.

It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of
volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

The Full Project Gutenberg License

339

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™'s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the

Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to
provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™
and future generations.

To learn more about the Project

Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts
and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.

Section 3.

Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary

Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non
profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws
of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the

Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax
identification number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted
at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.

Contributions
to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and
your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr.

S. Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are
scattered throughout numerous locations. Its business office is
located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801)

596-1887, email business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up

340

An Outline of Occult Science
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web
site and official page at http://www.pglaf.org

For additional contact information:

Dr. Gregory B. Newby

Chief Executive and Director
gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4.

Information about Donations to the Project

Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
wide spread public support and donations to carry out its mission
of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works
that can be freely distributed in machine readable form accessible
by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment.

Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important
to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws
regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of
the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform
and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many
fees to meet and keep up with these requirements.

We do
not solicit donations in locations where we have not received
written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states
where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know

The Full Project Gutenberg License

341
of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from
donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot
make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations
received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp
our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current
donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in
a number of other ways including checks, online payments
and credit card donations.

To donate,
please visit:

http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate

Section 5.

General Information About Project Gutenberg™
electronic works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project

Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could
be freely shared with anyone. For thirty years, he produced
and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose
network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several
printed editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the
eBook's eBook number, often in several formats including plain
vanilla ASCII, compressed (zipped), HTML and others.

342

An Outline of Occult Science

Corrected editions of our eBooks replace the old file and take over the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file
is renamed. Versions based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving new filenames and etext numbers.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG
search facility:

http://www.gutenberg.org

This

Web
site
includes
information
about

Project

Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project

Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce
our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to
hear about new eBooks.

Document Outline

- Preface to the Fourth Edition.
- Author's Remarks To First Edition
- Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science
- Chapter II. The Nature of Man
- Chapter III. Sleep and Death

- Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

- Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

- Chapter VI. The Present and Future Evolution of the World and of Humanity

- Chapter VII. Details from the Domain of Occult Science Man's Etheric Body

- Footnotes
- Credits
- A Word from Project Gutenberg
- The Full Project Gutenberg License

Table of Contents

- Preface to the Fourth Edition.
- Author's Remarks To First Edition
- Chapter I. The Character of Occult Science
- Chapter II. The Nature of Man
- Chapter III. Sleep and Death

- Chapter IV. The Evolution of the World and Man

- Chapter V. Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

- Chapter VI. The Present and Future Evolution of the World and of Humanity

- Chapter VII. Details from the Domain of Occult Science Man's Etheric Body

- Footnotes
- Credits
- A Word from Project Gutenberg
- The Full Project Gutenberg License